Registration Nd 2 National Editorial Board  Free of Cost 1

JIS National Conference Organizing Committee Registration nd 2 National Editorial Board  Free of Cost 1. Prof. Himangshu Sekhar Maji Conference on Department of Pharmaceutical Technology, JIS University, Kolkata 2. Dr. Atanu Kotal Multidisciplinary Department of Chemistry, JIS University, Kolkata [All Accepted papers will be 3. Prof. Rina Bhattacharya published in Volume 2 of Research Department of Physics, JIS University, Kolkata 4. Dr. Souvik Chatterji JISU Journal of Department of Juridical Sciences, JIS University, Multidisciplinary Research] Kolkata (ONLINE) 5. Prof. Saikat Maity Department of Computer Science and Engineering, JIS University, Kolkata 2020 6. Dr. Mainak Mukhopadhyay Department of Biotechnology, JIS University, (10-11 July, 2020) Kolkata 8. Dr. Manua Banerjee Department of Earth Sciences, JIS University, Kolkata 9. Prof. Swades Ranjan Samanta Department of Education, JIS University, Kolkata 7. Dr. Moumita Poddar Department of Management Studies, JIS University, Kolkata 10. Prof. J. K. Mandal University of Kalyani, Kalyani, West Bengal 11. Dr. N. C. Mondal Ex-Editor, Indian J. Radio Sp. Physics, CSIR, New Delhi 12. Prof. Radharaman Pal Vidyasagar University, West Bengal 13. Prof. Sourangshu Mukhopadhyay University of Burdwan, Burdwan, West Bengal 14. Prof. Salil Biswas 81, Nilgunj Rd, Jagarata Pally, Deshpriya Nagar, Agarpara, Calcutta University, West Bengal Kolkata, West Bengal 700109 15. Dr. S. Joardar Tata Institute of Fundamental Research, GMRT Pune

www.jisuniversity.ac.in About JISNCMR2020 Call for Full Paper The conference will be a platform for academician to Venue JISNCMR is the Bi-annual National Conference share their findings and provide insight to explore JIS University on Multidisciplinary Research to bring together 81, Nilgunj Road, Agarpara, Kolkata, West current discoveries on Basic and Applied Sciences, innovative individuals and will be held on 10-11th Bengal 700109 Engineering, Health Sciences, Management and Law. July, 2020. JISNCMR aims to bring academicians, In this regard, authors are invited to submit their Advisory Committee research scholars, industrial experts in the field of formatted full papers including results, tables, figures, Chief Patron Science Technology and Management to a and references following the guidelines. Instructions common forum. All the registered papers (no Sardaar Taranjit Singh, Chancellor, JIS University, for authors are attached for ready reference. Authors Kolkata700 109, West Bengal registration fees this time) will be published in are requested to follow strictly the style of JISU the University Journal, titled JISU Journal of Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (attached here). Chief Adviser Multidisciplinary Research. hi hi l fl ) Sardaar Simarpreet Singh, Director, JIS University, Best Paper Award Kolkata 700 109, West Bengal About JIS University Like previous year, the “Best Paper Award” will be Patrons JIS University is a private university in conferred to the author(s) in each section presented at  Prof. Bimal Chandra Mal, Vice Chancellor, JIS Kolkata that is continuously delivering the best the conference, selected by the Program/Conference University, Kolkata 700 109 quality and world-class education as per the Chairs based on the best combined marks of paper  Prof Ajoy Kumar Ray, Director, JISIASR, demand of global sector. The university aims to Kolkata –700 091 reviewing, assessed by the Program Committee and emerge as a leading world-class university that  Prof. Tapan Kumar Chatterjee, Dean, JIS creates and disseminates knowledge upholding the paper presentation quality, assessed by session chairs. University, Kolkata 700 109 highest standards of instructions in Management, Important Dates and Quick Info  Dr. Tapan Kumar Saha, Director Affairs, JIS Pharmacy, Engineering and Technology, University, Kolkata 700 109 Email for paper submission: Hospitality, Law, Science including Remote [email protected] Organizing Chair Sensing & GIS. Along with academic excellence, Prof. A. B. Bhattacharya, Pro-Vice Chancellor, JIS Reviewing process: Peer reviewed the university curriculum imparts the life-long University, Kolkata 700 109 skills in the aspirants to mould them in the future Last Date of Submission: 30 June, 2020 Conveners professionals who may be best suited to serve the Acceptance Notification: 06 July, 2020  Dr. Saikat Maity, Head, Department of Computer nation and the world at large. JIS University Science and Engineering, JIS University, Kolkata 700 aims to be the best university in India and a Registration (no charge): 08 July, 2020 109  Dr. Dipankar Ghosh, Department of Biotechnology, preferred destination for research scholars, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 students and faculty members. Those aspiring to study at JIS University can be assured of the high- Program Chair quality education as the courses are duly Prof. R. Bhattacharya, Head, Department of Physics, JIS accredited and affiliated by UGC, AICTE, NCTE, University, Kolkata 700109 Bar Council of India (BCI), Pharmacy Council of Publication Chair India (PCI), and United Nations Academic Impact Dr. Mainak Biswas, Department of Computer Science and (UNAI). Engineering, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Format for JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Preparation of Manuscripts Manuscripts should be submitted in English and should be written according to sound grammar and proper terminology. Manuscripts should be typed in Times New Roman of 11 pt. font and in MS-Word 2007 format in one column with 2.5 cm margin at each side. Manuscript submission must be applied once in order to obtain only one submission ID number. Manuscript must be accompanied by a covering letter including Title of the paper, Area and Author(s) name.

Manuscript Submission Papers submitted for publication should not previously partially or fully published elsewhere; that it is not under consideration for publication elsewhere; that its publication has been approved by all co-authors, if any. The publisher will not be held legally responsible should there be any claims for compensation.

Manuscript Structure Manuscript literature and tenses must be written based on the passive 3rd. person and should be structured as: Title; Running title; Abstract; Keywords; Introduction; Materials and Methods; Results and Discussion; Conclusion; Acknowledgements and References submitted in a file with limited size. Title Page The title page should include: - The name(s) of the author(s) - A concise and informative title - The affiliation(s) and address(es) of the author(s) - The e-mail address and telephone numbers of the corresponding author Manuscript Title Title of the paper should not contain the name of locations, countries or cities of the research as well as abbreviations.

Running title Running title which is the short version of the main title should be also included.

Abstract An abstract of about 200 words that sketches the purpose of the study; basic procedures; main findings its novelty; discussions and the principal conclusions. Keywords Provide 4 to 5 keywords which can be used for indexing purposes. Keywords should not repeat the words of the manuscript title or contain abbreviations and shall be written in alphabetical order as separated by semicolon. Abbreviations should be defined at first mention and used consistently thereafter through the text. Introduction The Introduction should state the purpose of the investigation and identify clearly the gap of knowledge that will be filled in the Literature review study. Date and location of the research carried out throughout the study must be mentioned at the end of this section.

Literature Survey (Optional) This segment is optional and applies to authors who have done extensive study on any topic of recent interest.

Materials and methods The theoretical and experimental aspects of the research should be mentioned here. The Materials and Methods section should provide sufficient information to allow repetition of the experimental work. It should include precise descriptions and explanations of sampling procedures, experimental design, and essential sample characteristics and descriptive statistics, hypothesis tested, exact references to literature describing the tests used in the manuscript, number of data involved in statistical tests, etc. Results and Discussion The Results section should describe clearly the outcome of the study. Data should be presented briefly in the form of tables or figures. The Discussion should be an interpretation of the results and their significance with reference to work by other authors. Do not submit tables and graphs as photograph. Tables should be with the captions placed above in limited numbers. Figures Figures/ illustrations should be in high quality art work, within 200-300 dpi and separately provided in Excel format. Ensure that figures are clear, labeled and of a size that can be reproduced legibly in the journal. Conclusion This section should highlight the major discoveries and state what the added value of the main finding is, without literature references. Acknowledgements Acknowledgments of people, grants, funds, etc. should be placed in this section. The names of funding agencies should be written in full. Financial support affiliation of the study, if exists, must be mentioned in this section including the Grant number of financial support. References All the references should be cited throughout the manuscript text (excluding the abstract) by numbering within third bracket in order. The number of references extracted from each journal should not exceed 3 to 5 citations, which is the average acceptable amount. The number of references should not be less than 10 for original paper and less than 100 for review paper. It is substantially recommended to the authors to refer to more recent references rather than old and out of date ones. In preparing the references the following order is to be strictly maintained by the author(s): Author(s) name, Year of publication, Title, Volume (Issue), Pages: 1. Wang, J., Wang, Y and Li, Y., 2018. A novel hybrid strategy using three-phase feature extraction and a weighted regularized extreme learning machine for multi-step ahead wind speed prediction. Energies, 11 (2): 321.

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

A PEER REVIEWED REFEREED BI-ANNUAL INTERNATIONAL JOURNAL

Published by JIS University 81, Nilgunj Rd, Jagarata Pally, Deshpriya Nagar, Agarpara, Kolkata, West Bengal 700109

Volume 1, Issue 1 i December, 2019 JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Chief Patron

Sardar Taranjit Singh, Chancellor, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109, West Bengal

Chief Publication Adviser

Sardar Simarpreet Singh, Director, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109, West Bengal

Patrons

1. Prof. Bimal Chandra Mal, Vice Chancellor, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 2. Padma Shri Prof Ajoy Kumar Ray, Director, JISIASR, Kolkata – 700 091 3. Dr. Tapan Kumar Saha, Director Affiairs, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 4. Prof. Tapan Kumar Chatterjee, Dean, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109

Editorial Board

1. Prof. Himangshu Sekhar Maji Department of Pharmaceutical Technology, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

2. Prof. R. R. Paul Department of Oral and Dental Sciences, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

3. Prof. Shibnath Banerjee Department of Management Studies, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

4. Prof. Rina Bhattacharya Department of Physics, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

5. Dr. Atanu Kotal Department of Chemistry, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

6. Dr. Sanhita Banerjee Chattaraj Department of Mathematics, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

7. Dr. Souvik Chatterji Department of Juridical Sciences, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

8. Dr. Saikat Maity Department of Computer Science and Engineering, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

Volume 1, Issue 1 ii December, 2019 JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

9. Prof. Swades Ranjan Samanta Department of Education, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

10. Dr. Mainak Mukhopadhyay Department of Biotechnology, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email:[email protected]

11. Dr. Manua Banerjee Department of Earth Science, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

12. Dr. Sateyendra Singh Tomar, Assistant Registrar JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Email: [email protected]

13. Prof. J. K. Mandal Department of Computer Science and Engineering, University of Kalyani, Kalyani, West Bengal Email: [email protected]

14. Dr. N. C. Mondal Ex-Editor, Indian J. Radio Sp. Physics, CSIR, New Delhi Email: [email protected]

15. Prof. Radharaman Pal Vidyasagar University, West Bengal Email: [email protected]

16. Prof. Sourangshu Mukhopadhyay University of Burdwan, Burdwan, West Bengal Email: [email protected]

17. Prof. Uday Chakraborty Department of mathematics and Computer Science, University of Missouri, USA Email: [email protected]

18. Prof. Jasjit S. Suri Atheropoint LLC, USA Email:[email protected]

19. Prof. Jeffrey M. Lichtman Founder Emeritus of the Society of Radio Astronomers, Texas, USA Email: [email protected]

20. Prof. John C. Mannone Department of Physics, East Tennessee area University, USA Email: [email protected];

Volume 1, Issue 1 iii December, 2019 JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Editor-in-Chief

Prof. A. B. Bhattacharya, Pro-Vice Chancellor, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109

Editors

Dr. Mainak Biswas, Department of Computer Science and Engineering, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Dr. Dipankar Ghosh, Department of Biotechnology, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109 Ms. Moumala Bhattacharjee, Department of Juridical Sciences, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109

Editorial Secretary

Mr. Gaurav Majumder, Assistant Registrar, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109

Editorial Support

Dr. Satyendra Singh Tomar, Assistant Registrar, JIS University, Kolkata 700 109

Journal Design

Dr. Saikat Maity, Department of Computer Science & Engineering, JIS University

Volume 1, Issue 1 iv December, 2019 JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Subjects Covered

Basic and Applied Sciences, Engineering, Health Sciences, Management and Law

Publication of Paper

Publication of original Research and Review articles, Short Contributions and Reports

Website: jisuniversity.ac.in

Features & Benefits of JISUJMR Authors

o Fast & Easy paper publishing process o Number to every article o JISUJMR provides “Soft copy of the Journal” to all Authors o JISUJMR provides individual "Soft copy of Certificate” to Authors, if requested.

Annual Subscription by Organizations & Individual Membership

Universities, Research Institutes, Graduate and Post Graduate Colleges of Science, Engineering, Management and Law as well as Technical Institutes can subscribe the hard copy of the Journal on annual basis. Annual subscription is INR 3,000 only.

Any individual can apply for annual membership. Members will get all the soft copies of the Journal for their personal use and additional information regarding JISU Conferences etc. The individual membership fee will be INR 1000 only.

Our strength

The authors are invited for contributing Research Papers for publication in JISUJMR. The papers will be published in JISUJMR which will receive high publicity and acquire high reputation (www.jisujmr.com). The Journal publishes original research articles, review articles, reports and technical notes. The Journal reviews papers within four to six weeks of submission and publishes accepted articles immediately upon receiving the final versions. Faster and quality reviewing process is our main strength.

All submitted papers will be subjected to a strict review process by two reviewers. Authors are reminded to follow the formatting requirement of the paper and to check the plagiarism very carefully before submission. All the accepted papers will be published in the Journal both as soft (online Issue with ISSN number) and hard copy.

Volume 1, Issue 1 v December, 2019 JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Area covered by the Journal

Physical and Biological Sciences, Medical Research, Pharmaceutical and Toxicology, Food and Nutrition, Remote Sensing & GIS, Bio-Medical Engineering, Electrical and Nuclear Engineering, Environmental Science and Engineering, Environmental Technology, Health Sciences, Oral and Dental Sciences, General and Civil Engineering, Process Engineering, Hydraulic Engineering, Industrial Engineering, Production and Operations Management, Total Quality Management, Materials and Mechanical Engineering, Mining and Metallurgy, Transportation, Hydraulic Engineering, Industrial Engineering, Management, Juridical Sciences and other allied areas.

Instruction to Authors

Authors are required to submit the full paper (PDF and Word format)

Authors can submit their papers at any time by mailing to:

Dr. Mainak Biswas, Editor [email protected]

Dr. Dipankar Ghosh, Editor [email protected]

Ms. Moumala Bhattacharjee, Editor [email protected]

Authors need to choose one area and to mention it at the time of submission Format for JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Manuscript Structure Manuscript literature and tenses must be written based on the passive 3rd. person and should

Volume 1, Issue 1 vi December, 2019 JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) be structured as: Title; Running title; Abstract; Keywords; Introduction; Materials and Methods; Results and Discussion; Conclusion; Acknowledgements and References submitted in a file with limited size. Title Page The title page should include: - The name(s) of the author(s)

- A concise and informative title - The affiliation(s) and address(es) of the author(s) - The e-mail address and telephone numbers of the corresponding author Manuscript Title Title of the paper should not contain the name of locations, countries or cities of the research as well as abbreviations. Running title Running title which is the short version of the main title should be also included. Abstract An abstract of about 200 words that sketches the purpose of the study; basic procedures; main findings its novelty; discussions and the principal conclusions. Keywords Provide 4 to 5 keywords which can be used for indexing purposes. Keywords should not repeat the words of the manuscript title or contain abbreviations and shall be written in alphabetical order as separated by semicolon. Abbreviations should be defined at first mention and used consistently thereafter through the text. Introduction The Introduction should state the purpose of the investigation and identify clearly the gap of knowledge that will be filled in the Literature review study. Date and location of the research carried out throughout the study must be mentioned at the end of this section.

Literature Survey (Optional) This segment is optional and applies to authors who have done extensive study on any topic of recent interest.

Volume 1, Issue 1 vii December, 2019 JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) and graphs as photograph. Tables should be with the captions placed above in limited numbers. Figures Figures/ illustrations should be in high quality art work, within 200-300 dpi and separately provided in Excel format. Ensure that figures are clear, labeled and of a size that can be reproduced legibly in the journal. Conclusion This section should highlight the major discoveries and state what the added value of the main finding is, without literature references. Acknowledgements Acknowledgments of people, grants, funds, etc. should be placed in this section. The names of funding agencies should be written in full. Financial support affiliation of the study, if exists, must be mentioned in this section including the Grant number of financial support. References All the references should be cited throughout the manuscript text (excluding the abstract) by numbering within third bracket in order. The number of references extracted from each journal should not exceed 3 to 5 citations, which is the average acceptable amount. The number of references should not be less than 10 for original paper and less than 100 for review paper. It is substantially recommended to the authors to refer to more recent references rather than old and out of date ones. In preparing the references the following order is to be strictly maintained by the author(s): Author(s) name, Year of publication, Title, Volume (Issue), Pages: 1. Wang, J., Wang, Y and Li, Y., 2018. A novel hybrid strategy using three-phase feature extraction and a weighted regularized extreme learning machine for multi-step ahead wind speed prediction. Energies, 11 (2): 321.

Volume 1, Issue 1 viii December, 2019 JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

CONTENTS

Vice Chancellor’s Message 1 From Editor-in-Chief 2 Design and Development of Perforated Tray Aerator (PTA) by Subha 3 Manash Roy and Bimal Chandra Mal Searching for some irreversible inhibitors as drugs of Human Cathepsin B by Computer Aided Drug Design (CADD) Method by Indrani Sarkar 12 Some Preliminary Reports on Vegetation Indices using Operational Land Imager and Thermal Infrared Sensor by Simran Parvin 17 Single Axis Solar Tracking System using Arduino Uno Controller by 27 Suparna Pal Arsenic Contamination of Groundwater in West Bengal: A Human Health 38 Threat by M. Roy A novel artificial intelligence method and angular distribution function for 47 characterization of breast cancer by Mainak Biswas, Saikat Maity, Shubhro Chakrabartty Impressions of High Frequency Radio-Waves from Cell Phone Towers on Birds: A Base-Line Study by Sauvik Bose, Rajeshwari Roy, Urbi Chakraborti, Risha Samanta, Sipra Jana, Tanusree Mondal, Soumini 54 Chaudhuryand Rina Bhattacharya Thermal Stress Analysis for Indian Metro Cities during Summer Months by Ahana Mitra, Gourab Biswas, Joyeesha Manna, Arkadip Nandan , Soumi 63 Bose, Soumini Chaudhury and Rina Bhattacharya Bioelectricity Generation from Waste Water using Microbial Fuel Cell: A Literature Survey by Dipankar Ghosh, Shrestha Debnath and Pritha Mondal 71 Physical and Electrical properties of a Tropical Cyclone as derived from Satellite Imageries and Cyclone Detection Doppler Weather Radar: A Case Study by Hazer R. D. Warjri, Hasina Paslein, Mebashongdor Kharkongor, 77 Dipankar Dam, Zahidul Islam, and A. B. Bhattacharya Effect of Pre-Monsoon Lightning Activity on Surface Nox & O3 over GWB by Arpita Das, Sujay Pal, Subrata Kumar Midya 91 Air Pollution Status: A case study in West Bengal by Debanjali Roy, Subhangi Chakraborty, Koustav Bhowmik, Sourav Mandal, Priyadarshini 101 Ghosh, Amitlal Bhattacharya, Soumini Chaudhury and Rina Bhattacharya Exploration of dietary Habits of IVF Children – A Comparative Evaluation by Sudipta Kar, T. K. Pal, S. L. Seal and Gautam Kumar Kundu 110 Frequency and Amplitude Spectra Analysis of the Sound of Indian Folk Musical Instruments by Sudipta Pal , Rinku Sarkar and Sushmita Saha 115

Volume 1, Issue 1 ix December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Vice Chancellor’s Message

JIS University was established through the Legislative Act of the Government of West Bengal, viz., JIS University Act, 2014. The University is recognised and enlisted as a Private University by the University Grants Commission as competent to award degrees as specified by UGC under Section 22 of the Act. The Legal Science courses of JIS University are recognised and approved by Bar Council of India. The AICTE informed that the University does not require its approval for conducting Technical courses. The Pharmacy Council of India accorded approval for running of Bachelor of Pharmacy (B. Pharm.) and Diploma of Pharmacy (D. Pharm) Courses. The National Council of Teachers‘ Education approved running of B. Ed. course. With an objective to enhance the spread and growth of Higher Education, Research, Entrepreneurship and Skill Development blending traditional pedagogy with modern technology enabled Teaching Learning Practices and R&D, JIS University provides various degree course programmes at Graduate, Post-graduate and Ph.D. levels in disciplines such as Physics, Chemistry, Biotechnology, Geology, BBA-LLB; LLB, B. Pharm, D. Pharm, BBA, MBA, B. Ed., Hotel Operation, International Culinary Arts, International Hospitality and Hotel Administration, Hospitality and Hotel Administration, Oral and Dental Sciences, Computer Science and Engineering, Remote Sensing and GIS. JIS University follows Continuous Evaluation Process through the Semester system of Examination. The University arranges a Seminar Presentation of its students. The University also organizes a unique Exhibition event in all the semesters to further the cause of Innovation and Entrepreneurial Development for the students which has been names as ‗SKILLX‘. The exhibition is visited by the students and teachers of different schools and colleges, dignitaries from industries, academic and research organizations. The School students also participate with the University students in the SKILLX programme.

The University is not lagging behind in research activities. The University admitted more than 50 research scholars for undertaking doctoral research in disciplines like Management, Earth Sciences, Biotechnology, Computer Science and Engineering, Pharmacy, Law, Oral and Dental Sciences and Mathematics. The faculty of the University received Research Grants from DST and other private organization. At newly established JIS University, we make continuous efforts to see that all-round development of the students takes place. Young-spirited, industry experienced and qualified faculty members not only teach the subjects as per the course curricula but also make sure to build a strong foundation for the students that will aid them to overcome life-hurdles in future. They play a huge role in grooming the young people and molding their knowledge-hungry minds into matured and innovation-oriented adults. We already published one research journal last year. I am happy that the University is going to publish its second research journal. It is hoped that the faculty and scholars of the University will contribute quality research papers for publication in the journal. It is also expected that academicians from other organizations will find it a useful medium for publication of their papers. I wish that the JIS University Journal of Multidisciplinary Research provides an excellent opportunity to all the faculty and students, especially the research scholars to develop a knowledge base for carrying out their research activities.

Prof. (Dr.) B. C. Mal Vice Chancellor

Volume 1, Issue 1 1 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

From Editor-in-Chief

It is our pleasure to present to the readers our scientific journal ―JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research‖ published by the university. The Journal is a multi-disciplinary one, published bi- annually by JIS University covering quality papers on all aspects of Basic and Applied Sciences, Engineering, Health Sciences, Management and Law. It is the outcome of the cohesive, integrated force of the entire teaching staff and scholars of the JIS University and different colleges of the JIS group whose contribution reflects in this quality research journal of its own. We have also published a number of papers in the Journal received from other Universities and Institutes. Besides interdisciplinary interest it caters specialized interest as well. The Journal publishes review articles, original contributions, research notes and short contributions.

In this volume, as before, we continue to publish results of interdisciplinary scientific researches in many aspects. We are glad to have authors from different Universities and Institutes covering a wide area of research. Most of the articles presented in the Journal are original research works oriented towards the possibility of implementation in many states. The character of our edition allows us to investigate basic and applied problems from different points of view and to get new ideas and new knowledge within the frames of wide scientific discussion.

We believe that our academic publication will be important and useful among researchers, post- graduates, specialists and students at different parts of the country and also outside. We will continue to strive for its inclusion in prominent scientific research databases. The Editors acknowledge the Authors, the Editorial Board Members and the Designer, the staff of the Publishing Office and everyone who have contributed to the publication of the journal in different ways. Special thanks are for our future readers and contributors and in this opportunity we like to invite them for collaboration with our scientists in a more meaningful way for working together in various multidisciplinary areas.

Prof. (Dr.) A. B. Bhattacharya Editor-in-Chief and Pro Vice Chancellor

Volume 1, Issue 1 2 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Evaluation of Aeration Efficiency of Perforated Tray Aerator aSubha Manash Roy and *bBimal Chandra Mal aAgricultural and Food Engineering Department Indian Institute of Technology Kharagpur, West Bengal, India, Pin -721 302 E-mail - [email protected]

*bVice Chancellor, JIS University, Agarpara, Kolkata, West Bengal, India, Pin - 700 109 E-Mail: [email protected]

Abstract: One perforated tray aerator (PTA) was designed, developed and its suitability for use in intensive aquaculture pond was evaluated. Aeration experiments were conducted in a tank of dimensions 4.0 × 4.0 ×1.5 m. Initially experiments were conducted with different numbers of trays (n): 1, 2, 3 and 4, keeping the perforated hole diameter d: (2 mm) and flow rate: Q (10 L/s) as constants. The result showed that the optimum numbers of trays should be three. After that keeping the numbers of trays in the PTA as constant (3), the response surface methodology (RSM) and central composite rotatable design (CCRD) were applied for conducting experiments to determine the optimum values of d and Q. The experimental results showed that the maximum standard oxygen transfer rate (SOTR) and standard aeration efficiency (SAE) of the developed PTA aerators are 0.463 kgO2/h and 1.382 kgO2/kWh respectively at which the optimum values of the d and Q are 1 mm and 19 L/s respectively.

Keywords: Perforated tray aerator, Aquaculture, Standard oxygen transfer rate, Standard aeration efficiency

1 Introduction

Dissolved oxygen (DO) is an important variable regulating post aeration system water treatment. DO refer to the mass of oxygen that is contained in water. The concentration of DO is an essential indicator of the water quality in a terrestrial or aquatic environment. As the DO concentration drops below 5.0 mg/L in water, the aquatic life is put under stress and if the concentration remains below 1–2 mg/L for a few hours, the chances of mortality of the species is high [1,2]. The intensive aquaculture system possesses very high stocking density. Therefore, in order to maintain the water quality with an appropriate level of dissolved oxygen, artificial aeration through aerators becomes essential. Aerators increase the DO level in the water body, thus enhancing the oxygen transfer rate and simultaneously providing water circulation which prevents stratification in the water body [3].

The perforated tray aerator (PTA) is generally made up of a number of trays (n) arranged vertically one above the other at a constant vertical spacing (SP) between the trays. The tray is made from a flat sheet with a number of holes drilled on it. The variation in number of trays (n) and perforated hole diameter (d) are important parameters which may affect the oxygen transfer rate and the aeration efficiency. Water is pumped over the topmost tray and it falls vertically

Volume 1, Issue 1 3 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) through the perforations of the trays. The fall through the small diameter holes helps the water drops to form fine sprays. The fine spray increases the water-air surface contact area and thus helps to increase the aeration efficiency of perforated tray aerator [4]. When water is allowed to fall over the consecutive trays (trays are square in shape), large area to water volume ratio in contact with the air is obtained. Therefore, the present study was taken up to optimize the different operating parameters of perforated tray aerator for achieving the maximum SOTR and SAE.

2 Theoretical Considerations

In this section, different relationships for overall oxygen transfer coefficient (KLa), standard oxygen- transfer rate (SOTR) and standard aeration efficiency (SAE) are included.

2.1 Overall oxygen transfer coefficient (KLa)

The standard model for oxygen transfer is formulated as a mass balance equation for variation of dissolved oxygen concentration in the water with time and is given by Equation 1 [5].

∗ = KLaT (C ∞ - C0) …. (1)

∗ Where C (mg/l) is the concentration of oxygen at time t, C ∞ (mg/l) is the equilibrium liquid phase -1 oxygen concentration, C0 (mg/l) is the initial DO concentration, KLaT (h ) is the overall oxygen transfer coefficient at T ° C.

By assuming KLaT constant, the solution of the Equation 1 can be as follows:

∗ ∗ C = C ∞ - (C ∞ - C0) × Exp [- KLaT × t] …. (2)

According to ASCE (2007), the Gauss-Newton method is used to fit experimental data to estimate ∗ KLaT and C ∞. The KLaT is then converted to KLa20 and expressed as:

KLa20= (KLa)T/ …. (3)

-1 Where KLa20 is the overall oxygen transfer coefficient at 20°C (h ) and is the correction factor of temperature = 1.024 for clean water.

2.2 Standard oxygen-transfer rate (SOTR) and Standard aeration efficiency (SAE)

To evaluate the performance of an aerator, the two performance measures i.e., standard oxygen transfer rate (SOTR) and standard aeration efficiency (SAE) are generally used. These parameters are defined as follows:

The standard oxygen-transfer rate (SOTR) of an aeration system is defined as the oxygen transfer per unit time to a water body under standard conditions (water temperature: 20°C, initial DO concentration = 0 mg/L, one atmospheric pressure and clean tap water) [5,6] and is given by Equation 4.

-3 SOTR = KLa20 × (C* - C0) × V = KLa20 × 9.07 × V × 10 …. (4)

Volume 1, Issue 1 4 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Where SOTR is the standard oxygen-transfer rate (kg O2/h), C* is the DO saturation value (mg/L), 3 -3 C0 is the initial DO concentration (mg/l), V is the volume of water in the tank, m and 10 is the factor for converting g to kg.

Standard aeration efficiency (SAE) is a better comparative performance parameter than SOTR [7] which is defined as the standard oxygen-transfer rate (SOTR) per unit of power input to the aerator and given by Equation 5.

SAE (kgO2/kWh) = SOTR/P …. (5)

Where, P denotes the input power to the aerator (kW).

The power consumption (P) may be denoted as break power. Break power (kW) to aerator is calculated [7] by Equation 6

P = (9810 × H × Q) / η …. (6)

Where H = head against which the pump works (m), Q = flow rate (m3/s), and ɳ = efficiency of the pump. The mechanical efficiency of the pump was assumed as 50% for estimation of brake power [7]. In the present study, to achieve the proper mixing of DO throughout the water, the water volume in aeration tank was decided based on the condition stated by Elliott (1969) as given in Equation 7.

P/V = 0.1 kW/ m3 …. (7)

Where P = aerator power (kW) and V = water volume under aeration (m3).

3 Materials and Methods

Perforated tray aerator (Fig. 1 & 2) consists of an open submersible pump of 3.7 kW (5 HP) with a control valve and a structure to support the trays. A rising pipe of 100 mm internal diameter was attached with the pump. The pump was setup at the bottom of the tank. The water discharge through the outlet of the pump was measured using an Electromagnetic Flow Meter. A number of perforated trays were welded and bolted to this central pipe as shown in Fig. 2. Central rising pipe made of galvanized iron was coupled to the pump. A factory made perforated mild steel sheet of uniform hole diameter and thickness was cut in the size of 800 mm x 800 mm, fitted to an outer supporting frame and finally joined to the central pipe. The specification of perforated tray used of different hole diameters is presented in Table. 1.

Volume 1, Issue 1 5 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 1 Schematic diagram of perforated tray aerator (PTA)

Figure 2 Experimental setup for testing of perforated tray aerator

Volume 1, Issue 1 6 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Table 1 Specification of perforated tray used for experiment Perforated Mild Steel Numbers of holes Total Tray Area Ratio of total hole Sheet hole diameter per Square cm (cm2) area to area of (d, mm) tray (K) 1 52 0.103 2 20 0.156 3 5 80 × 80 0.329 4 2 0.526 5 1 0.394

Unsteady state reaeration tests were conducted on a brick masonry tank. Initially, the tank was filled up with clean tap water up to a depth of 1 m. Effort was made to maintain the standard conditions as far as possible (20°C temperature and 760 mm Hg pressure APHA, 1980). Then the tap water was deoxygenated with 0.1 mg/L of cobalt chloride and 10 mg /L of sodium sulphite for each litre of water and 0.1 mg/L of dissolved oxygen present in water [2]. After that the aerator was run until the DO in the water body approached saturation, typically greater than 96% of saturation [8]. The DO concentrations in water was measured at different corners of the tank by inserting the probes of dissolved oxygen (DO) meters to a depth of approximately 0.20 m [9]. At least 45 DO readings at equal time intervals were taken. The temperatures and atmospheric pressures were also recorded along with the DO readings.

4 Experimental Designs

Aeration tests (Table 2) were conducted keeping Q (10 L/s), d (2 mm), K (0.526) as constants. For optimizing the number of trays, different numbers (n): 1, 2, 3 and 4 were used for the experiment. The vertical interval between two successive trays was 30 cm and the bottommost tray was also at a height of 30 cm from the top of the water surface to allow a falling height of 30 cm. The volume of water to be used for testing of aerator was found out by maintaining the condition of power- volume ratio i.e. P/V ≤ 0.1 kW/m3 (Elliot, 1969).

Table 2 Aeration experiments to optimize the numbers of trays (n) No. of trays (n) Constant parameters 4 Q = 10 L/s , d = 2 mm, and K = 0.156

Response surface methodology (RSM) is a collection of mathematical and statistical techniques that are useful for the modeling and analysis of problems in which a response of interest is influenced by several variables and the objective is to optimize the response. A central composite rotatable design (CCRD) was used to examine the combined effects of d and Q levels frequencies on2 the response of SOTR and SAE. The range of independent variables d (1-5 mm) and Q (7 to 19 L/s) were selected based on preliminary trials to maximize the SOTR and SAE.

Volume 1, Issue 1 7 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

5 Results and Discussion

In this section, determination of optimum numbers (n) of trays of PTA; optimization of perforated hole diameter (d) and flow rate (Q) are included.

5.1 Determination of Optimum Numbers of Trays (n) of PTA

In this set of experiments the effect of numbers of trays was evaluated keeping the values of d and Q as constants and the results are presented in Table 3. It is observed from Table 3 that SOTR increases with the increase in number of trays and the SAE initially increases and attains the maximum value at n = 3. Then the SAE decreases at n = 4. This is due to the fact that although oxygen transfer increases with the increase in number of trays, but the power consumption also increases as the total lift becomes more with more number of trays. The increase in oxygen transfer is not commensurate with the increase in power which results in the reduction of SAE.

Table 3 Performance of the perforated tray aerator with different numbers of trays (n)

N SOTR (kg O2/h) Power (kW) SAE (kgO2/kWh)

1 0.0654 0.1177 0.556 2 0.174 0.2943 0.591 3 0.316 0.5297 0.596 4 0.397 0.7063 0.562

0.605 SAE = -0.0175 n2 + 0.0901 n + 0.4825 0.6 R² = 0.996 0.595 0.59

0.585 /kWh) 2 0.58 0.575 0.57 0.565 SAE SAE O (kg 0.56 0.555 0.55 0 1 2 3 4 5 No. of trays (n) Figure 3 Variation of SAE with numbers of trays (n) The variation of SAE with number of trays is presented in Fig 3. The relationship can be expressed by a second order polynomial equation of the following form: SAE = - 0.0175 × n2 + 0.0901 × n + 0.4825 …. (8)

Differentiating the above equation, dSAE / dn = - 0.035 × n + 0.0901 At, dSAE / dn = 0, n = 2.58 and d2SAE / dn2 = - 0.0901 (˂ 0) Therefore, SAE attains its maximum value at n = 3. Volume 1, Issue 1 8 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

At n = 3, the maximum value of SAE is obtained as 0.596 kgO2/kWh. Therefore, from the relationships developed by using the experimental data, it may be concluded that the optimum number of trays for efficient aeration is 3. 5.2 Optimization of perforated hole diameter (d) and flow rate (Q)

Three numbers of trays in which the maximum SAE was obtained was considered as the optimum number and was fixed for conducting further experiments with different diameters of hole (d) and flow rates (Q). The experimental results for different diameters of hole and flow rates are presented in Table 4. It can be seen from the table that the maximum SOTR of 0.463 kg O2/h and the maximum SAE of 1.382 kg O2/kWh are obtained at 1 mm diameter of hole and 19 L/s of discharge. Table 4 Experimental results for optimisation of geometric parameters -1 Sl No. d (mm) Q (L/s) KLa20 (h ) SOTR Power SAE (kgO2/h) (kW) (kgO2/kWh) 1 1.00 7.00 0.4101 0.0529 0.1236 0.4282 2 1.00 13.00 0.4101 0.1892 0.1236 0.8242 3 1.00 19.00 3.5937 0.4638 0.3355 1.3825 4 3.00 7.00 0.2587 0.0333 0.1236 0.2701 5 3.00 13.00 0.9259 0.1195 0.2295 0.5206 6 3.00 13.00 0.9259 0.1195 0.2295 0.5206 7 3.00 13.00 0.9259 0.1195 0.2295 0.5206 8 3.00 13.00 0.9259 0.1195 0.2295 0.5206 9 3.00 13.00 0.9259 0.1195 0.2295 0.5206 10 3.00 19.00 1.4727 0.3356 0.3355 1.0004 11 5.00 7.00 0.2067 0.0266 0.1236 0.2158 12 5.00 13.00 0.6410 0.0827 0.3604 0.3604 13 5.00 19.00 1.4727 0.1900 0.3355 0.5665 Summary of ANOVA of the experimental results for SOTR and SAE is presented in Tables 5 and 6 respectively. It can be seen from the tables that the models have F-values of 277.30 and 318.35 implying that the models are highly significant (p value probability> F = 0.0001).

Table 5 ANOVA for Response Surface Quadratic Model SOTR Source Sum of Squares df Mean Square F Value p-value Prob > F Model 0.18 5 0.037 277.30 < 0.0001 significant D 0.028 1 0.028 209.15 < 0.0001 Q 0.13 1 0.13 972.70 < 0.0001 d × Q 0.015 1 0.015 116.32 < 0.0001 d2 1.753 × 10-4 1 1.753× 10-4 1.33 0.2865 Q2 8.821× 10-3 1 8.821× 10-3 67.00 < 0.0001 Residual 9.216 × 10-4 7 1.317× 10-4 Lack of Fit 9.216 × 10-4 3 3.072× 10-4 Cor Total 0.18 12

Volume 1, Issue 1 9 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Coefficient of determination (R2) = 0.995; adjusted R2 = 0.991; standard deviation (S.D.) = 0.011; coefficient of variation (C.V.) = 7.56%; mean = 0.15

From multi-variable regression, the following expression for SOTR is obtained. SOTR = - 0.010846 + 0.021210 ×d - 9.98292 × 10-4 × Q - 5.15613 × 10-4 × d × Q + 1.99146 × 10- 3 × d2 + 1.56982 × 10-3× Q2 .... (9) Table 6 ANOVA for Response Surface Quadratic Model SAE Source Sum of df Mean Square F Value p-value Prob > Squares F Model 1.19 5 0.24 318.35 < 0.0001 significant d 0.37 1 0.37 495.55 < 0.0001 Q 0.69 1 0.69 921.97 < 0.0001 d × Q 0.091 1 0.091 121.62 < 0.0001 d2 5.196 × 10-3 1 5.196 × 10-3 6.94 0.0337 Q2 0.021 1 0.021 27.49 0.0012 Residual 5.241× 10-3 7 7.488× 10-4 Lack of Fit 5.241× 10-3 3 1.747 × 10-3 Cor Total 1.20 12 Coefficient of determination (R2) = 0.995; adjusted R2 = 0.992; standard deviation (S.D.) = 0.027; coefficient of variation (C.V.) = 4.65%; mean = 0.59

From multi-variable regression, the following expression for SAE is obtained. SAE = 0.17929 - 0.025939 × d + 0.031904 × Q - 0.012574 × d × Q + 0.010843 × d2 + 2.39809 × 10-3 × Q2 .... (10)

After knowing the possible design criteria to maximize the SOTR and SAE, optimization was carried out using ―Point Optimization‖ technique of Design Expert software. The optimum values of different variables (d and Q) for the maximum SOTR and SAE are presented in Table 7. Table 7 Optimum values of variables for PTA

Sl. No. d, mm Q, L/s SOTR (kgO2/h) SAE (kgO2/kWh) 1 2.57 12.03 0.112 0.525 2 1.19 17.71 0.383 1.215 3 1.28 17.42 0.363 1.167

6 Conclusions From the present study, the aeration characteristics of the perforated tray aerator could be evaluated which depends upon different variables (n, d and Q). Based on the above results the following conclusions are drawn.

I. Optimum number of trays in a perforated tray aerator should be 3 to achieve the maximum SAE. II. Tray hole diameter of about 1 mm and discharge of about 19 L/s result in the maximum

SOTR and SAE values of 0.463 kgO2 /h and 1.382 kgO2/kWh respectively.

Volume 1, Issue 1 10 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

III. Finally, it may be said that the developed RSM/CCRD model is an effective tool for deciding the optimized variables of perforated tray aerator.

References

1. Boyd, C. E., 1998. Pond water aeration systems. Aquacultural Engineering, 18 (1): 9-40. 2. Boyd, C. E. and Tucker, C. S., 1998. Ecology of aquaculture ponds. Pond aquaculture water quality management, US: 8–86. 3. Boyd, C.E., & Martinson, D.J. (1984). Evaluation of propeller-aspirator-pump aerators. Aquaculture, 36(3): 283 – 292. 4. El-Zahaby, A.M., El-Gendy, A.S., 2016. Passive aeration of wastewater treated by an anaerobic process—A design approach. Journal of Environmental Chemical Engineering, 4(4): 4565-4573. 5. American Society of Civil Engineers 2007. Measurement of Oxygen Transfer in Clean Water; ASCE/EWRI 2-06; American Society of Civil Engineers: Reston, Virginia. 6. APHA, 1992. American Water Works Association, and Pollution Control Federal (16th ed.), APHA, Washington, DC, 1268. 7. Lawson, T. B. and Merry, G. E., 1993. Procedures for Evaluating Low-Power Surface Aerators under Field Conditions. In Techniques for Modern Aquaculture (Ed. Wang, J.K.), Proceedings of an Aquacultural Engineering Conference, ASAE, Michigan (USA), 21– 23. 8. Jiang, P. and Stenstrom, M.K. 2011. Oxygen transfer parameter estimation: impact of methodology. Journal of Environmental Engineering, 138(2): 137-142. 9. Baylar, A., Hanbay, D., Ozpolat, E., 2007. Modeling Aeration Efficiency of Stepped Cascades by Using ANFIS. CLEAN–Soil, Air, Water, 35(2):186-192.

Volume 1, Issue 1 11 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Searching for some irreversible inhibitors as drugs of Human Cathepsin B by Computer Aided Drug Design (CADD) Method

Indrani Sarkar Department of Basic Science and Humanities, Narula Institute of Technology Agarpara, Kolkata E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract: Human Cathepsin B is an important lysosomal cysteine protease, the elevated level of which causes various diseases. This is a potential target for the development of drugs to treat those diseases. Various efforts have been made in the past to develop irreversible inhibitors targeting cathepsin B. The first irreversible inhibitor was isolated from Aspergillus japonicus, identified as N-(L-3.trans-carboxyoxirane-2-carbonyl)-L-leucine-4-guanidinobutylamide popularly known as E-64. It inhibits many cysteine proteases like cathepsins B and L, papain and calpains. So, E-64 and its derivatives cannot be used as specific drugs only for cathepsins B. We need specific inhibitors for various cysteine proteinases to treat specific diseases caused by them. The aim of this study is to build a mathematical model by Quantitative Structure Activity Relationship (QSAR) methods to correlate molecular properties of the inhibitors with their biological activities. The biological activity IC 50 is taken as the dependent variable and nine molecular descriptors are taken as independent variables to build the model. The potential inhibitors are subsequently studied using molecular modelling and dynamics simulation to identify active compounds from inactive compounds.

Keywords: Quantitative Structure Activity Relationship, Human Cathepsin B, inhibitors, Molecular Descriptors

1 Introduction

Cathepsin B belongs to a family of lysosomal papain like cysteine proteases [1]. It plays an important role in intracellular proteolysis. Its role has been found in initiation, growth, tumor cell proliferation, angiogenesis, invasion and metastasis of murine pancreatic and mammary carcinomas. Cathepsin B enhances the activity of other proteases like matrix metalloproteinase, and cathepsin D and thus it plays an essential part in the proteolysis of extracellular matrix components. Wide arrays of diseases result in elevated levels of cathepsin B causing cell death, inflammation, and production of toxic peptides. It causes a significant amount of the apoptotic cell death inducing epilepsy. It is responsible for causing neuromuscular dysfunction, memory loss, and neuronal cell death. Cathepsin B also seems to cause Alzheimer's symptoms. The biological function of cathepsin B is also important during viral infection and replication for several viruses, such as Ebola, SARS (Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome) in human cells. Due to its important involvement in many human diseases, cathepsin B has been chosen as a drug development target.

An example of structure-based design of cathepsin B-specific inhibitors is described [2]. The first inhibitor was isolated from Aspergillus japonicus, identified as N-(L-3. trans-carboxyoxirane-2- Volume 1, Issue 1 12 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) carbonyl)-L-leucine-4-guanidinobutylamide, and popularly known as E-64 . It inhibits cathepsins B and L, papain and calpains specifically. But E-64 and its derivatives are not, however, selective inhibitors of cathepsins B and L either in vitro or in vivo. As specific inhibitors are required for understanding individual roles of these cysteine proteinases an attempt is made to find a specific inhibitor of cathepsin B.

2 Materials and Methods

Statistical methods in QSAR (The Quantitative-Structure-Activity-Method) presented here deals with compounds of small molecules. Computational chemistry generates molecular data or descriptors including geometries, energies and associated properties from a molecular structure.

Table 1 Compund and Cathespin details

Compound R Cathepsin B (IC50) I. EtO.tES-Ile.Pro.OH 2.28 2 EtO.tES-Pro.Pro.OH 25.0 3 EtO.tES-Thr.Ile.OH 13.5

4. HO.IES.Leu.t.iAA 3.36 5. COOH 2.28 4 CONH2 5600 6 COOMe 4100 7 CH2OH 6300 8 H 2500 9. H 30.4 10 Me 20.0 11 Et 2.28

12 t.Pr 1.45 13 t-Bu 1.41 14 c.Hex 1.11 15 EtzN 2080 16 EtNH 6.88 17 i.PrNH 4.64 18 n-PrHN 2.24 19 i-BuNH 1.78 20 n.BuNFI 2.26

21 i-AmNH 2.40

22 n.AmNH 3.16 23 n-HexNH 3.92 24 PhCH2NH 5.48 25 PhNH 12.2 26 c.HexNH 2.20 tES, L-trans-epoxysuccinyl; IAA, isoamnylamide, tES, L-truns.epoxysuccinyl, I.-Pr, |isopropyl, i-Bu, isobutyl; c-Hex, cyclolohexyl; i-Pr, isopropyl; i-Bu, isobutyl; n.Pr, n-propyl; n-Bu, n-butyl; i-Am, isoamyl; n-Am, n-amyl; n.Hex, n-hexyl; Ph,phenyl; c-Hex, cyclohexyl

Volume 1, Issue 1 13 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

The biological activity of the molecules is measured by logIC50 (50% inhibitory concentration). The molecular descriptors are used to build statistical or computational neural network models to predict the property or activity of interest. Relationships between the variations in the values of molecular properties and the biological activity for a series of compounds are studied so that these models can be used to evaluate new chemical compounds. A QSAR generally takes the form of a linear equation:

Biological Activity = Constant + (c 1 ×P 1) + (c 2 ×P 2 ) + (c 3 ×P 3 ) + ...

Where the parameters P 1 through P n are computed for each molecule in the series and coefficients c 1 through c n are calculated by fitting variations in the parameters and biological activity. The main steps of QSAR study are: Structure entry and molecular modelling -----> Descriptor generation -----> Feature selection -----> Construct Model MLRA or CNN -----> Model validation.

2.1 Molecular Modelling

The molecular structures for 26 molecules (Table 1) are searched in the chemical database by pharmacophore selection (7). The 3D models of structures are generated by the software Avogadro. The structures are subjected to energy minimization with Mopac. This energy minimized three dimensional molecular structures are used to generate descriptors by using their topological and geometrical representations. As the structures of organic compounds can be represented as graphs, theorems of graph theory can be applied to generate graph invariants which are known as topological descriptors

2.2 Descriptor calculation

Over 250 descriptors are available with MOE QSAR module. Initial selection for the descriptors is attempted empirically based on the nature of the descriptors. Fifty descriptors of physicochemical and molecular properties are selected and calculated [3, 4, 5, 6].

2.3 Genetic algorithm for descriptor selection

After calculation of the descriptors a reduced set of descriptors are selected which are rich in information but smallest in size. The feature selection process is done by the Genetic Algorithm variable selection technique. A subset of descriptors is selected to relate with IC 50 values. MLR (Multiple Linear Regression) method determines the root mean-square error of cross validation (RMSECV) when using only that subset of variables in a regression model. The nine descriptors that demonstrated an apparent correlation with the observed biological activity are chosen to build QSAR models. Among these descriptors, N acc+don are the sum of the counts of hydrogen acceptor and donor. Apol, MR and Dipole represent atomic polarizabilities, molar refractivity, and the dipole moment of a molecule calculated from the partial charges of the molecule respectively. SA and SA pol measure the water accessible surface areas (WASA) of whole molecule and the hydrophilic part of WASA calculated using a radius of 1.4 Å for the probe, respectively. Vol, E sol, and logP (o/w) represent the molecular volume, the empirical solvation energy calculated based on OPLS force field, and the log value of octanol/water partition coefficient of a compound,

Volume 1, Issue 1 14 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) respectively. These descriptors mostly describe molecular solvation properties. Combination of various computational methods would be a better choice to estimate the partition property of the molecules which have considerable effect on its biological activities.

3 Result and Discussion

The biological activity IC 50 is taken as the dependent variable and the nine as independent variables to build the model. The result shows that the molecular descriptors geometrical molecular descriptors when taken for univariate correlation are insufficient to describe the structure activity relationship. The low correlation values (R= 0.5) are not taken. The best statistics is shown by Apol. For bivariate correlation best statistics and was shown by MR and Esol. For trivariate correlation best solution was shown by Apol, MR, Esol,. For tetravariate Apol, MR, Esol and logP(o/w) were the best combination. For pentavariate Apol, MR, Esol, logP(o/w) and Dipole ; for hexavariate Apol, MR, Esol, logP(o/w), Dipole and SApol show best statistics. The mathematical model obtained from above variables is given by

IC 50 = 3.07Apol + 3.4 MR + 0.45 Esol + 0.34 logP -0.21Dipol +0.5 I2SApol + 12.03

The above equation is validated for the experimental value of logIC50.

4 Conclusions

A computer- simulated study of epoxysuccinyl peptides shows that all inhibitors bind to S subsites of cathepsin B. The common structures of strong inhibitors suggest that the carboxyl group is necessary for inhibition of cathepsin B. (Ref 7) The presence of a bulkier ester g r o u p in trans epoxysuccinic acid is necessary for specific inhibition of cathepsin B. T h e amide derivatives have weaker inhibitory activities than the corresponding ester derivatives, but considerably higher specificities for cathepsin B. The c o m p u t e r simulation study shows the presence o f a large hydrophobic pocket around the active thiol g r o u p o f the active site of cathepsin B. The present paper attempts to correlate the selective inhibitory activities of epoxysuccinyl peptides on cathepsin B in vitro from the viewpoint of QSAR.

Acknowledgements The author is thankful to the University Grants Commission, India for providing necessary facilities.

References

1. Mason, R.W., Johnson, D.A., Barrett, A.J. and Chapman, H.A., 1986. Elastinolytic activity of human cathepsin L. Biochemical Journal, 233(3): 925-92. 2. Hanada, K., Tamai, M., Yamagishi, M., Ohmura, S., Sawada, J. and Tanaka, I., 1978. Isolation and characterization of E–64, a new thiol protease inhibitor. Agricultural and Biological Chemistry, 42(3): 523-528. 3. Ivanciuc, O. and Balaban, A.T., 1996. Design of Topological Indices. Part 6. 1, 2 A New Topological Parameter for the Steric Effect of Alkyl Substituents. Croatica chemica acta, 69(1): 75-83.

Volume 1, Issue 1 15 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

4. Mohar, B., Babic, D. and Trinajstic, N., 1993. A novel definition of the Wiener index for trees. Journal of chemical information and computer sciences, 33(1): 153-154. 5. Randić, M., 1993. Comparative regression analysis. Regressions based on a single descriptor. Croatica Chemica Acta, 66(2): 289-312. 6. Schultz, H.P., Schultz, E.B. and Schultz, T.P., 1990. Topological organic chemistry. 2. Graph theory, matrix determinants and eigenvalues, and topological indexes of alkanes. Journal of chemical information and computer sciences, 30(1): 27-29. 7. Murata, M., Miyashita, S., Yokoo, C., Tamai, M., Hanada, K., Hatayama, K., Towatari, T., Nikawa, T. and Katunuma, N., 1991. Novel epoxysuccinyl peptides Selective inhibitors of cathepsin B, in vitro. FEBS letters, 280(2): 307-310.

Volume 1, Issue 1 16 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Some Preliminary Reports on Vegetation Indices using Operational Land Imager and Thermal Infrared Sensor

Simran Parvin Department of Remote Sensing and GIS, JIS University, Agarpara, Kolkata 700109 [email protected]

Abstract: The paper reports some preliminary analysis of vegetation indices as derived from Operational Land Imager and Thermal Infrared Sensor. Three types of vegetation indices have examined considering normalized different vegetation index, soil adjusted vegetation index and enhanced vegetation index emphasizing the combination of surface reflectance at two or more wavelengths to find any typical vegetation property as an application of remote sensing. Dominant features of the two sensors and the related flow chart used for a successful implementation of the method are discussed at length with new possibilities.

Keywords: Vegetation Indices, Land Imager, Infrared Sensor, Vegetation property Remote sensing

1 Introduction

Healthy vegetation reflects more near-infrared (NIR) and green light in comparison to other wavelengths while it absorbs more red and blue light. Normalized Difference Vegetation Index (NDVI) is an index to quantify vegetation by taking a difference between near-infrared and red light. NDVI is thus a measurement of surface reflectance to provide a quantitative estimation of vegetation growth and biomass. The physical properties of soil are affected by plants and their roots e.g., infiltration rate, aggregate stability, moisture content etc. and all these have a vital role in soil conservation [1, 2]. The magnitude of NDVI is related to the level of photosynthetic activity in the observed vegetation [3]. In general, higher values of NDVI indicate greater vigor and amounts of vegetation [4]. Soil-Adjusted Vegetation Index (SAVI), on the other hand, is structured similar to the NDVI but demands the addition of a 'Soil brightness correction factor', where reflectance value of the near infrared band, the reflectance of the red band, and the soil brightness correction factor are to be taken into account [5-9]. Empirically derived NDVI products have been found to be unstable, varying with soil color, soil moisture, and saturation effects from high density vegetation. With a view to get further information and to improve NDVI, we have attempted to examine the vegetation indices that accounted for the differential red and near-infrared extinction through the vegetation canopy.

2 Vegetation Indices

Vegetation Indices are combination of surface reflectance at two or more wavelengths designed to highlight a particular property of vegetation. They are essentially derived Volume 1, Issue 1 17 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

utilizing the reflectance properties of vegetation. Each of the Vegetation Indices is designed to accentuate a particular vegetation property [10-14]. The different Vegetation Indices are termed as Normalized Different Vegetation Index (NDVI), Soil Adjusted Vegetation index (SAVI), and Enhanced Vegetation index (EVI).

2.1 Normalized Difference Vegetation Index (NDVI)

The normalized difference vegetation index (NDVI) is a simple type of graphical indicator that can be used for analyzing remote sensing measurements, typically, but not necessarily, from a space platform, and assess whether the target being observed contains live green vegetation or not. NDVI is a powerful indicator to monitor the vegetation cover of wide areas, and also for detecting the frequent occurrence and persistence of droughts [15-17]. NDVI is a vegetation index which indicates the healthy and dense vegetation. NDVI can be computed from satellite imagery using spectral radiance in red and near infrared reflectance. NDVI is calculated by this formula:

NDVI= (NIR−RED)/ (NIR+RED),

Where, NIR= near infrared band, R= Red band; here red and NIR stand for the spectral reflectance measurements acquired in the red (visible) and near-infrared regions, respectively [18, 19]. Spectral reflectance is the ratio of the reflected over the incoming radiation in each spectral band individually and so they take on values between 0.0 and 1.0. By design, the NDVI itself varies between -1.0 and +1.0.

2.2 Enhance Vegetation Index (EVI)

The enhanced vegetation index (EVI) is used to optimize the vegetation signal with improved sensitivity in high biomass regions and improved vegetation monitoring through a de- coupling of the canopy background signal and a reduction in atmosphere influences [20-22]. The EVI has thus been considered a modified NDVI with improved sensitivity to high biomass regions and improved vegetation monitoring capability through a de-coupling of the canopy background signal and a reduction in atmospheric influences.

EVI is calculated by the following formula:

EVI = G * ((NIR - RED) / (NIR + C1 * RED – C2 * BLUE + L),

Where, L=1, C1 = 6, C2 = 7.5, and G (gain factor) = 2.5.

EVI is similar to Normalized Difference Vegetation Index (NDVI) and can be used to quantify vegetation greenness. However, EVI corrects for some atmospheric conditions and canopy background noise and is more sensitive in areas with dense vegetation. It incorporates an ―L‖ value to adjust for canopy background, ―C‖ values as coefficients for atmospheric resistance, and values from the blue band (B).

Volume 1, Issue 1 18 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

2.3 Soil Adjusted Vegetation index (SAVI)

SAVI is calculated by the following formula: SAVI = (1+L)(NIR−RED)/(NIR+RED+L),

where L is a canopy background adjustment factor. An L value of 0.5 in reflectance space was found to minimize soil brightness variations and eliminate the need for additional calibration for different soils. The transformation was found to nearly eliminate soil-induced variations in vegetation indices [17, 23].

3 Instruments and Methodology

The Operational Land Imager (OLI) and Thermal Infrared Sensor (TIRS) are two instruments on board the Landsat 8 satellite Figure 1 shows the overview of OLI and TIRS while Figure 2 presents the View of the spacecraft bus and the solar panel including the positions of mounting of TIRS and OLI.

Figure 1 Overview of the two instruments (a) Operational Land Imager (OLI), (b) Thermal Infrared Sensor (TIRS)

Volume 1, Issue 1 19 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 2 View of the spacecraft bus and the solar panel including the position of mounting of TIRS and OLI Wavelength, spectral region and spatial resolution of the sensors OLI and TIRS corresponding to different bands have presented in Table 1. The methodological flow chart is given in Figure 3. For the present study we used GIS Software ArcGIS 10.3.1, ERDAS Imagine 2014 and QGIS 3.6. Table 1 Some particulars of the two sensors OLI and TIRS Sensor Band Wavelength in Spectral region Spatial Number micrometre resolution (m) OLI 1 0.43-0.45 Deep Blue 30 2 0.45-0.51 Blue 3 0.53-0.59 Green 4 0.64-0.67 Red 5 0.85-0.88 Near Infrared 6 1.57-1.65 SWIR 1 7 2.11-2.19 SWIR 2 8 0.50-0.68 Panchromatic 15 9 1.36-1.38 SWIR 3 30 TIRS 10 10.60-11.19 Thermal 100 Infrared 1 11 11.50-12.51 Thermal Infrared 2

Volume 1, Issue 1 20 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 3 Flow chart followed for implementing the method 4 Results and Discussion From the NDVI value, it is possible to assess vegetation healthiness. From the NDVI study, it is clearly observed that, NDVI value -0.99 to -0.01 indicates the healthiest condition of vegetation. On the other hand, NDVI value 0.16 to 1 exhibits the unhealthy condition of the vegetation. The spatial distribution of NDVI was indicates that precipitation is a key factor for vegetation growth. From the L value of the SAVI, which is indicates the brightness of the soil. It has been conclude that, SAVI value -1.49 to -0.02 show the high soil adjusted vegetation and 0.01 to 0.24 is less soil adjusted vegetation. Landsat OLI 8 and TIRS satellite image is presented in Figure 4. The figure shows the Landsat8 satellite image with the help of this image the vegetation indices have been derived.

In Figure 5 and Figure 6 we have shown the normalized vegetation index and the enhanced vegetation index respectively. In Figure 5 it has been observed that the part of the southern, northern portion and some parts of north-western portion are covered with dense vegetation which indicates the healthy vegetation. Similarly, the part of the western section and some

Volume 1, Issue 1 21 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

parts of south-eastern section are covered with less vegetation. From Figure 6 it can be inferred that the parts of the western section and some parts of the north- eastern section are covered with moderately less vegetation which indicates the unhealthy vegetation due the biomass and canopy background noise. When compared the vegetation index values for the

normalized and enhanced conditions, we note very prominent and interesting features.

Figure 4 Landsat OLI 8 and TIRS satellite image

Volume 1, Issue 1 22 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 5 Normalized vegetation index

Figure 6 Enhanced vegetation index

Volume 1, Issue 1 23 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

EVI corrects for some atmospheric conditions and canopy background noise and is more sensitive in areas with dense vegetation. ―L‖ value to adjust for canopy background, ―C‖ values as coefficients for atmospheric resistance, and values from the blue band (B). From this EVI study, it is clearly observed that, EVI value in the range 0 to 61 indicates the most greenness of vegetation; on the other hand the value 574 to 3114 indicates least greenness of the vegetation.

4. Conclusions

Our present study of NDVI can be used not only for accurate description of vegetation vigor, vegetation classification and continental land cover but is also effective for monitoring rainfall and drought, estimating net primary production of vegetation, crop growth conditions and crop yields, detecting weather impacts and other events important for agriculture, ecology and economics. The index is a transformation technique which minimizes soil brightness influences from spectral vegetation indices involving red and near-infrared (NIR) wavelengths [21, 23].

Acknowledgements

We are thankful to the JIS University authorities for getting the facilities of work through the Department of remote Sensing and GIS.

References 1. Ramesh, P., Singh, P., Roy, F. and Kogan, F. 2003, Vegetation and temperature condition indices from NOAA-AVHRR data for drought monitoring over India. International Journal of Remote sensing, 24:4393-4402. 2. Hazra, S., Roy, S. and Mitra, S. 2017, Enhancing Adaptive Capacity and Increasing Resilience of Small and Marginal Farmers of Purulia and Bankura Districts, West Bengal to Climate Change. 3. Suhad M. Al-Hedny, Ahmad S. Muhaimeed, Suhad M. Al-Hedny, Ahmad S. Muhaimeed. 30 August 2019, Drought Monitoring for Northern Part of Iraq Using Temporal NDVI and Rainfall Indices. Environmental Remote Sensing and GIS in Iraq 301- 331. 4. G. Gyssels, J. Poesen, Esther Bochet and Yong Li. June 2005, Impact of plant roots on the resistance of soils to erosion by water: A review. Progress in Physical Geography 29(2):189-217.

5. WouterVannoppen, ,Matthias Vanmaercke, Sarah De Baets, J. Poesen. September

Volume 1, Issue 1 24 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

2015, A review of the mechanical effects of plant roots on concentrated flow erosion rates. Earth- Science Reviews, DOI: 10.1016/j.earscirev.2015.08.011.

6. Almamalachy YS, Al-Quraishi AMF, Moradkhani H. 2019, Agricultural drought monitoring over Iraq utilizing MODIS products. In: Al-Quraishi AMF, Negm AM (eds) Environmental Remote Sensing and GIS in Iraq. Springer Water.

7. Al-Quraishi AMF, Qader SH, Wu W. 2019, Drought monitoring using spectral and meteorological based indices combination: a case study in Sulaimaniyah, Kurdistan region of Iraq. In: Al-Quraishi AMF, Negm AM (eds) Environmental Remote Sensing and GIS in Iraq. Springer Water.

8. Boken VK, Cracknell AP, Heathcote RL (eds). 2005, Monitoring and predicting agricultural drought. Oxford University Press, Oxford, 472

9. Cancelliere A, Mauro GD, Bonaccorso B, Rossi G. 2007, Drought forecasting using the standardized precipitation index. Water Resour Manage 21(5):17–22.

10. Fadhil AM .2011, Drought mapping using geoinformation technology for some sites in the Iraqi Kurdistan region. Int J Digital Earth 4(3):239–257

11. Fadhil AM ,2013,Sand dunes monitoring using remote sensing and GIS techniques for some sites in Iraq. In: Proceedings SPIE 8762, PIAGENG 2013: intelligent information, control, and communication technology for agricultural engineering, p 876206. https://doi.org/10.1117/12.2019735.

12. Fern RR, Elliott AF, Andrea B, Michael LM. 2018, Suitability of NDVI and OSAVI as estimators of green biomass and coverage in a semi-arid rangeland. EcolInd 94:16–21.

13. Hueso S, Brunetti G, Senesi N, Farrag K, Hernandez T, Garcia C. 2012, Semi-arid soils submitted to severe drought stress: influence on humic acid characteristics in organic- amended soils. J Soil Sediments 12:503–512.

14. Jain SK, Keshri R, Goswami A, Sarkar A, Chaudhry A. 2009,Identification of drought vulnerable areas using NOAA-AVHRR data. Int J Remote Sens 30(10):2653– 2668.

15. Jain SK, Keshri R, Goswami A, Sarkar A. 2010, Application of meteorological and vegetation indices for evaluation of drought impact: a case study for Rajasthan, India. Nat Hazards 54:643–656.

16. Ji L, Peter AJ. 2003, Assessing vegetation response to drought in the northern

Volume 1, Issue 1 25 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Great Plains using vegetation and drought indices. Remote Sens Environ 87(1):85– 98. 17. Murthy CS, Seshasai MVR, Chandrasekar K, Roy PS. 2009, Spatial and temporal responses of different crop-growing environments to agricultural drought: a study in Haryana state, India using NOAA AVHRR data. Int J Remote Sens 30:2897–2914.

18. Quiring SM, Ganesh S. 2010, Evaluating the utility of the Vegetation Condition Index (VCI) for monitoring meteorological drought in Texas. Agric For Meteorol 150:330– 339.

19. Reich P, Eswaran H. 2004, Soil and trouble. Science 304:1614–1615.

20. Shahabfar A, Eitzinger J. 2011, Agricultural drought monitoring in semi-arid and arid areas using MODIS data. J AgricSci 149:403–414.

21. Singh RP, Roy S, Kogan F. 2003, Vegetation and temperature condition indices from NOAA-AVHRR data for drought monitoring over India. Int J Remote Sens 24(22):4393– 4402.

22. Tabrizi AA, Khalili D, Kamgar-Haghighi AA, Zand-Parsa SH 2010, Utilization of time-based meteorological droughts to investigate occurrence of streamflow droughts. Water Resource Manage 24:4287–4306.

23. Zhang Z, Kang H, Yao Y, Fadhil AM, Zhang Y, Jia K. 2017, Spatial and decadal variations in satellite-based terrestrial evapotranspiration and drought over inner Mongolia autonomous region of China during 1982–2009. J Earth Syst. Sci 126(8).

Volume 1, Issue 1 26 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Single Axis Solar Tracking System using Arduino Uno Controller

Suparna Pal Department of Electrical Engineering, JIS College of Engineering, Kalayani, Nadia [email protected]

Abstract: Solar energy is the most abundant out of different energy sources and also it can be conveniently converted to electrical energy. Utilizing solar panel, energy originating from the Sun can be converted to electrical energy but due to transition of the Sun from east to west the fixed solar panel may generate optimum energy. In the present paper we have proposed a system which can be implemented suitably by some simple arrangement for the solar panel to track the Sun. In the system the solar panel is to be coupled to a dc motor to track the Sun with a view to getting maximum sun light upon the panel at any given time. We have constructed the code using C++ programming language and targeted to Arduino UNO controller for capturing the highest amount of sunlight at any time of the year.

Keywords: Advantages of Renewable Energy, solar tracker, circuit description, advantages, future scope

1 Introduction

As power demands are increasing day by day, so fulfilment of the requirement of power we are increasing our energy generation by fossil fuel (CHP generation).But increasing CHP power environment get polluted and fossil fuel storage is decreasing day by day. It is heard that only 150 years fossil fuel are storage in world, after this stipulated time period we cannot produce bulk power through our conventional system. It is the time now to increase our generation by renewable energy. If we are not focusing our power generation by renewable sources, we will not survive. For that reasons every corner of the planet concentrate on solar power mainly because it is clean, green energy. But solar energy totally depends upon solar radiation which is uncertainty of everywhere. Though high end research we are not generate bulk way power from solar due to its low efficiency. To increase efficiency of solar panel radiation must be concentrate on plates but it is impossible to trap same radiation whole day time. We know that Sun position is not same whole day long, for maximum trapping of solar energy; solar panel must be rotate according to position of sun.

Volume 1, Issue 1 27 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

2 Objective of Solar Tracking System

It is known that the angle of incidence lies between -90degrees after sunrise and 90 degrees before sunset passing zero degrees at noon. This makes the solar radiations to be 0% during sunrise and sunset and 100% during noon. This variation causes solar panel to lose more than 40% of the collected energy. At any time of the month or a day, the position of the sun is decided by two angles in the spherical co-ordinate system. The fifth angle of the projected position of the sun is in the horizontal plane.

3 Methodologies

Proposed Model

Solar tracking is a widely-applied proven technology that increases energy production by directing or concentrated the photovoltaic to track the sun on its path from dawn until dusk. Instantaneous solar radiation collected by the photovoltaic modules, assembled in a tracking system, is higher than the critical irradiance level for a longer number of hours than in fixed systems. There are numerous types of solar trackers, of varying costs, performance and sophistication. One of those is:

Single Axis Trackers

Single axis trackers have one degree of freedom that acts as an axis of rotation. The axis of rotation of single axis trackers is typically aligned along a true North meridian. It is possible to align them in any cardinal direction with advanced tracking algorithms. Their types are

1. Horizontal Single Axis Tracker (HSAT) 2. Vertical Single Axis Tracker (VSAT) 3. Tilted Single Axis Tracker (TSAT)

Main Components of Solar Tracking System

The Solar tracking system consists of two main parts:

1. Circuit for sensing and controlling the microcontroller (Arduino UNO) and motor driver. 2. The circuit required for solar panel.

Hardware Requirements

1. Solar panel 2. Sensors (2 LDRs) Volume 1, Issue 1 28 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

3. Potentiometer 4. DC motor 5. Motor driver 6. Microcontroller (Arduino UNO) 7. D.C POWER SUPPLY 8. RECHARGEABLE BATTERY

Working Principle In general the electricity generated by the PV panels is influenced the solar radiation and ambient temperature .To generate the maximum electric power PV must be controlled so that the position of PV is always perpendicular to the sunlight to track the maximum intensity of light .The proposed model of single axis solar tracking system offers optimal energy conversion process of solar energy.

STEP 1: First we connect the solar panel to the rechargeable Battery STEP-2 – We use the microcontroller named Arduino Uno which is connected with an external source in which the program is installed. STEP-3 – The arduino which is connected with the LDR will sense an analog input & gives a digital output to the motor STEP-4- In this step the two LDR‘s (Light dependent Resistor) which are connected with the panel will come into action. STEP-5 – As the sunlight travels from east to west the intensity of light also changes. STEP-6 – As the intensity of light changes the LDR which senses more intensity will instruct the arduino to rotate the motor in that side with the help of motor driver to move the panel to that side. STEP-7 – The output of rechargeable battery which is charged by the solar panel, will supply a power to run the motor. STEP-8 – When the sun comes over head means in the middle of the day both the sensor will sense the same intensity then the panel will become stationery.

Volume 1, Issue 1 29 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 1 Flow Chart

Specification of Hardware Components

L HARDWARE RATINGS NAME NO. (VOLT ,WATT) 1. SOLAR PANEL 9 V,3 W 2. SENSORS 3V,5V,12V 3. POTENTIOMETER 1K,5K,10K 4. D,C MOTOR 12V,10 R.P.M 5. MOTOR DRIVER --- 6. ARDUINO UNO 5V 7. D.C POWER 230V TO 12V SUPPLY 12V TO 5V 8. RECHARGEABLE 6V ,5AH BATTERY

Volume 1, Issue 1 30 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Experimentation

Snapshots of Project Entitled ―Automated Single Axis Solar Tracking System‖ are given below.

Figure 2 Snapshot of sensor circuit

Figure 3 Snapshot of Arduino Uno circuit along with both the sensor circuits

Volume 1, Issue 1 31 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 4 Snapshot of power supply circuit

Arduino Programming const int east = 2; const int west = 3; const int motorpin1 = 4; //Pin 2 of L293D; const int motorpin2 = 5; //Pin 7 of L293D; const int en = 6; //Pin 1 of L293D; int a = 0; int b = 0; void setup() { // put your setup code here, to run once: pinMode(east, INPUT); pinMode(west, INPUT); pinMode(motorpin1, OUTPUT); pinMode(motorpin2, OUTPUT); pinMode(en, OUTPUT);

Volume 1, Issue 1 32 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

digitalWrite(east,LOW); digitalWrite(west,LOW); digitalWrite(en,LOW); digitalWrite(motorpin1,LOW); digitalWrite(motorpin2,LOW); } void loop() { // put your main code here, to run repeatedly: a=digitalRead(east); b=digitalRead(west); digitalWrite(en,HIGH); if(a>b) { digitalWrite(motorpin1,HIGH); digitalWrite(motorpin2,LOW); delay(3000); digitalWrite(motorpin1,LOW); digitalWrite(motorpin2,LOW); } else if(a

Final Setup of “Automated Single Axis Solar Tracking System”

After Integrating all the hardware components and optimizing the designs through software analysis our final setup is made and the screenshot is also attached with it. Volume 1, Issue 1 33 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 5 Left Side View

Figure 6 Right Side View

Volume 1, Issue 1 34 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 7 Top View

4 Advantages

The conservation of non-renewable energy resources

Photovoltaic (PV) solar power eases the usage of diminishing natural resources such as oil, coal and gas. Today, we live in an exceptionally demanding environment where the use of energy is growing at an alarming rate. It is vital to preserve the earth‘s fossil fuels and other natural resources, not only for a healthier environment but also for the ability of future generations to meet their own needs

Lower amount of Waste and Pollution

PV solar power systems minimize the amount of waste production. For example, the entire process of converting coal to electricity produces a lot of dust, discarded solid waste, spillages of toxins and harmful emissions, as well as wasting energy, heat, land and water. Pollution from non-renewable fuels is inevitable. Emissions such as Sulphur Dioxide, Nitrogen Oxide and Carbon Dioxide all can have a negative effect on farming, people‘s health and water. Ecosystems are also at risk of being destroyed. Furthermore, pollutants from kerosene used for lighting purposes is reduced with the use of solar power systems, as well as the decrease in use of diesel generators for the production of electricity.

Volume 1, Issue 1 35 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Offsetting Green House Gases

PV Solar power systems produce electricity without giving off carbon dioxide. One PV Solar system can offset approximately six tons of CO2 emissions over a twenty year life span.

Limiting the use of conventional energy sources

Solar power improves energy efficiency and is therefore it is beneficial to us. Use of solar energy for generation of electricity reduces the consumption of conventional power for built up cities. It is cheaper and hence can be used for industrial and commercial purposes to run various operations. Thus, the use of photovoltaic systems to generate power is one of the most efficient ones ways of generating power.

Universal application

The versatility of the solar tracker is that, it can be used for various applications and can be implemented in various parts of world except for Polar Regions.

Generating efficiency

Over 40% increase in radiation reception from sun comparing with fixed installation. With dual axis tracker, additional over 45% increase in radiation reception from sun will be gained.

Independent control

The important factor concerning the system is that, it can be installed anywhere, where no manual operation is involved. LDR sensors play a vital role in making the system automated by sensing the intensity resulting in generation of pulse, thus making the system independent.

4.1 Limitations

1) When there is cloudy atmosphere it is difficult to tracking the sun. 2) Panel rotations require an extra power from outside of power used that produce by panel itself. 3) Fixing arrangement of LDR at perpendicular to sun light is somewhat problematic 4) LDRs are very sensitive elements and so may get damaged in extreme climatic conditions.

5 Conclusions

A solar tracker is designed employing the new principle of using smaller cells to function as self- adjusting light sensors, providing a variable indication of their relative angle to the sun by detecting their voltage output. By using this method, the solar tracker was successful in maintaining a solar array at a sufficiently perpendicular angle to the sun. The power increase Volume 1, Issue 1 36 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) gained over a fixed horizontal array was in excess of 30%.The solar trackers are a mean of controlling a sun tracking array with an embedded microprocessor system. Specifically it demonstrates a working software solution for maximizing solar cell output by positioning a solar array at the point of maximum light intensity. The electronics needed to activate the motors are simple and the system can be applied to any electromechanical configuration. With minor adjustments it can be used with various types of collectors including flat-plate, compound- parabolic, evacuated tube, parabolic trough, Fresnel lenses, parabolic dish and heliostat field collectors.

In Future the conventional energy is not sufficient for use so there is need of use non- conventional energy sources .This Project is very useful for power supply in rural areas where we can use high sensitive solar panels which can work in mild sun light also and by connecting number of solar tracker assemblies we will able to produce sufficient large quantity of power which will be able to supply power to medium size village. We can make use of solar panels in our day to day life for street lighting, in mobile phone chargers, water heaters, etc.

References

1. Www. youtube.com 2. www.slideshare.com 3 .www.electronicshub.com 4. www.en.wikipedia.org 5. www.arduino.com 6. MD Khan, S M Shahrer Tanzil,SM Shfiul Alam, 2010, Design and Construction of an Automatic Solar Tracking System Conference: 6th International Conference on Electrical and Computer Engineering ICECE 2010, December,

Volume 1, Issue 1 37 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Arsenic Contamination of Groundwater in West Bengal: A Human Health Threat

M. Roy Centre for Environmental Studies, Vidyasagar University, Midnapur, West Bengal 721102 E mail: [email protected]

Abstract: Arsenic contamination in groundwater in the Ganga-Brahmaputra fluvial plains in India and its consequences to human health have been reported as one of the world‘s biggest natural calamities. In India, seven states namely- West Bengal, Jharkhand, Bihar, Uttar Pradesh in the flood plain of the Ganga River; Assam and Manipur in the flood plain of the Brahmaputra and Imphal rivers and Rajnandga on village in Chhattisgarh state have so far been reported affected by arsenic contamination in groundwater above the permissible limit of 10 μg/L. People in these affected states have chronically been exposed to drinking Arsenic contaminated hand tube-wells water. Arsenic toxicity is a great threat in human civilization especially in West Bengal, India. Bio-accumulation of arsenic is occurring from the food grains as irrigated with arsenic-contaminated water. Arsenic contamination of groundwater in West Bengal leads to adverse effects on human health. Chronic exposure to arsenic can cause skin cancer and other health effects. To combat the arsenic crisis in West Bengal it desperately needs to increase awareness and educate the people about the problem.

Keywords: Arsenicosis; toxicity; cancer; ground water; drinking water contamination

1 Introduction

The rapid development of industries and successive overexploitation of water has led to water pollution. Water pollution has become a serious worldwide health hazard [1]. The main source of freshwater in several parts of the globe for meeting the requirements of everyday purposes and agriculture is groundwater. Large areas of the world experience huge contamination in groundwater due to the mixing of different toxic, minerals and heavy metals either naturally or anthropologically [2, 3]. Arsenic is one of the most important and fatal among these minerals and its presence is considered as one of the hazardous elements in the environment and exposure of it causes serious health issues like cardiovascular, neurological, hematological, renal, and respiratory problems. The high concentrations of arsenic (As) in drinking water in inorganic form cause skin, liver, lungs and other organs damages [4]. The contamination of arsenic in soil occurs through polluted groundwater through irrigation, which is then taken by several edible parts of plants and consequently accumulates in other food chains. The arsenic is one of the most important and fatal among these metals. In India, the groundwater arsenic contamination was

Volume 1, Issue 1 38 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) first surfaced from West-Bengal in 1983, a number of other States, namely; Jharkhand, Bihar, Uttar Pradesh in flood plain of the Ganga River; Assam and Manipur in flood plain of the Brahmaputra and Imphal rivers, and Rajnandga, village in Chhattisgarh state have chronically been exposed to drinking arsenic-contaminated hand tube-wells water above permissible limit of 50 μg/L. Many more North-Eastern Hill States in the flood plains are also suspected to have the possibility of arsenic in groundwater. Arsenic contamination was first noticed in and around localized compartments in a few districts of West Bengal (India) [5]. In West Bengal, around 79 blocks in 8 districts among 26 districts were reported to be contaminated with arsenic in groundwater exceeded 50μg/L. According to Das, 2015, this problem is expanding rapidly and in 2006 almost 3235 villages were affected including North 24 Parganas, South 24 Parganas, Nadia, Murshidabad and Burdwan, Howrah, Hooghly, and Maldah districts. The severely affected districts are Murshidabad, Maldah, Nadia, North and South 24 Parganas, Burdwan, Howrah, and Hooghly. There are many alluvial aquifers of this state that carry arsenic in drinking water beyond the permissible limit of WHO, 2017 (0.01 mg/L) [6]. West Bengal lies within the Ganga–Brahmaputra delta basin have high contamination of arsenic mainly in groundwater [7]. West Bengal can be divided into three zones i.e. highly affected regions cover the eastern side of Bhagirathi River; mildly affected regions include the northern part of the Bhagirathi river and the unaffected region carries western part of the state [8]. This study reveals the condition of arsenic toxicity in West Bengal, a state of India and the fatal effect on human health due to arsenic toxicity. 2 Origin of Arsenic in the Environment There are various natural activities that release arsenic in the environment. Most significant are the volcanic eruption, erosion of rocks and forest fires. Arsenic is widely distributed in 320 minerals. The most common arsenic minerals are Arsenopyrite (FeAsS); Orpiment (As2S3); Realgar (As2S2); Pyrite (FeS2). Apart from this the widespread use of arsenic in insecticides and pesticides are also responsible for traces of arsenic in natural water. Arsenic enriched pesticides are Monosodium methane arsenate (MSMA)- HAsO3CH3Na; Disodium methane arsenate (DSMA)-Na2ASO3CH3; Dimethylarsinic acid (Cacodylic acid) - (CH3)2 AsO2H:Arsenic acid- H3AsO4.

2.1 Arsenic Toxicity Arsenic pollution has become a significant environmental problem nowadays. Recent epidemiological studies have reported noteworthy detrimental effects of As on humans due to its high toxicity. The World Health Organization (WHO) suggested that the arsenic concentration in the drinking water should not increase 10 µg/L. Arsenic (As) is a trace inorganic element. It is found as a crystal lattice of Arsenic minerals. It enters the water system through the traces of Volume 1, Issue 1 39 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) arsenic minerals absorption. The rate of interaction between water and arsenic minerals depends on the biogeochemical conditions such as redox potential, speciation, the concentration of metals in the fluid, ionic strength, microbial activity, pH and the temperature. Once it is released it can be absorbed, precipitate, dissolved and bio integrate according to the surrounding environmental conditions. Skin Disease: The specific skin diseases are pigmentation and keratosis, which are caused by chronic arsenic toxicity. Respiratory Disease: Non-malignant lung diseases are caused due to long exposure to arsenic- contaminated drinking water (800 mg/L). Chronic lung diseases were common in the exposure of chronic arsenic toxicity through arsenic-contaminated drinking water. Gastrointestinal Disease Dyspepsia is one of the most common gastrointestinal syndrome for chronic arsenic toxicity. Gastroenteritis also caused by chronic arsenic through the drinking of arsenic-contaminated water with a concentration greater than 50 mg/L. Diseases of Nervous System Peripheral neuropathy results from chronic exposure of arsenic through drinking water [9-12]. Several reports also revealed an increased incidence of cerebrovascular disease in patients suffering from chronic arsenicosis [13, 14]. There are also other neural complications such as peripheral neuritis, sleep disturbances, weakness, and cognitive and memory impairment reported. Cardiovascular Disease The important complications of chronic arsenic toxicity are Blackfoot disease (BFD), a peripheral vascular disease. Another peripheral vascular disorder such as Raynaud‘s syndrome and acrocyanosis with varying degrees of severity has also been reported in arsenic exposed peoples. Hematological Effects Acute and chronic arsenic poison lead to anemia, leukopenia, thrombocytopenia and other hematological abnormalities. West Bengal carries an average 50% anemia caused in the exposure to arsenic-contaminated groundwater (200-2,000 mg/L) [15]. Diabetes Cumulative arsenic exposure and prevalence of diabetes mellitus have shown a dose-response relationship in arsenic endemic areas [16]. In Bangladesh, diabetes mellitus prevalence also increased significantly where arsenic-contaminated water was taken as drinking water [17].

Volume 1, Issue 1 40 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Arsenicosis and Cancer Exposure to arsenic causes symptoms of carcinogenicity in humans. This carcinogenicity is principally responsible in skin, urinary bladder, and lungs, around 4.35% of skin cancer and 0.78% of internal cancers were detected in arsenic-affected villages [18]. Genotoxic effects Long-term exposure of arsenic through drinking water expresses genotoxic effects which include increased rate of chromosomal aberrations and micronuclei formation in buccal and urothelial cells. The frequencies of the formation of micronuclei were reported to be significantly high in peripheral lymphocytes, oral mucosa and urothelial cells of arsenic exposed patients [19-21]. 3 Methodologies The study of ground water quality assessment was conducted in Nadia district, W.B. In Nadia district W.B arsenic polluted ground waters occur in shallow unconfined aquifer; both As (III) and As (V) occur in ground water. Ground water in the study area occurs in shallow water unconfined aquifer in which reducing agent viz. organic matter is abundant. Concentration of iron, bicarbonate, trivalent arsenic is high. As a consequence ferric iron oxides are reduced and their load of arsenic is released to ground water. The ground water samples were collected from 34 different sampling locations (Table 1).

Collections of Samples: The water samples from different tube wells were collected after pumping for a few minutes without filtration in 10 ml polyethylene bottles prewashed with nitric acid and water (1:1). After collection, 1 drop of concentrated nitric acid: water (1:1) per 10 m of water sample was added as preservative. In addition to arsenic contamination, iron and pH were also detected to evaluate the quality of water. pH is estimated by electrometric method; Iron is estimated by photometric method and arsenic is analysed by SDDC method [22].

Table 1 Detail of Study Area Locations Sample No. Location Sample No. Location W1 Karimpur-I W18 Krishnaganj W2 Karimpur-I W19 Haringhata W3 Karimpur-II W20 Haringhata W4 Karimpur-II W21 Chakdaha W5 Nakashipara W22 Chakdaha W6 Nakashipara W23 Santipur W7 Tehatta-I W24 Santipur W8 Tehatta-I W25 Chapra W9 Tehatta-II W26 Chapra W10 Tehatta-II W27 Ranaghat-I

Volume 1, Issue 1 41 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

W11 Kaligunj W28 Ranaghat-I W12 Kaligunj W29 Ranaghat-II W13 Nabadwip W30 Ranaghat-II W14 Nabadwip W31 Krishnanagar-I W15 Hanskhali W32 Krishnanagar-I W16 Hanskhali W33 Krishnanagar-II W17 Krishnaganj W34 Krishnanagar-II 4 Results and Discussions The pH is the intensity of the acidity or alkalinity and measures the hydrogen ion concentration in water. It has no direct adverse effect on health. However a low pH (≤4) will produce sour taste and higher values (≥8.5) shows alkaline taste. The WHO permissible limit of pH in drinking water varies from 6.03 mg/l to 8.5mg/l. All the samples were well within the permissible limit (Table 2). The WHO permissible limit of iron for drinking water is 0.3 mg/l. All the samples were detected with Iron range much higher than the permissible limit. The arsenic standard range for drinking water is 0.01 mg/l to 0.1 mg/l. The result shows that all the samples range between 0.02 to 0.24 mg/l hence well within the permissible limit.

Table 2 Concentration of pH, Iron and arsenic in water samples Sample pH Iron Arsenic Sample pH Arsenic Iron No. (mg/l) (mg/l) No. (mg/l) (mg/l) W1 6.58 2.4 0.09 W18 6.37 0.06 3.1 W2 6.61 3.7 0.06 W19 7.13 0.09 2.5 W3 6.72 4.1 0.24 W20 7.10 0.11 3.7 W4 6.87 4.9 0.22 W21 6.97 0.07 3.4 W5 6.49 7.3 0.19 W22 6.53 0.06 4.2 W6 7.01 8.5 0.08 W23 7.03 0.09 4.0 W7 6.78 4.4 0.11 W24 7.12 0.25 5.3 W8 6.92 4.9 0.10 W25 7.21 0.04 4.19 W9 6.95 3.9 0.07 W26 7.10 0.02 3.27 W10 6.67 4.2 0.10 W27 6.49 0.04 3.6 W11 7.00 3.8 0.07 W28 6.86 0.06 3.9 W12 7.05 3.1 0.09 W29 7.13 0.09 4.8 W13 6.59 4.5 0.06 W30 7.00 0.17 5.0 W14 6.83 4.9 0.11 W31 6.52 0.06 3.4 W15 6.48 4.2 0.07 W32 7.04 0.04 3.8 W16 7.09 4.9 0.05 W33 7.01 0.09 4.2 W17 6.45 2.37 0.04 W34 6.97 0.14 4.5

Volume 1, Issue 1 42 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

5 Epidemiological Studies

The epidemiological study was carried out by carrying house to house survey of arsenic affected villages of Nadia. Villages considered for sampling are those which have evidence of arsenic contaminated public tube well (Table 3). Around 17 blocks in the study area were surveyed and the report reveals that around 7662 tube wells were reported to have arsenic contamination above 50 µg/L and around 1600 patients were found with arsenic lesions.

Table 3 Details of the Epidemiological Studies Parameters Total Total Area 8927 Total Population 4604827 Total Blocks 17 No. of Villages having minimum one T.W. contaminated with As 1011 Total no. of population of blocks 3625308 Population of Villages having As contamination (>50 µg/L) 3220182 % of Exposure (% of Arsenic contaminated public tube wells in the blocks) 6.36-45.96 Total population of villages exposed to arsenic 839675 No. of Villages studied 37 Total population in the study villages 635728 No. of house hold surveyed 2297 Total no. of public tube wells in the district 29640 Total no. of public tube well water above 50 µg/L 7662 No. of water samples contaminated with arsenic more than 50 µg/L 809 No. of persons examined 10469 No. of patients with arsenical skin lesion 1616 Population derived as probable affected with arseniocosis 141592 Source: PHED, Gov. of W.B

6 Remediation Technological options to combat the arsenic menace, in groundwater, to ensure supply of arsenic-free water, in the affected areas, can be one of the followings or a combination of all: I. In-situ remediation of arsenic from aquifer system, II. Ex-situ remediation of arsenic from tapped groundwater by arsenic removal technologies like chemical coagulation, reverse osmosis, membrane filtration, etc. III. Use of surface water source as an alternative to the contaminated groundwater source, IV. Tapping alternate safe aquifers for the supply of arsenic-free groundwater,

Volume 1, Issue 1 43 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

V. Innovative technologies, such as permeable reactive barriers, phytoremediation, biological treatment, and electro kinetic treatment are also being used to treat arsenic- water, wastewater, and soil. Removal of Arsenic from Drinking Water: Oxidation Coagulation Absorption Ion Exchange Membrane techniques and Reverse Osmosis

Oxidation Techniques: Oxidation involves the conversion of soluble arsenite to arsenate. For anoxic groundwater, oxidation is an important step since arsenite is a prevalent form of arsenic at near-neutral pH. Nowadays many chemicals, as well as bacteria, are used to directly oxidize the arsenic Coagulation: Coagulation and filtration with metal salts followed by filtration is the most documented method of arsenic removal. Adsorption is the electrostatic binding of soluble arsenic to external surfaces of the insoluble metal hydroxide. Coagulation is achieved using alum, ferric chloride or ferric sulfates that are effective at removing arsenic. Ion exchange: The ion exchange process is not dependent on the pH of the water. Pre oxidation of As(III) to As(IV) is required for removal of arenite by the ion exchange process, but the excess of oxidant needs to be removed. Ion exchange resins can be easily regenerated by washing them with a NaCl solution. Membranes are utilized to remove many contaminants from water including pathogen, salts, ions, etc. generally two types of membranes are used.

7 Conclusions Arsenic Contamination of groundwater is an alarming problem in West Bengal. If arsenic safe water cannot be provided, the concentration of arsenic should be removed. Many peoples are affected by arsenic contamination in groundwater. An alternative water source is not possible everywhere, hence arsenic removal techniques can be implemented in those places. Rainwater harvesting and groundwater recharge techniques can be implemented in some places. It is necessary to create awareness among the people about arsenic contamination. Location-specific research, combined with a combination of technology, incentive, and self-protection policies could be used to address the problem of arsenic contamination worldwide. Arsenic sources and effects are multiple and diffused in nature and it requires detailed assessment and policy. To reduce arsenic in water resources, incentive policies such as taxing and subsidizing can be used to reduce arsenic levels in point sources through the creation of appropriate incentives. Creating awareness among the people in the arsenic affected states in India will decrease the contamination level in water resources.

Volume 1, Issue 1 44 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

References

1. Aina, M P., Kpondjo, N M, Adounkpe, J., Chougourou, D., Moudachirou, M. 2012, Study of the Purification Efficiencies of three Floating Macrophytes in Wastewater Treatment. I Res J Environ. Sci., 1(3): 37-43. 2. Ravenscroft, P., Brammer, H., Richards, K. S. 2009, Arsenic Pollution: A Global Synthesis. Blackwell-Wiley, USA. 3. Onodera, J., Takahashi. K., Jordan, R.W. 2008, Eocene silicoflagellate and ebridian paleoceanography in the central Arctic Ocean. Paleoceanography 23(1): 1-9. 4. Smith, A. H., Hopenhayn Rich, C., Bates, M.N., Goeden, H.M., Hertz Picciotto, I., et al. 1992, Cancer risks from arsenic in drinking water. Environ Health Perspect 97: 259-267 5. Majumdar, P.K., Ghosh, N.C, Chakravorty, B., 2002, Analysis of arsenic-contaminated groundwater domain in the Nadia district of West Bengal (India). Hydrological sciences journal 47(1): S55-S66. 6. Yu, W.H, Harvey, C.M, Harvey, C.F. 2003, Arsenic in groundwater in Bangladesh: A geostatistical and epidemiological framework for evaluating health effects and potential remedies. Water Resour. Res 39(6): 1146. 7. Mukherjee, A., Fryar, A.E, Rowe, H.D. 2008, Regional-scale stable isotopic signatures of recharge and deep groundwater in the arsenic affected areas of West Bengal, India. Journal of Hydrology 334: 151-161. 8. Borgono, J.M, Vicent, P., Venturino, H. Infante, A. 1977, Arsenic in the drinking water of the city of Antofagasta: epidemiological and clinical study before and after the installation of a treatment plant. Environ Health Perspect 19:103-105. 9. Ahmad, S.A, Sayed, M.H.S.U, Hadi S.A., Faruquee, M.H., Jalil, M.A., Ahmed, A., Khan, W. 1999, Arsenicosis in a village in Bangladesh. Int J Environ Health Res 9(3): 187-195. 10. Cebrian, M.E., Albores, A., Aguilar, M., Blakely, E., 1983, Chronic arsenic poisoning in the north of Mexico. Hum Toxicol. 2(1): 121-133. 11. Saha, K.C., 1984, Melanokeratosis from arsenic contaminated tube well water. Indian J Dermatol 29(4): 37-46. 12. Hotta, N., 1989, Clinical aspects of chronic arsenic poisoning due to environmental and occupational pollution in and around a small refining spot. Nippon Taishitsugaku Zasshi 53: 49- 70. 13. Kilburn, K.H., 1997 Neurobehavioral impairment from long-term residential arsenic exposure. In: Abernathy CO & Calderon RL (Eds.), Arsenic exposure and health effects, UK, : 159-177. 14. Chen, C.J., Chiou, H.Y., Huang, W.I., Chen, S.Y, Hsueh, Y.M., Tseng C.H., Lin, L.J., Shyu, M.P., Lai, M.S, 1997, Systemic non-carcinogenic effects and developmental toxicity of inorganic arsenic. In: Abernathy CO & Calderon RL (Eds.), Arsenic exposure and health effects, UK: 124- 134. Volume 1, Issue 1 45 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

15.Guha Mazumder, D.N., Chakraborty, A.K., Ghosh, A., Gupta, J.D., Chakraborty, D.P., Dey, S.B., Chattoadhyay, N.1988, Chronic arsenic toxicity from drinking tube-well water in rural West Bengal. Bull World Health Organ 66(4): 499-506. 16. Lai, M.S., Hsueh, Y.M., Chen, C.J., Shyu. M.P, Chen, S.Y., 1994, Ingested inorganic arsenic and prevalence of diabetes mellitus. Am J Epidemiol 13995: 484-492. 17. Rahman, M., Tondel, M., Ahmad, S.A., Axelson, O.,1998, Diabetes mellitus associated with arsenic exposure in Bangladesh. Am J Epidemiol 14892): 198-203. 18. Saha, K C., 2003. Saha‘s grading of arsenicosis progression and treatment. In: Chappell WR & Abernathy CO (Eds.), Arsenic exposure and health effects, Oxford, UK: 391-414. 19. Warner, M.L., Moor, L.E., Smith, M.T., Kalman, D.A., Fanning, E., 1994, Increased micronuclei in exfoliated bladder cells of individuals who chronically ingest arsenic contaminated water in Nevada. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev 3(7): 583-590. 20. Gonsebatt, M.E., Vega, L., Salazar, A.M., Montero, R., Guzmán, M.E., 1997, Cytogenetic effects in human exposure to arsenic. Mutat Res 386(3): 219-228. 21. Basu A, Ghosh P, Das, J.K., Banerjee, A., Ray, K., 2004, Micronuclei as biomarkers of carcinogen exposure in populations exposed to arsenic through drinking water in West Bengal, India: a comparative study in 3 cell types. Cancer Epidemiol Biomarkers Prev 13(5): 820-827. 22. I.C.M.R,1975, Manual of standard of quality of drinking water supplies, Spl Report Series No. 44,

Volume 1, Issue 1 46 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

A novel artificial intelligence method and angular distribution function for characterization of breast cancer

Mainak Biswas1, Saikat Maity1, Shubhro Chakrabartty2

1Deparment of Computer Science and Engineering

JIS University, Kolkata-700109, India

2 Department of Nanoscience and Engineering Inje university, Gimhae, 50834, Republic of Korea

[email protected]

Abstract: Breast cancer kills nearly 42,000 women and men every year. The detection of breast cancer can ensure earlier treatment and saving of thousands of lives. In this regard, we present an artificial intelligence (AI)-based breast cancer detection from 699 instances of data. Further, we propose a novel Angular Distribution Function for Classification (ADFC) for classification of breast cancer patients. The ADFC compares the length of arcs each test instance makes with central points of each class cluster. It associates the test instance with the class having smallest arc angle using K10 cross-validation (nine parts for training and one part for testing). The performance of ADFC is compared with standard algorithms such as general KNN algorithm and PLDL algorithm. The algorithm was also validated using standard datasets such as Iris. The results clearly showed that ADFC performed better with contemporary algorithms.

Keywords: Classification, supervised learning, breast cancer.

1 Introduction It‘s seen that a greater number of women are diagnosed with breast cancer than any other forms of cancer [1]. In the US alone, 331,530 women are diagnosed with breast cancer. Another 2,670 men are also diagnosed with breast cancer. The total fatality rate due to breast cancer is approximately 42, 260 deaths per year including 41, 760 women and 500 men. Breast cancer develops from tissues in the breast [2]. The breast is made up of lobes and ducts. The lobes are further divided into lobules which end in tiny bulbs. Each of these parts are connected by ducts. The detailed physiology of breast is shown in Figure 1. Cancer generally forms in one of these several parts of breast. There are several causes of cancer formation i.e., family history, inherited

Volume 1, Issue 1 47 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) gene mutations, obesity, alcohol abuse etc. The breast cancer is generally characterized by formation of lumps.

The gold standard of diagnosis of breast cancer is manual, making the entire process tedious, error-prone. Over the years semi-automated and automated techniques have made their mark in computer aided diagnosis process with the advancement of hardware and software. Artificial intelligence (AI) techniques [3] mimic human thinking and memory in understanding and solving different computational problems. Characterization of human diseases from different sickness parameters is one of the several problems where AI can be used. Various AI techniques for diagnosis of diseases have been developed till date. Wu et al. [4] used Artificial Neural Network (ANN) on 43 image features for distinguishing between benign and malignant lesions, yielding a value of 0.95 for the area under the receiver operating characteristic curve. In another work, NG et al. [5] used ANN for a different set of data and achieved 61.54% accuracy.

In this regard, we propose a novel angular distribution function for classification (ADFC)-based K-Nearest Neighbor (KNN) algorithm for breast cancer characterization. ADFC is inspired from our earlier work in label distribution learning [6, 7]. ADFC computes the length of the arc joining test instance with central points of each class cluster. Based on the number of K-Nearest neighbors all the arc lengths relative to each training points are computed. Based on arc lengths, orientation of each test point to each class is computed. A cosine approximation of normal distribution is applied to each orientation. Based on the frequency of closest orientation, the class is assigned to the test instance. It‘s seen that the current methodology gives better performance than previous contemporary methods.

The paper is arranged in the following manner: section 2 discusses the data acquisition, section 3 describes the methodology, section 4 discusses the results and discussion and finally the paper concludes in section 5.

2 Data Acquisition Data has been collected from 669 patients. There are a total 30 features describing different characteristics of the cell nuclei present in the image. These features are computed from the digitized image of a fine needle aspirate (FNA) of a breast mass [8].

Volume 1, Issue 1 48 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 1 Physiology of breast

3 Methodologies In this section, we present the ADFC-based KNN algorithm for characterizing breast cancer data into benign and malignant groups. This function works on the following presumption. Supposedly, there are ― ‖ training instances and ― ―classes. In each of these ― ‖ clusters the central point is computed using averaging. Let us call them points. If there are ― ‖ nearest neighbors, a Euclidean distance matrix is computed for a given test instance t, to all

and nearest neighbors.

| |

| | (1)

| |

After all the distances are found, the angle between training instance and central points and the test instances are found out. A representative image can be found in Figure 2, where theta is found out based on the distance between test instance and training and central points respectively. The mathematical expression, is given as:

(2)

Where, = Distance between k and y or ky, .

Volume 1, Issue 1 49 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 2 Representation of hypothesis

A modified cosine approximation of normal distribution [7] is applied to each orientation for k- nearest neighbors. The cosine approximation is given as:

( ) [ { ( )}] (3)

( ) represents the orientation of how much the test instance is closer to a class, based on the number of -nearest neighbors. The results and discussion are given in the next section.

3 Results and Discussion

The experiment is run using K-10 cross validation. In K-10 cross-validation, the dataset is divided into ten parts where nine parts are used for training and one part is used for testing. The accuracy chart for breast cancer is shown in Figure 3. It is clearly seen that ADFC gives better results for all the folds. A validation is done using well-known Iris dataset. The accuracy chart is shown in Figure 4. The results clearly showed that ADFC performs better exclusively for all datasets.

Volume 1, Issue 1 50 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

0.7

0.6

0.5

0.4

Accuracy 0.3

0.2

0.1

0 Fold 1 Fold 2 Fold 3 Fold 4 Fold 5 Fold 6 Fold 7 Fold 8 Fold 9 Fold 10

KNN PLDL ADFC

Figure 3 Accuracy chart for breast cancer

4 Conclusions

ADFC is a new approach of looking at characterization algorithms. ADFC classified instances based on the orientation of each test instance towards a class. ADFC is used on breast cancer dataset and results prove that ADFC gives better results than contemporary algorithms. ADFC was also used on Iris dataset for validation. The results again prove the generalization ability of ADFC algorithm.

Volume 1, Issue 1 51 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

0.9

0.8

0.7

0.6

0.5 Accuracy 0.4

0.3

0.2

0.1

0 Fold 1 Fold 2 Fold 3 Fold 4 Fold 5 Fold 6 Fold 7 Fold 8 Fold 9 Fold 10

KNN PLDL ADFC

Figure 4 Accuracy chart for Iris dataset

References

1. Available Online. https://www.cancer.net/cancer-types/breast-cancer/statistics. 2. Available Online. https://www.cancer.gov/types/breast/patient/adult/breast-treatment- pdq. 3. Russell, S. J., & Norvig, P. 2016, Artificial intelligence: a modern approach. Malaysia; Pearson Education Limited. 4. Wu, Y., Giger, M. L., Doi, K., Vyborny, C. J., Schmidt, R. A., & Metz, C. E. 1993, Artificial neural networks in mammography: application to decision making in the diagnosis of breast cancer, Radiology, 187(1): 81-87. 5. Ng, E. K., Fok, S. C., Peh, Y. C., Ng, F. C., & Sim, L. S. J., 2002, Computerized detection of breast cancer with artificial intelligence and thermograms, Journal of medical engineering & technology, 26(4): 152-157.

Volume 1, Issue 1 52 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

6. Biswas, M., Kuppili, V., & Edla, D. R., 2019, ALDL: a novel method for label distribution learning. Sādhanā, 44(3): 53. 7. Kuppili, V., Biswas, M & Edla, D. R., 2019, PLDL: a novel method for label distribution learning. IAJIT 16(6): 1021-1027. 8. O.L. Mangasarian, W.N. Street and W.H. Wolberg. (July-August 1995), Breast cancer diagnosis and prognosis via linear programming, Operations Research, 43(4): 570-577.

Volume 1, Issue 1 53 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Impressions of High Frequency Radio-Waves from Cell Phone Towers on Birds: A Base-Line Study

Sauvik Bose1, Rajeshwari Roy2, Urbi Chakraborti1, Risha Samanta1, Sipra Jana1, Tanusree Mondal1, Soumini Chaudhury1and Rina Bhattacharya1

1Department of Physics, JIS University, Kolkata, West Bengal, 700109 2Department of Environmental Studies,Rabindra Bharati University, Kolkata,West Bengal, 700007 E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract: The enhanced use of wireless telephony and internet services is indispensible need of the hour to keep up economy and thus meet the global pace. But amongst all of the much studied deadly environmental pollutions, electro-magnetic radiation (EMR) is the newer one and global concern. Although studies regarding its ill impacts on human health are the major concern; a number of results also reveal the impacts on other creatures too. An adverse relation between EMR and common birds is concluded several times. A comparative baseline bird survey between an EMR exposed location and an EMR free location; with identical weather conditions has been documented in the current investigation. The experimental fields are located in sub urban, rural; agriculture and forest areas of Arambagh subdivision (22.88°N, 87.78°E) of West Bengal, India and the studies were carried out in the month of September of this year. Only 28.08% birds are found near the EMR exposed zones however occurrence of small birds are very few compared to large birds.

Key Words: Wireless telephony, Habitat, Environmental Pollution, Bird Survey.

1 Introduction

If we walk along the memory lane of the worldwide civilizations and communications, we observe a popular pattern of using pigeons as messengers. It was around the 12th century BC, when these birds were used to deliver mails, documents and many more [1]. By the 18th century, the newspaper came and successively became common, though it was not a way for one to one communication [2]. The newspaper was followed by the introduction of the telegraph, and finally telephones appeared in 1876. In the later part of 1800s, the concept of wireless telegraphy emerged. Since then, through several inventions and modifications, computer, wireless telephony, email system, instant messenger, widespread internet access, smart phones, social media and video communications using mobile applications have evolved.

Volume 1, Issue 1 54 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

World Economic Forum stated that the cell phone industry is now under abrupt growth globally having a steadily growing market for data traffic. According to the available statistics, the count of mobile subscribers has already surpassed the world population [3]. Our country has got the second largest telecommunication market in the world. Moreover, the second highest internet using country (in terms of users) is India. The sum of telephone connections per 100 individuals (or tele density) has grown from 18.3% in financial year 2007 to 92.84% in financial year 2018. Further assumptions reveal that the figure of internet subscriptions is going to get doubled by 2021 (up to a value of 829 million). The report adds that over a period three months in 2018, India turned out to be the most rapidly expanding market for cell phone applications [4]. It was reported that in developing countries that with the 10% increase of mobile and broadband connectivity, the GDP per capita will be increased by 0.81% and 1.38% respectively [5].The exponential progress on Telecom Sector in the country has contributed to the economic as well as societal progress of India [6, 7]. To combat the present need of communication of more than 50 crore cell phone users, about 4.4 lakh mobile base stations are installed. The frequency band transmitted by different antenna is given in Table 1. Moreover, in few cities 4G has been used for which the transmitted frequency is in the range 1900-2025 MHz and 2110-2200 MHz [8].

Table 1 Antenna and transmitted frequency Antenna CDMA GSM900 GSM1800 Frequency range 869 - 894 935 - 960 1810 – 1880 (MHz)

But every good thing has a dark side. Mobile telephony is of course not the exceptional one. While a large part of the nation is busy with the improvisation of telecommunications for a better economic future, a group of researchers has concluded the deadly effects of continuous exposures in the EMR field. Adversities due to cell phone radiations have been reported worldwide [9]. Even certain studies claim it to be carcinogenic to human [10]. If we put aside human health, these radiations have huge detrimental effects on ecosystem too. A number of studies proved the direct effect of cell phones and cell phone tower emissions on several organisms [11]. Birds are accounted to be highly troubled due to exposures to tele radiations. Since radiation may have both thermal and non-thermal effects on living tissues, it is highly able to hamper their nesting, egg laying, roosting, feeding and associated behaviours [12]. There are ample evidences that birds avoid high radiation zones, especially, the cell phone masts [13, 14]. Hence, the modern communication system deliberately hurts the avian; not only the pigeons, the pioneer of all the communication systems, but other avian varieties too.

Here, we have conducted a comparative documentation of bird occurrences, between a radiation exposed zone and a radiation free zone in the Arambagh subdivision of Hooghly district.

Volume 1, Issue 1 55 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

2 Materials and Methods

[A] Study areas

Four different habitats viz suburban, rural, agriculture and forest are selected in and around Arambagh ( 22.88°N, 87.78°E) city in Hooghly district of West Bengal, India as shown in Fig 1. This locality has a population density of 4224/sq-km. This is a rice and potato producing agricultural area with several rice mills and cold storages which can attract birds of diverse variety. The climate is tropical in nature. The temperature rises to 42 °C during summer and falls to as low as 8 °C in winter and the average annual rainfall is 1,600 mm [15]. The survey is conducted in four habitats as shown in Figure 1.

I. II.

III. IV.

Figure 1 Study area: (I) Sub urban habitat, (II) Rural habitat, (III) Agriculture habitat and (IV) Forest habitat

Volume 1, Issue 1 56 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

I. Sub urban ( ): This is situated in the Arambagh Municipality beside the Link Road. There are a good number of trees within the location and 50m away there is a pond. A private hospital is situated near the habitat and the noise-level is little bit high (68dB-75dB) in the locality.

II. Rural ( ) : This habitat is within the Arambagh Block 150 m away from the Ahilyabai-Holkar Road. The area is green due to the presence of variety of trees viz. bamboo (Bambusa aridinarifolia), black plum (Syzgium cumini), banyan (Ficus benghalensis) etc. The noise-level is about 60 - 72 dB.

III. Agriculture ( ): This habitat (paddy field) is located in Arambagh Municipality 500 m away from Arambagh-Bardhaman road and there is a river called ‗Dwarakeswar‘ 400 m away from the habitat. The noise level is about 60dB.

IV. Forest ( ) : This habitat (named Chandur) is also under Aramabgh Municipality 10 m away from the Arambagh-Bardhaman road. There is no mobile tower within 500 m from the location. There is a river ‗Dwarakeswar‘ 500 m from the location. The noise level is very low (about 50dB). This location is fully covered with Sal trees (Shorea robusta).

[B] Field visit and Data collection

Field surveys are done during morning hours from 6:00 hrs to 9:30 hrs on each day during the month of September, 2019 using point count method in case of rural and agriculture habitat and line transect method in sub urban and forest habitat [16].The presence of birds are counted both from visual observation and accounting the chirps of birds followed by snap shot using NIKON D5500 camera.

[C] Mathematical Tool

Species diversity in a community is computed by using Shannon diversity index (H) for both abundance and evenness of the species present [17]. It is defined as:

Shannon Index (H) = - --- (1)

th where Pi is the proportion of individuals of the i species out of total number of individuals and S is the total number of species.

Volume 1, Issue 1 57 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Table 2 Characteristics of birds Name Identifying character Breeding time Common Myna Colour: Yellow bill, leg and bare eyes; brown with a October-March (Acridotheres black head tristis) Avg. size: 24cm. Dove Size: Small head compared to their body; Long tail with September-October (Spilopelia distinct colour pattern; chinensis) Colour: Having 35 colours, Most commonly white, brown, grey and pitch. Tailor Bird Colour: Brightly coloured bird with bright green upper February - May (Orthotomus part and creamy lower part; Size range: 10-14cm; sutorius) Having short round wings and long tails Bulbul Colour: Upper wing and mantle are mid brown, the February-July (Pycnonotus rump is white, tail is long and blackish with prominent cafer) white tip, eyes and legs are dark; Length: 13-19 cm; Size: concave and short wings; These are singing birds. Wood Pecker Tough pointed beak; Tip of their bill is chisel shaped; April – July (Dendrocopos They have sharp claws on their toes; Tongue is 4 inchs. macei) Long.

Pigeon Shape: spindle or fusiform body; Length: 33cm; Mid July - Mid (Columba livia) Colour: eyes and feet are pink, body is salty grey with October glistening metallic green and purple sheen on the breast and around the neck, the wing has two black bars. Pied Myna Colour: strikingly marked in black and white, yellowish March - September (Gracupica bill with reddish bill base. the upper body, throat & contra) breast are black while the cheek, lores, wings converts and rump are contrastingly white Crow Size: 47cm (16 inchs.); Robustly build bird with tails March-June (Corvus that are short or medium length; Tail is stiff; Bills varies splendens) from species to species Crane Height: 1.8m (5.9 ft.); Tall birds with large wings, long April – June (Bubulcus ibis) legs, and graceful necks; Colour: black and white or grey, Often there are bright patches of bare red skin that are shown in threat & dance display Jungle bubbler Length: 16cm; Noisy birds; Shape: short rounded wings October- November (Turdoides and weak flight; Colour: grey shades, brown coloured striata) body lower part Rose ringed Length: 38-42cm; Colour: yellow, green plumage, long December -June parakeet graduated tail and broad, rounded and hooked pinkish- (Psittacula red bill. krameri) Volume 1, Issue 1 58 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

3 Results and Discussion All together we have found 11 types of birds in different habitats. Their identifying characters [18] and breeding time are presented in Table 2.

Figure 2 Variation of power density with distance from tower base There are two mobile towers in the sub urban and rural habitat. The variation of power density with distance as shown in Figure 2 ranges from 75.1μW/m2 to 433.51μW/m2 in case of tower 1 in rural habitat and from 620.31μW/m2 to 4054.1μW/m2 in case of tower 2 in sub urban habitat. The distribution of birds in various habitats is presented in Table 3. Depending on the land use pattern the population varies from 3.00% to 52.98%. Common Myna is the most dominant species in all habitats except agriculture field. It is interesting to note that diversity is highest in Forest Habitat. Alpha, beta and gamma diversity indices as depicted in Table 4 are analyzed to compare the diversity between habitats. Two significant parameters Shannon diversity index and evenness of the bird diversity are computed using equation (1). Table 3 Distribution of birds (%) in different habitats Name I II III IV Common Myna 23.07 25.43 9.27 24.46 Dove - 11.86 5.29 2.57 Tailor Bird 8.79 - 3.97 - Bulbul 6.59 - - - Wood Pecker - - - 6.43 Pigeon 14.28 - - Pied Myna 8.79 22.03 23.84 9.44 Crow 24.17 27.11 - 3.00 Crane - - 52.98 21.45 Jungle bubbler 14.28 13.55 4.63 20.17 Rose ringed parakeet - - - 12.44 Volume 1, Issue 1 59 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

From Table 3 it is observed that the diversity and evenness of sub urban habitat are higher than agriculture area (paddy field). Forest doesn‘t only takes in a substantial number of species present, the individual birds in the community are uniformly distributed.

Table 4 Alpha, Beta and Gamma diversities Alpha 7 5 6 8 diversity (sub urban) (Rural) (agriculture) (Forest) Beta diversity I II III IV I - 4 4 4 II 4 - 4 5 III 4 4 - 5 IV 4 5 5 -

Gamma 11(eleven) diversity

Table 5 Shannon Diversity Index and Evenness Habitat Diversity Index Evenness I 1.87 0.96 II 1.56 0.97 III 1.32 0.74 IV 1.85 0.89

In the forest habitat there are 8 species and over 60% of the individuals belong to three species. Common myna and crow are the most common species of suburban habitat which makes up about 47% of the community.

4 Conclusions

Different levels of stress have different impact on avian diversity. Habitat type, proportion of vegetation cover, exposure to electromagnetic radiation are the possible potential root of stress in this particular instance. We observed that occurrence of small birds near the tower are less in number. The presence of birds is significant about 150 m away from mobile towers though the diversity indices are comparable in all habitats. Moreover the occurrence of birds in the vicinity of EMR exposed zones and non exposed zones are respectively 28.08% and 71.91%

Volume 1, Issue 1 60 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) respectively. The preliminary survey has been carried on for a short duration of one month, so observations based on various habitats for longer period is highly desired to obtain a definite result regarding the impact of EMR exposure to avian community.

Acknowledgements

We are thankful to JIS University for their all kinds of supports. We also acknowledge Arambagh Municipality for their cooperation as and when required. Local people in the vicinity of different habitats for their cooperation during field visit..

References

1. Blechman, A. 2007, Pigeons-The fascinating saga of the world's most revered and reviled bird. St Lucia, Queensland: University of Queensland Press. 2. Wax, B. 1964, Newspaper Collections and History. Library Trends, 13: 254-271. 3. Mitra, R. and Pattanayak, S. 2018, Mobile phone and tower radiation: a challenge to all living entities. Explor. Anim Med Res, 8(1): 5-10. 4. Gopika, G. G. 2014, Growth and Developement of Telecom Sector in India- An Overview. IOSR Journal of Business and Management, 16(9): 25-36. 5. Kumar, K. and Kumar, K. 2017, Evolution of Telecom Sector in India. Int. J. Eng. Res. Dev., 13(9): 1-4. 6. Baruah, P. and Baruah, R. 2015, Growth and Developement of Telecom Sector: A Comprehensive Study of Assam Telecom Circle. Ind J. Com. Mag. Stud, 6(1): 71-77. 7. Baruah, P. and Barua, R. 2014, Telecom Sector in India: Past, Present and Future. International Journal of Humanities & Social Science Studies, 1(3): 147-156. 8. Kumar, G. 2010, Report on cell tower radiation, Department of Technology (DOT), Delhi. 9. Kuss, D. J., Kanjo, E., Ramsey, M. C., Kibowski, F., Wang, G. Y. and Sumich, A. 2018, Problematic Mobile Phone Use and Addiction Across Generations: the Roles of Psychopathological Symptoms and Smartphone Use. Journal of Technology in Behavioral Science, 3(3): 141-149. 10. Desai, N. R., Kesari, K. K. and Agarwal, A. 2009, Pathophysiology of cell phone radiation: oxidative stress and carcinogenesis with focus on male reproductive system. Reprod Biol Endocrinol, 7: 114. 11. Rafiqui, S. I., Kumar, S., Chaudhary, R., Farooq, U. B. and Krithika, P. 2016, Mobile Phone Radiations and Its Impact on Birds, Animals and Human Beings. Trends in Veterinary and Animal Sciences, 3: 24-27.

Volume 1, Issue 1 61 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

12. Bhattacharya, R. and Roy, R. 2013, Impacts of Communication Towers on Avians: A Review. International Journal of Electronics & Communication Technology, 4(1): 137 - 139. 13. Kumar, M. and Singh, R. K. 2018, Effect Of Mobile Tower Radiation On Birds, Rural And Urban Area Of Durg District (C.G.). World Journal of Pharmacy and Pharmaceutical Sciences, 7(6): 1330-1338. 14. Balmori, A. 2009, Electromagnetic pollution from phone masts: Effects on wildlife. Pathophysiology, 16(2-3): 191-9. 15. Directorate of Census Operations, West Bengal, 2011. District Census Hand Book, Series 20 , Part XII B. 16. Wilson, R. R., Daniel, J. T. and Blaine A. E. 2000, Comparison of line transects and point counts for monitoring spring migration in forested wetlands. J. of Field Ornithology, 71(2): 345-355. 17. Carol, I., Richard, G.and Tim, I. 2011, Birds of the Indian Subcontinent . Oxford University Press, 480. 18. Spellerberg, I. F., and Fedor, P. J. 2003, A tribute to Claude Shannon (1916–2001) and a plea for more rigorous use of species richness, species diversity and the ‗Shannon – Wiener‘ Index. Global Ecology and Biogeography, 12: 177–179.

Volume 1, Issue 1 62 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Thermal Stress Analysis for Indian Metro Cities during Summer Months

Ahana Mitra1, Gourab Biswas2, Joyeesha Manna1, Arkadip Nandan1 , Soumi Bose1, 1 1 Soumini Chaudhury and Rina Bhattacharya

1Department of Physics, JIS University, and Kolkata, West Bengal, 700109 2Department of Physiology, Krisnath College, Behrampore, West Bengal, 742101 E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract: It is widely accepted that the earth's climate is changing in a rapid pace, with already documented adverse effects on living world and the environment. Heat is severe hazard for humans in an occupational setting due to the rise of thermal discomfortability day by day and may be worsening with global warming. For a tropical country like India, the effect worsens particularly during summer months. April, May and June. In this work, heat stress over four metro cities - Delhi, Kolkata, Mumbai, and Chennai located at different geographical locations in India have been analysed for the months April, May and June. Delhi has been found to be the warmest place over a span of last one decade. The number of hot days is maximum in the month of May and more than 75 % of the summer days belong to severe stress days for all the four cities. Effective work-rest cycle, improved regulations and enforcement should be adopted to fight against heat stress.

Key words: Discomfortability; Heat stress; Global warming; Work-rest cycle

1 Introduction

In the last few decades, global mean temperature has increased due to climate change. Increased air pollution, fast urbanization and industrialization leads to increase the surrounding air temperature as well as heat stress during summer seasons [1, 2, 3, 4]. Summer months (April to Jun) are the most stressful period particularly for the unorganized sector workers who are engaged in outdoor activities. Soldiers, farmers, athletes, travellers, as well as regular office goers are also affected by thermal discomfortability [5, 6]. They often suffer from different heat related disorders such as heat rash, heat cramp, and heat exhaustion and most severe heat stroke. Several investigators have reported that the degree of thermal stress depends on different factors such as ambient air temperature, relative humidity, heat exchange capacity and total metabolic rate of the body, air flow, global radiation and also clothing insulation of the individual. The thermal comfort zone ranges from 23ºC to 27ºC and 20ºC to 25ºC during summer and winter seasons respectively [7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13]. According to World Meteorological Organization (WMO) thermal discomfortability starts from 24ºC with relative humidity of 100%, a heat wave can occur when the maximum air temperature exceeds 5ºC above the normal temperature [14]. Volume 1, Issue 1 63 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

India being a tropical country, summer months is very much stressful for the workers engaged in construction industries, agricultural field, power plant, pottery industries etc. Since last few decades, heat stress researches are going on to estimate the thermal load in different climatic zones [15, 16, 17, 18]. Pai et al., in 2013 has reported about a significant decadal increase of heat wave over India [19]. In this study, an attempt is made to estimate the heat stress and thermal discomfortability of four major cities of India to execute proper guidelines and work plan to minimize the heat related illness.

2 Materials and Methods

[A] Study areas

Delhi, Mumbai, Kolkata and Chennai the four metro cities of India as shown in Figure 1 are selected for our present study. The climate of these cities is as follows [20]:

Figure 1 Study areas

Delhi (28º36'N, 77º13'E, 200 m above msl), is the national capital, lies under humid subtropical and semi-arid climatic zone. Its annual temperature ranges from 7ºC to 41ºC. Summer season starts from early April and lasts till the last week of June. Maximum temperature found in the month of May. The average rainfall for the summer months is 18.67 mm.

Volume 1, Issue 1 64 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Kolkata (22º57'N, 88º36'E, 9 m above msl), is the capital city of West Bengal, lies under the tropical wet and dry climatic zone with annual mean temperature of 24.8 ºC (ranges from 13ºC to 36ºC) and average rainfall for the summer months is 159.34 mm. Maximum temperature often exceeds 40ºC in the month of May and June.

Mumbai (18º58'N, 72º49'E, 14 m above msl), is the economic capital of India, lies under the tropical wet and dry climatic zone with an average temperature of 27.2ºC. Summer season starts from April and the temperature reaches the maximum in the month of May. The average rainfall for the summer months is 178.77 mm.

Chennai (13º5'N, 80º16'E, 6m above msl), is the capital of Tamil Nadu, is located on the Coromandel coastal region of Bay of Bengal. It lies under tropical climatic zone with an average annual temperature of 28.6ºC. May is the warmest month with an average temperature of 33ºC. The rainfall during summer months is too small about 35.84 mm.

[B] Data Source and Mathematical Tools:

Radiosonde data [https://ruc.noaa.gov/raobs] during the period 2009 to 2019 are used to analyze the heat stress of the four major cities of India. Two significant heat stress indices (i) thermohygrometric index (THI) and (ii) Wet Bulb Globe Temperature (WBGT) are used to compute heat stress [21, 22].

THI = 0.72 (Ta + Tw) + 40.6 (1) where, Ta and Tw are the air temperature and wet bulb temperature in °C respectively. Wet Bulb Globe Temperature (WBGT) is the most widely used heat stress index which was developed by WBGT = 0.1 Ta + 0.7 Tw + 0.2 Tg (2) where, Ta, Tw and Tg are the air temperature, wet bulb temperature and globe temperature in °C respectively. Tg may be replaced by Ta in case of indoor environment. The degree of stress is quantified by the five graded heat stress scales of THI and WBGT as given in Table 1. The scale was developed after critical survey among huge number of populations and at different climatic conditions [23, 24] Table 1 Five graded discomfort scale

Score Thermal sensation Comfort sensation THI WBGT 1 Natural Comfortable <60 25.6-27.7 2 Slightly warm Slightly uncomfortable 60 ≤ to <70 27.8-29.4 3 Warm Uncomfortable 70 ≤ to <80 29.5-31.0 4 Hot Severe stress 80 ≤ to <90 31.1-32.1 5 Very hot Very severe stress ≥ 90 >32.2 Volume 1, Issue 1 65 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

3 Results and Discussion

Average weather parameters i.e., atmospheric pressure, dry bulb temperature, dew point temperature and wet bulb temperature of four major cities during 2009 to 2019 are given in Table 2. It is observed that summer temperature ranges from 22.8°C to 46.2°C, 25.4°C to 36.6°C, 22.0°C to 38.6°C and 26.0°C to 41.2°C during 2009 to 2019 over Delhi, Mumbai, Kolkata and Chennai respectively. Mean summer temperatures of the respective cities are found to be 37.5°C, 32.2°C, 33.4°C and 34.3°C. It is interesting to note that Delhi is the warmest place among the four metro cities of India in this study period. Frequency distribution of THI and WBGT of four metro cities are given in Figure 2 and 3. It is observed that 76.0%, 92.5%, 89.7% and 97.5% days of Delhi, Mumbai, Kolkata and Chennai fall in category 4 i.e., hot or severe stress category according to THI. It is also found that 8.7% day of summer months over Delhi are fall in the category 5 i.e., very hot or very severe stress category. It is observed that 26.5% and 18.7%, 57.7% and 7.6%, 38.2% and 37.8%, 52.5% and 33.5% days of Delhi, Mumbai, Kolkata and Chennai respectively are fall in category 2 and 3 i.e., slightly warm and warm category according to WBGT index during summer months. From this WBGT index, we have also found that 6.9% and 5.6% summer days of Delhi and Kolkata fall in category 4 whereas 2.7% days of Delhi are in very severe stress condition.

Table 2 Mean weather parameters of four metro cities Month Atmospheric Dry bulb Dew point Wet bulb pressure temperature temperature temperature (hPa) (⁰C) (⁰C) (⁰C) April 973.9±2.7 35.6±2.7 10.5±4.3 21.7±1.7

Delhi May 969.8±2.9 38.9±4.1 13.3±5.4 23.9±1.9

June 966.1±2.4 37.9±4.6 19.4±4.5 25.6±1.9

April 1005.1±1.7 32.4±1.2 22.4±2.4 25.4±1.2

Mumbai May 1004.1±1.9 32.9±1.1 24.5±1.3 26.7±1.1

June 1001.3±1.9 31.1±2.4 25.3±1.0 26.8±1.4

April 1003.0±2.1 34.4±2.5 23.8±3.1 26.8±1.8

Kolkata May 1001.0±3.1 33.7±3.4 24.5±2.0 26.9±1.7

June 998.9±2.3 31.7±2.8 26.1±1.4 27.4±1.3

April 1004.4±1.6 33.9±1.4 24.2±2.0 26.9±1.2

Chennai May 1002.2±2.7 34.9±2.6 23.7±1.6 26.8±1.0

June 1001.2±1.4 34.2±2.5 22.9±2.3 26.2±1.3

Volume 1, Issue 1 66 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 2 Frequency distribution of THI

Figure 3 Frequency distribution of WBGT Volume 1, Issue 1 67 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

4 Conclusions From the present study it is noted that during summer season, number of hot days is found to be maximum in the month of May for all four cities of India and also the thermal stress during 2009 to 2019. So, heat related hazards are more probable among the people who are engaged in outdoor activities during summer months. Heat illness or disorders not only affects individual‘s health status but at the same time it overall reduces performance, efficiency, working hours, increases the wages cost of the manpower hence it has a negative effect on productivity and economy. Sufficient air movement in working places, adequate fluid intake, proper clothing, recommended work-rest cycle and periodic health check-up can subsequently combat the thermal stress of an individual during summer days [25]. One of the main constraints is to obtain permission to investigate occupational heat stress related issues at work place in different sectors in India. Hence, to establish a definite relation between health and thermal stress is highly needed.

Acknowledgements

Authors are grateful to JIS University for providing us all kinds of facilities and opportunities for carrying out the work and thankful to the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) for using some of the relevant data.

References

1. Tjaša, P., Casanueva, A., Katja, K. K., Urša, C. , Igor, B. M. , Lučk,a K. B. and Zalika, C. 2018, The effect of hot days on occupational heat stress in the manufacturing industry: implications for workers‘ well-being and productivity. Int J biometeorol, 62(7): 1251– 1264. 2. Dash, S.K.and Kjellstrom, T. 2011, Workplace heat stress in the context of rising temperature in India. Curr Sci,101(4): 496–503. 3. Bhattacharya, R., Pal, S., Biswas, G., Karmakar, S. and Banik, R. 2012, An estimation of heat stress in tropics. International Journal of Engineering Science and Technology, 4(10): 4302-4307. 4. Bhattacharya, R., Pal, S., Biswas, G., Karmakar, S. and Saha, G. 2013, Seasonal distribution of comfortability: A regional based study over Kalyani, West Bengal, India. International Journal of Innovative Research in Science, Engineering and Technology, 2(7): 2856-2862. 5. Arnell, W. N., Lowe, A. J., Challinor, J. A. and Osborn, J. T. 2019, Global and regional impacts of climate change at different levels of global temperature increase. Climatic Change, 155(3): 377–391.

Volume 1, Issue 1 68 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

6. Prasad, S. K. and Power, B. C. 1982, Discomfort over Bombay during winter. Vayumandal, 12: 53-54. 7. Nag, P.K., Nag, A. and Ashtekar, S.P. 2007, Thermal limits of men in moderate to heavy work in tropical farming. Ind Health, 45(1): 107–17. 8. Al-Bouwarthan, M., Quinn, M.M., Kriebel, D. and Wegman, D.H. 2019, Annals of Work Exposures and Health. Ann Work Expo Health , 63(5): 505-520. 9. Feifei, W., Xiaohua, Y. and Zhenyao, S. 2019, Regional and seasonal variations of outdoor thermal comfort in China from 1966 to 2016. Sci Total Environ, 665: 1003-1016. 10. Fanger, P.O. 1970,Thermal comfort. Analysis and applications in environmental engineering. Copenhagen: Danish Technical Press. 11. Chakrabarty, K. K. 1982, An usual cold day in Calcutta in the third week of April. Vayumandal, 12: 29-31. 12. Epstein, Y. and Moran, D. S. 2006, Thermal comfort and heat stress indices. Ind Health, 44(3): 388-398. 13. Kumar, S. 2018, Air Pollution and Climate Change: Case Study National Capital Territory of Delhi. International Journal Of Scientific & Engineering Research, 9(6): 844-848. 14. Landsberg (Ed.), H. E. 1972, The assessment of human bio climatic- A limited review of physical parameters. WMO Technical note, 123: 2-16. 15. Miller, V. and Bates, G. 2007, Hydration of outdoor workers in northwest Australia. Journal of Occupational Health and Safety – Australia and New Zealand, 23(1): 79-87. 16. Bhattacharya, R. and Biswas, G. 10th March 2010, Physiological stress during hot weather months over Kolkata, West Bengal. Proc. National Seminar on Biodiversity, Water Resources and Climate Change Issues, Kalyani University, 88-93. 17. Bhattacharya, R., Biswas, G., Guha, R., Pal, S. and Dey, S. S. 2010, On the variation of summer thermal stress over Kolkata from 1995 to 2009. Vayumondal, 36: 16-21. 18. Biswas, G., Bhattacharya, A., Ali, M. and Bhattacharya, R. 2016, Assessment of Heat Stress on Open Field Workers at Four Indian Coastal Stations. International Journal of Innovative Research in Science, Engineering and Technology, 5(3): 2998-3003. 19. Pai D. S., Nair, S .A. and Ramanathan, A. N. 2013, Long term climatology and trends of heat waves over India during the recent 50 years (1961-2010). MAUSAM, 64 (4): 585-604. 20. Attri, S.D. and Tyagi, A. 2010, Climate profile of India, Met Monograph No. Environment Meteorology-01. India Meteorological Department, New Delhi. 21. Thom, E. C. 1959, The discomfort index. Weatherwise, 12: 57-60. 22. Yaglou, C. P. and Minard, D. 1957, Control of heat casualties at military training centers. AMA Arch Ind Health, 16(4): 302-316.

Volume 1, Issue 1 69 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

23. Roghanchi, P. and Kocsis , C. K. 2018, Challenges in Selecting an Appropriate Heat Stress Index to Protect Workers in Hot and Humid Underground Mines. Saf Health Work, 9(1): 10- 16. 24. de Freitas, C. R. and Grigorieva , E. A. 2015, A comprehensive catalogue and classification of human thermal climate indices. Int J biometeorol, 59(1): 109-120. 25. Srinivasan, K., Maruthy, K. N., Venugopal, I.V. and Ramaswamy, P. 2016, Research in occupational heat stress in India: Challenges and opportunities. Indian J Occup Environ Med, 20(2): 73-78.

Volume 1, Issue 1 70 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Bioelectricity Generation from Waste Water using Microbial Fuel Cell: A Literature Survey Dipankar Ghosh1, Shrestha Debnath1 and Pritha Mondal1

1Microbial Engineering & Algal Biotechnology Laboratory, Department of Biotechnology JIS University, 81 Nilgunj Road, Agarpara Kolkata 700 109 [email protected] Abstract: Bioelectricity generation using waste water treatment is a big industrial dream project. Microbial fuel cell technology is one of the most promising sustainable approaches to attain this goal. Major objective of waste water treatment are water purification or desalination, value added energy generations, environmental protection and human health. In this context, microbial fuel cells can efficiently degrade organic and inorganic constituents of waste water towards value added process development likely bioelectricity generation. However, existing microbial fuel cell platform for waste water recycling and electricity generation are in infancy. It requires lots of research work to make this technology industrially viable. To this end, current article briefly discusses general discussion about microbial fuel cell configurations, waste water utilization as potential feedstock and major limitation of exiting microbial fuel cell technology for waste water purification.

Keywords: Bioelectricity, Current density, Exoelectrogens, Power density, Waste water recycling

1 Introduction Bioelectricity generation is an alternative sustainable approach towards utilization of waste biomass using microbial biocatalysts. Microbial Fuel Cell (MFC) is one of the promising platforms to generate such bioelectricity from organic/ or inorganic waste biomass using diverse microbial regime through anaerobic fermentation. The concept of bioelectricity production was first time coined by M.C Potter in 1911 [1]. A typical MFC design consists of anode compartment, cathode compartment and proton exchange membrane or proton exchange salt bridge. In principle, microbial catalysts degrade organic/ or inorganic wastes (complex substrate) into simple end metabolites and releases electron, protons, CO2 under anaerobic environment. Released electrons pass through external wire circuits from anode chamber. Whereas, generated proton in anode chamber will move to cathode compartment through proton exchange membrane or proton exchange salt bridge. In cathode section, protons and electrons combine to produce water molecule in presence of oxygen [2,3]. The current literature survey emphasizes on following points likely a. type of MFCs; b. waste biomass utilization as potential feedstock for MFCs operations; c. existing challenges of MFCs.

Volume 1, Issue 1 71 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

2 Description of microbial fuel cells

2.1 Type of MFCs The main purpose for developing different types of MFCs design is to increase the power densities or current densities, columbic efficiencies and mass utilization of waste biomass using potential biocatalysts. There are several kinds of MFC designs are available to attain this goal including Cube reactor design, Air Cathode two chamber design, Bottle Reactor design, Single chamber MFC, Flat Plate Type MFC, U Tube MFC, Tubular MFC and membrane bioreactor etc. A very typically simple MFC set up is depicted in Figure 1. In MFCs, anode and cathode constituents need to have following features likely higher electronic conductivity, biocompatibility, chemical stability, higher specific surface areas, and higher porosity for enhancing power density and over all bioelectricity generations. Most commonly used anode materials are graphite plates or rods. Sometimes, Mn (IV) and Fe (III) and covalently linked neutral red/ methylene blue usage ameliorate the overall performance of anode through enhanced electron transfer [4, 5]. Moreover, cathode contains materials likely carbon coated with platinum catalyst, carbon without platinum catalyst, plain carbon, metals other than platinum (MnO2, CNT, TiO2) and bio cathodes [6, 7, 8]. On the other hand, salt bridge or ion exchange membrane needs to have following criteria improving power density and over all bioelectricity efficiencies i.e. excellent thermal, chemical & mechanical stability, higher ionic conductivity, lower cost and lower degradation etc. Most commonly used ion exchange membrane includes Ralex, Ultrex, Fumatech, PEO, PEG, and Nafion membrane etc [9, 10, 11]. Power density or current density is the most promising unit to represent the MFCs efficiency. Power density in Microbial fuel cell depends on the following factors likely nature of substrate, mediator type, type of exoelectrogens, reactor configuration, nature of anode material and cathode material and physical condition like temperature, pH value etc.

Figure 1 Diagrammatic Depiction of a typical Microbial Fuel Cell set up

Volume 1, Issue 1 72 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

2.2 MFCs useful tool for waste water recycling Waste water disposal and recycling towards clearer water are the two major concerns in current scenario. The main purpose of treatment of waste water recycling plants are water purification through desalination, restoration of environment and ecosystem through recovery of valuable resources likely nutrients and purified water for human health. There are several approaches have been applied likely activated sludge process, waste stabilization ponds, lagoon system, oxidation ditch, membrane bioreactor, extended aeration, rotating biological contactor and trickling filters [12]. However current conventional strategies are highly expensive having lower overall heat & energy conversion efficiencies. Moreover, biological nutrient recycling approaches (sequential nitrification and denitrification) are highly energy intensive process and accelerate higher sludge disposal concerns. To this end a paradigm shift requires to establish an energetically and chemically favorable platform with higher water purification and nutrient recovery efficiency towards sustainable output i.e. bioelectricity generation. In this current scenario bioelectrochemical platform represent a sustainable basement towards energy positive treatment of waste water. Microbial fuel cell (MFC) is one of the most promising examples of bioelectrochemical system which accelerates waste water recycling and bioelectricity production through electron generating exoelectrogenic microbial regimes. Moreover, there are several alternative technologies have been applied time to time to conserve the energy, improve bioprocess efficiency, and nutrient recovery which makes the overall process energy positive and energy neutral for waste water treatment. These advanced approaches are namely combined heat & power Systems [13], Biogas Generation & anaerobic digester [14], Microalgae Growth for Biofuels generations [15], biodigesters configuration & innovative design [16, 17]. However, these novel avenues do not meet the industrial needs towards effective waste water recycling. MFCs have shown very extensive potential anaerobic digestion of waste water to produce environmentally benign bioelectricity utilizing organic and inorganic constituents of waste water. There are certain parameters which determine the efficiencies of MFC overall performances likely carbon removal (chemical oxygen demand & biological oxygen demand etc), nutrient removal, energy efficiency, current density, power density, open circuit voltages, energy payback time, and energy recovery concept [18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23]

2.3 Major challenges of MFCs There are several issues in MFC operations. These issues include likely poor electrochemical kinetics of exoelectrogens, poor interaction between electrodes and bacteria, inefficient electron acceptors [24]. Electron acceptors help to alleviate power generations in MFCs by minimizing electron loss in electrodes. There are several alternative electron acceptors have been used i.e. nitrate, nitrobenzene, metal ions, perchlorate and azo dyes towards better waste remediation and bioelectricity generations [25]. Different cheaper chemical catalysts are in use to maximize the oxygen reduction kinetics and reduce electrode activation which includes lead dioxide [26], Volume 1, Issue 1 73 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Fe/Fe2O3 [27], cobalt [28], manganese dioxide [29], and activated charcoal [30]. Moreover, few experimental studies suggest that metallic oxidants (e.g., U, Cd, Cr, Cu) can also be applied to improve the waste recycling and power generation. Electrode chemical constituents are another major independent variable which determine over all power density i.e. carbon cloth, carbon brush, carbon rod, carbon mesh, carbon veil, carbon paper, carbon felt, granular activated carbon, granular graphite, carbonized cardboard, graphite plate, reticulated vitreous carbon, and many other types of electrode materials (graphite, graphite felt, platinum black). Metal based electrodes are also applicable including stainless steel plate, stainless steel mesh, stainless steel scrubber, silver sheet, nickel sheet, copper sheet, gold sheet, and titanium plate. However, these MFC applications suffer due to lower surface area, lower reactor volume and poor electron transfer kinetics.

3 Conclusion and future outlook In over all, current brief literature survey shows that there are several approaches are made in MFC technical field. However, current MFC technology requires further enormous research activities to make it industrially sustainable approach. The major factor which needs to be improved further i.e. finding novel microbial exoelectrogens having higher metabolic efficiencies to shuttle higher numbers of electrons; advanced MFC design; process control development; resource recovery; large scale production; integrated approaches and implementation of biorefinery concept in near future. As far economic stand point, MFC technology still remains prohibitive which requires serious attentions via synthesizing low cost alterative electrode materials, MFC reactors and electron parts. Even current MFC technology requires extensive pilot scale manifestation to ensure confidence on practical implementation and large scale commercialization of MFC towards waste water recycling and renewable bioelectricity generations.

Acknowledgements Authors would like to thank JIS Group Educational Initiative and JIS University Agarpara for financial support to conduct this work.

References 1. Gude V, G., 2015, Energy and water autarky of wastewater treatment and power generation systems, Renewable and Sustainable Energy Reviews, 45: 52–68. 2. Gude V, G., 2015, Energy positive wastewater treatment and sludge management, Journal of Waste Management (Edorium), 1: 10–15. 3. Gude V. G., 2016, Wastewater treatment in microbial fuel cells–an overview, Journal of Cleaner Production, 122: 287–307.

Volume 1, Issue 1 74 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

4. Zhou M., Wang H., Hassett. D.J., Gu T., 2013, Recent advances in microbial fuel cells (MFCs) and microbial electrolysis cells (MECs) for wastewater treatment, bioenergy and bioproducts, Journal of Chemical Technology and Biotechnology, 88(4): 508–518. 5. Logan B.E., 2010, Scaling up microbial fuel cells and other bioelectrochemical systems, Applied Microbiology and Biotechnology, 85(6): 1665–1671. 6. He C.S. et al, 2015, Electron acceptors for energy generation in microbial fuel cells fed with wastewaters: a mini-review, Chemosphere, 140: 12–17. 7. Feng Y. et al., 2014, A horizontal plug flow and stackable pilot microbial fuel cell for municipal wastewater treatment, Bioresource Technology, 156: 132–138. 8. Yuan H., He Z., 2015, Integrating membrane filtration into bioelectrochemical systems as next generation energy efficient wastewater treatment technologies for water reclamation: a review, Bioresource Technology, 195: 202–209. 9. Zhang F., Brastad K.S., He Z., 2011, Integrating forward osmosis into microbial fuel cells for wastewater treatment, water extraction and bioelectricity generation, Environmental Science and Technology, 45(15): 6690–6696. 10. Zhang F. et al., 2013, In situ investigation of tubular microbial fuel cells deployed in an aeration tank at a municipal wastewater treatment plant, Bioresource Technology, 136: 316–321. 11. Wang A., et al, 2011, Integrated hydrogen production process from cellulose by combining dark fermentation, microbial fuel cells, and a microbial electrolysis cell, Bioresource Technology, 102(5): 4137–4143. 12. Singh P., Kansal A., Carliell-Marquet C., 2016, Energy and carbon footprints of sewage treatment methods, Journal of Environmental Management, 165: 22–30. 13. USEPA, 2012, Evaluation of Combined Heat and Power Technologies for Wastewater Treatment Facilities, EPA 832-R-10-006. 14. Stillwell A.S. et al, 2011, The energy-water nexus in Texas, Ecology and Sociology, 16(1): 2. 15. Beal C.M. et al, 2012, Energy return on Investment for algal biofuel production coupled with wastewater treatment. Water Environment Resources, 84: 692–710. 16. Siegrist H., et al, 2008, Anammox brings WWTP closer to energy autarky due to increased biogas production and reduced aeration energy for N-removal, Water Science and Technology, 57: 383–388. 17. Shoener B.D. et al, 2014, Energy positive domestic wastewater treatment: the roles of anaerobic and photorophic technologies, Environmental Science Processes Impacts 16: 1204–1222. 18. Rabaey K et al, 2004, Biofuel cells select for microbial consortia that self-mediate electron transfer, Applied Environmental Microbiology, 70: 5373–5382.

Volume 1, Issue 1 75 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

19. Fang C., Min B., Angelidaki I., 2011, Nitrate as an oxidant in the cathode chamber of a microbial fuel cell for both power generation and nutrient removal purposes, Applied Biochemistry and Biotechnology, 1(4): 464–474. 20. Huggins T. et al,2013, Energy and performance comparison of microbial fuel cell and conventional aeration treating of wastewater. Journal of Microbiology Biochemistry and Technology, S 6: 2. 21. Ge Z. et al, 2013, Recovery of electrical energy in microbial fuel cells: brief review, Environmental Science and Technology Letter, 1(2): 137–141. 22. Ge Z., He Z., 2016, Long-term performance of a 200 liter modularized microbial fuel cell system treating municipal wastewater: treatment, energy, and cost, Environmental Science Water Research, 2(2): 274–281. 23. Tommasi T., Lombardelli G., 2017, Energy sustainability of microbial fuel cell (MFC): a case study, Journal of Power Sources, 356: 438–447. 24. Santoro C., et al, 2017, Microbial fuel cells: from fundamentals to applications: A review, Journal of Power Sources, 356: 225–244. 25. Liu X.W., Li W.W., Yu H.Q., 2014, Cathodic catalysts in bioelectrochemical systems for energy recovery from wastewater, Chemical Society Reviews, 43(22): 7718–7745. 26. Morris J.M., et al, 2007, Lead dioxide as an alternative catalyst to platinum in microbial fuel cells, Electrochemical Communications, 9(7): 1730–1734. 27. Zhuang L., et al,. 2010, In situ Fenton-enhanced cathodic reaction for sustainable increased electricity generation in microbial fuel cells, Journal of Power Sources, 195(5): 1379–1382. 28. Lefebvre O. et al, 2009, Optimization of a Pt-free cathodesuitable for practical applications of microbial fuel cells, Bioresource Technology, 100(20): 4907–4910. 29. Lu M., Li S.F., 2012, Cathode reactions and applications in microbial fuel cells: a review, Crit. Rev. Environmental Science and Technology, 42(23): 2504–2525. 30. Pant D. et al, 2010, Use of novel permeable membrane and air cathodes in acetate microbial fuel cells, Electrochima Acta, 55(26): 7710–7716.

Volume 1, Issue 1 76 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Physical and Electrical properties of a Tropical Cyclone as derived from Satellite Imageries and Cyclone Detection Doppler Weather Radar: A Case Study

Hazer R. D. Warjri, Hasina Paslein, Mebashongdor Kharkongor, Dipankar Dam, Zahidul Islam and A. B. Bhattacharya Department of Remote Sensing and GIS, JIS University, Agarpara, Kolkata 700109 [email protected]

Abstract: Tropical cyclones and the accompanied lightning are one of the most destructive and recurrent natural hazards in the tropics with widespread impacts. In recent years some sophisticated high resolution global circulation models have been developed for predicting the development and movement of the system as an interactive process within certain limit. In the present investigation we have used the satellite INSAT-3D enhanced imageries and the cyclone detection Doppler Weather Radar (DWR) for studying the physical and electrical properties of tropical cyclone. We have emphasized the track and the behavioural changes of the tropical storm MORA that damaged largely with packing winds of up to 117 kilometres per hour and moved towards India's Northeast. We have demonstrated some prominent INSAT-3D imageries in association with CS MORA. The associated convection revealed curved band pattern with well-marked wrapping into the centre from eastern sector. Broken low to medium clouds associated with intense to very intense convection covered over BoB between latitude 11.0º- 19.0ºN and longitude 84.0º- 91.0ºE. During analysis we have examined typical Kalpana-1 imageries of cloud top temperature obtained by using VHR sensor with 8000 m. DWR imageries of some typical selected Max (Z) as recorded by IMD, Kolkata centre using cyclone detection radar when examined provide some interesting properties. The study reveals that the said tropical cyclone is a combination of consequences of hazardous natural or social phenomenon and environmental condition at the place of occurrence. The outcome of the study supports strongly the finances to the government and public as well affecting both fishing and tourism seriously. The study gave an understanding of key environmental issues with localization, tracking, threat identification and characterization of cyclone and associated lightning and precipitation which can serve largely to the society and environmental management in course of severe cyclones at local and regional levels.

Keywords: Tropical Cyclones, Lightning, Natural Hazards, Tropics, Global Circulation Models, INSAT-3D, Doppler Weather Radar

Volume 1, Issue 1 77 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

1 Introduction Investigations on tropical cyclones in the north Indian Ocean has made through various phases in the last 150 years and progress was made with the advancement of technology. Up to the middle of the 20th century, the only way of knowing about the formation and intensification of this disastrous phenomenon was through ship observations and so the climatology of the cyclones, their surface structure, movement, and the rules to avoid the damage to shipping at sea were considered in a majority of the observations in India till 1960s. Introduction of new technologies through weather Doppler Radars, upper air soundings, weather satellites and computers have brought a remarkable change in tropical cyclone research in different countries during the 1950s to 1980s. During these three decades time, besides data analysis some breakthrough in theoretical studies and the development of computer models to simulate the complete genesis cycle of tropical cyclones are considered important. Predicting the track of tropical cyclone was also attempted during this time. During the last 20 years‘ time some sophisticated high resolution global circulation models have been developed in many parts of the world for predicting the development and movement of the system as an interactive process. In India also some attempts for the developments of the interactive processes can be seen within certain limit. Inter-decadal variation of tropical cyclones in the north Indian Ocean has been investigated and the frequency of their formations has shown drastic decrease since 1980s. No connection has been reported between the warm/cold ENSO events in the Indian Ocean basin and tropical cyclone frequency in the basin. Observational and theoretical approaches with computer simulations have brought a convergence of views related to the nature of large-scale conditions essential for development and movement of severe tropical cyclones. Some suggested further study for directing special attention toward the north Indian Ocean basin. The cyclone Mora was the name suggested by Thailand, came from a Thai word, meaning "star of the sea". In this paper we have examined characteristic changes of tropical cyclone Mora experienced during the pre-monsoon month May 2017, and identified some interesting features using a combination of observations from satellite imagery and data of cyclone detection Doppler Weather Radar. The analysis has been carried out by dividing the life cycle of the TC into various stages of intensification and weakening.

2 Some Important Findings

An analysis of historical TC data during the satellite period (1981–2006) showed that the intensity of the strongest TCs had increased substantially over the northern Indian Ocean [1-3]. In the analysis, however, TCs in the Bay of Bengal and the Arabian Sea were grouped together. A subsequent observation reported that Bay of Bengal TCs in the post monsoon season increased in intensity over the past 30 years and noted large‐scale changes in ocean‐atmosphere conditions that were responsible [4, 5]. It was found that TCs in the pre-monsoon month of May exhibits an enhanced intensity and attributed changes in TC activity to anthropogenic aerosols and greenhouse gas forcing. But the role of natural climate variability in the reported changes in TC Volume 1, Issue 1 78 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) activity was not systematically considered in the study [6-8]. Moreover a good number of early studies of inter annual variability of Bay of Bengal TCs emphasized on the post monsoon season. It is because most of the climate phenomena that impact global climate at inter annual timescales, e.g., the El Niño–Southern Oscillation (ENSO) and Indian Ocean Dipole, tend to manifest more strongly during boreal late fall and winter. A significantly large‐scale ocean‐ atmosphere state was noted to be more favourable for TC development in the post monsoon Bay of Bengal during La Niña and during the negative phase of the Indian Ocean Dipole [9, 10]. But the environmental impact on pre-monsoon TCs at inter annual timescales is not clearer. It was proposed that ENSO may not have a significant influence on pre-monsoon Bay of Bengal TC activity [11-14]. Though the impact of ENSO is higher during boreal late fall and winter months, its influence over the large‐scale ocean‐atmosphere system in the northern Indian Ocean may persist until May–June. It was established that ENSO revealed an important role in the withdrawal phase of the Indian summer monsoon in addition to its onset phase. This large‐scale climate variability outside the Bay of Bengal may affect pre-monsoon atmospheric conditions and TC activity in the Bay of Bengal [15-18].

An investigation of Bay of Bengal tropical cyclone (TC) track data for the months of May–June during 1979–2014 reveals a meridional dipole in TC intensification [19-22]. It was reported that the TC intensification rates were increased largely in the northern region and decreased in the southern region. The dipole is consistent with the variations in the large‐scale TC environment as estimated using the Genesis Potential Index (GPI) for the same period [23-26]. While an increase in lower troposphere cyclonic vortices and mid troposphere humidity in the northern Bay of Bengal made the environment more favourable for TC intensification, increased vertical wind shear in the southern Bay of Bengal reduce the TC development. These environmental variations are assumed to be associated with a strengthening of the monsoon circulation driven by a La Niña‐like shift and associated tropical wave dynamics [27-30].

Emanuel [10] collected data for a long period to calculate the TC power dissipation index (PDI) and the intensification tendencies. The PDI for a season and for a given TC strength category (e.g., tropical storm, tropical cyclone, major tropical cyclone) is estimated as the sum of the cubes of the maximum wind speed at each 6‐hourly TC location during the months of October– November, wherever the maximum wind speed of the storm is within the range defined for that category [31-33]. The intensification tendency for a storm at a location was estimated as the linear regression coefficient of the maximum wind speed over the current and five subsequent 6‐ hourly snapshots [23].

It was reported that during 1981–1995, eight storms obtained TC strength or higher out of a total of 27 storms. On the other hand, 10 out of 24 storms attained TC strength or higher between 1996 and 2010, causing a higher conversion rate of about 42%. An interesting characteristic of

Volume 1, Issue 1 79 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) the BoB TC formation is the zonally asymmetric nature. It was found that all seven MTCs that occurred in the BoB formed east of the 90°E longitude. This geographical dependence of TCs can be attributed to the longer time spent over the warm ocean for storms that form to the east of 90°E [2]. It was further noted that the frequency of storms during the two 15 year periods, 1981– 1995 and 1996–2010, was statistically identical. Further investigations showed that the total storm days was nearly the same for the two periods. Also, the mean duration spent by each MTC in MTC‐phase during the 15 year period 1996–2010, despite an increase, was statistically indifferent from that during the 15 year period 1981–1995. Besides storm frequency and longevity, the other factor that can play a vital role in its power dissipation is the maximum intensity attained. It was observed that the mean maximum intensity sustained by storms during MTC phase has been increasing with time. On average, the maximum wind speed of storms during MTC phase for the period 1981–1995 was about 54 m s−1, which corresponded to category 3. On the other hand, the mean maximum wind speed for storms during MTC phase for the period 1996–2010 was about 62 m s−1, which corresponded to category 4. Based on this evidence, the intensity of post monsoon BoB storms has indeed been noted to be increasing.

Rayner et al. [25] and separately Reynolds et al. [26] used early data to evaluate changes and trends in SST. Monthly mean oceanic temperature data were considered by Chang et al. [4] while European Centre for Medium‐Range Weather Forecasts' (ECMWF's) ocean reanalysis system 4 was examined by Balmaseda et al.[8]. They used the data with a view to estimate changes and trends in the depth of the 23°C isotherm. The upper ocean heat content (OHC) was calculated as the temperature averaged vertically from the surface to a depth of 100 m [24]. This method was used to represent the upper ocean energy available for extraction by a TC better than the traditional tropical cyclone heat potential [24]. Monthly mean sea surface height anomaly data for the period 1981–2010 was analysed by Behringer and Xue [1] to compute changes in dynamic sea surface topography. National Centres for Environmental Prediction (NCEP)‐ Department of Energy (DOE) reanalyzed [12] monthly mean air temperature, relative humidity, and geo-potential height data to calculate changes and trends in moist static energy (MSE) and changes in equivalent potential temperature [34]. The MSE is averaged between the 700 and 925 hPa pressure levels. Corresponding ERA‐INTERIM data [34, 5] for the same period are also obtained from ECMWF to evaluate changes and trends in MSE.

3 Techniques and Instruments Employed

Two major equipment provided data for the present investigation. The first one is the satellite INSAT-3D enhanced imageries and the second one is the real time data as derived from the cyclone detection Doppler radar.

Volume 1, Issue 1 80 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

4 Storm Path of the Cyclone MORA

Under favourable atmospheric conditions, convective area developed over the Bay of Bengal (BoB). It causes advancement of a circulation and low pressure area (LPA) over southeast and adjoining central BoB on May 27, 2017 [35- 37]. It is then concentrated into a depression over the central Bay of Bengal at 0000 UTC on May 28, 2017 and rapidly reinforced into a deep depression on the same day. During the early hours of May 29, the storm attained the intensity of the cyclonic storm and named as MORA which followed a NNE track parallel to Burma coast, reaching its maximum strength as a severe cyclonic storm with the wind speed of 110 km/h and lowest mid pressure of 978 hPa during 0300 UTC on May 30. We have shown the Mora tracker in Figure 1, showing the storm path when entered into Bangladesh, touching Dhaka and Chittagong. The tropical cyclone MORA made landfall in Bangladesh in the morning of May 30, 2017 accompanied by heavy rains and winds estimated at 117 km/h (73mph).

Figure 1 MORA Tracker showing the storm path when entered into Bangladesh (Courtesy: IMD)

Volume 1, Issue 1 81 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

After the land interaction, the cyclone weakened gradually to be lost into a distinct LPA over Nagaland and its surroundings at 0000 UTC on May 31, 2017 [38]. The low-lying areas of the coastal districts and their offshore islands and chars of Bangladesh and Myanmar are inundated by the storm surge of the cyclone. The well-marked LPA cantered at 0000 UTC on May 28 over SE and adjoining areas of central Bay of Bengal, which then concentrated into a depression and moved along NE and lay cantered at 1200 UTC on May 28, over EC BoB near (15.7ºN, 90.7ºE). Continuing its movement the system slowly weakened into a DD and lay cantered at 1200 UTC on May 30 over Tripura and surrounding areas (24.2ºN, 92.2ºE) and into a well- marked LPA over Nagaland and neighbourhood at 0000 UTC on May 31. According to the report of India Meteorological Department, on May 30, 2017 between local time 7:30 AM and 9:30 AM the cyclone MORA made landfall along the SE coastal area of Bangladesh in the vicinity of Kutubdia Island between Cox's Bazar and Chittagong [39]. The track and the behavioural changes of the tropical storm MORA as of 30 May 2017, 12:30 PM is presented in Figure 2.

Figure 2 Tropical Storm MORA as of 30 May 2017 at 12:30 PM (Courtesy: Myanmartime Myanmar Information Management Unit) Volume 1, Issue 1 82 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

5. Satellite and Radar Data

As pointed out before, the cyclone Mora made landfall in the morning of May 30, 2017 as a Category 1 cyclone between Chittagong and Cox's Bazar. The powerful cyclone damaged largely with packing winds of up to 117 kilometres per hour and moved towards India's Northeast. Satellite image of the cyclone Mora is shown in Figure 3.

Figure 3 Satellite image of Cyclone Mora (Credit: IMD)

Volume 1, Issue 1 83 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

As a result of this severe cyclone, heavy rainfall occurred to lash the states of Mizoram, Tripura, Arunachal Pradesh, Meghalaya, Assam and Nagaland on May 30 and 31. Some prominent INSAT-3D imageries in association with CS MORA have shown in Figure 4. The convection experienced during May 28, 2017 exhibits curved band pattern with well-marked wrapping into the centre from eastern sector. Broken low to medium clouds accompanied by intense to very intense convection covered over BoB between latitude 11.0º- 19.0ºN and longitude 84.0º- 91.0ºE.

Figure 4 INSAT-3D enhanced coloured imageries associated with CS MORA during May 29 and May 31, 2017 [source: IMD]

Volume 1, Issue 1 84 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

In Figure 5, we have shown Typical Kalpana-1 imageries of cloud top temperature obtained by using VHR sensor with 8000 m resolution at 0445 UTC on May 30, 2017 in association with CS MORA.

Figure 5 Kalpana–1 satellite imageries of cloud top temperature using VHR sensor with 8000 m resolution at 0445 UTC on May 30, 2017 in association with CS MORA [source :IMD]

Volume 1, Issue 1 85 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Doppler Weather Radar (DWR) imageries of some typical selected Max (Z) as recorded by IMD, Kolkata centre using cyclone detection radar during May 29 and May 31, 2017 associated with cyclone Mora are presented in Figure 6.

Figure 6(a), (b) & (c): Doppler Weather Radar (DWR) imageries of some typical selected Max (Z) as recorded by IMD, Kolkata center using cyclone detection radar during May 29 and May 31, 2017[source : IMD, Kolkata]

Volume 1, Issue 1 86 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

6 Discussions

Tropical cyclones and associated lightning are the most destructive and recurrent natural hazards in the tropics and subtropics areas of the globe with widespread impacts. A significant number of the deadliest cyclones, like the cyclone Mora reported here, have occurred in the Bay of Bengal affecting widely the state of West Bengal and Bangladesh [40]. A combination of factors like a flat coastal terrain and high population density of surrounding nations causes cyclones in the Bay of Bengal to have devastating consequences upon landfall. The annual cycle of tropical cyclones (TCs) in the northern Indian Ocean exhibits a clear bimodal structure. The season starts from April when the sea surface temperatures increase and continues to intensify through May. By the second week of June, the monsoon sets in and the accompanied strong vertical wind shear and unfavourable atmospheric vortices largely limit the formation of TCs during the monsoon from June to September. In October, the TC activity increases further, getting a second peak during the month of November. While more TCs form during the post monsoon months, the most intense storms are found to form during the pre-monsoon period. Large ocean heat content and strong variability of northward propagating intra seasonal oscillations during April–May are mainly responsible for the formation of intense TCs during pre-monsoon months. The said research problem is associated with disaster study which is a combination of consequences of hazardous natural or social phenomenon and environmental condition at the place of occurrence. As a consequence of a devastating tropical cyclone both fishing and tourism are seriously affected. The outcome of the study thus supports strongly the finances to the government and public as well. This interdisciplinary program may promote an understanding of key environmental issues with localization, tracking, threat identification and characterization of cyclone and associated lightning and precipitation which can serve largely to the society and environmental management in course of severe cyclones in West Bengal. Similar study will impart knowledge on environmental issues at local and regional levels [33, 38].

Percentage frequency distribution, radial profile as well as quadrant-wise mean rain rates is required to determine stage-wise for each TC. Further, variations in the rainfall asymmetry is needed to examine from higher to lower rain rate side when the TC passes from intensification to weakening stages using Fourier analysis by computing the first order wave number-1 asymmetry around the TC centre. Tropical cyclonic rainfall distribution to be elaborately considered by environmental factors such as wind shear, sea surface temperature (SST), moisture distribution etc. as well as TC specific factors like intensity, location and translational speed.

Volume 1, Issue 1 87 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Acknowledgements

We are grateful to the Indian Space Research Organization (ISRO) for sharing their pearls of wisdom with us during the course of preparing the paper. We are also immensely grateful to India Meteorological Department for sharing their data and comments on an earlier version of the manuscript.

References

1. Behringer, D., and Y. Xue (2004), Evaluation of the global ocean data assimilation system at NCEP: The pacific ocean, in Proc. Eighth Symp. on Integrated Observing and Assimilation Systems for Atmosphere, Oceans, and Land Surface, AMS 84th Annual Meeting, Washington State Convention and Trade Center, Seattle, Wash. 2. Girishkumar, M., Ravichandran, M. And Han, W. (2013), Observed intraseasonal thermocline variability in the Bay of Bengal. J. Geophys. Res. Oceans, 118, 3336–3349, doi:10.1002/jgrc.20245. 3. Bhat, G., Srinivasan, J. and Gadgil, S. (1996), Tropical deep convection, convective available potential energy and sea surface temperature. J. Meteorol. Soc. Jpn., 74(2), 155–166. 4. Chang, Y.‐S, Zhang, S., Rosati, A., Delworth, T. L. and Stern, W. F. (2013), An assessment of oceanic variability for 1960–2010 from the GFDL ensemble coupled data assimilation. Clim. Dyn., 40(3– 4), 775–803. 5. Dee, D., et al. (2011), The ERA‐INTERIM reanalysis: Configuration and performance of the data assimilation system, Q. J. R. Meteorol. Soc., 137(656), 553–597. 6. Alam, M., Hossain, A. and Shafee, S. (2003), Frequency of Bay of Bengal cyclonic storms and depressions crossing different coastal zones. Int. J. Climatol., 23, 1119–1125. 7. Balaguru, K., Chang, P., Saravanan, R.., Leung, L. R., Xu, Z., Li, M. and Hsieh, J.‐S. (2012), Ocean barrier layers effect on tropical cyclone intensification. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 109(36), 14,343–14,347. 8. Balmaseda, M. A., Mogensen, K. and Weaver, A. T. (2012), Evaluation of the ECMWF ocean reanalysis system ORAS4. Q. J. R. Meteorol. Soc., 139, 1132–1161. 9. Elsner, J. B., Kossin, J. P. and Jagger, T. H. (2008), The increasing intensity of the strongest tropical cyclones. Nature, 455(7209), 92–95. 10. Emanuel, K. (2005), Increasing destructiveness of tropical cyclones over the past 30 years. Nature, 436(7051), 686–688. 11. Girishkumar, M. S., and Ravichandran, M. (2012), The influences of ENSO on tropical cyclone activity in the Bay of Bengal during October–December, J. Geophys. Res., 117, C02033, doi:10.1029/2011JC007417.

Volume 1, Issue 1 88 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

12. Kanamitsu, M., Ebisuzaki, W., Woollen, J., Yang, S.‐K., Hnilo, J., Fiorino, M. and Potter, G. (2002), NCEP‐DOE AMIP‐II Reanalysis (R–2), Bull. Am. Meteorol. Soc., 83(11), 1631–1643. 13. Kikuchi, K., and Wang, B. (2010), Formation of tropical cyclones in the northern indian ocean associated with two types of tropical intraseasonal oscillation modes. J. Meteorol. Soc. Jpn., 88(3), 475–496. 14. Klotzbach, P. J. (2006), Trends in global tropical cyclone activity over the past twenty years (1986–2005). Geophys. Res. Lett., 33, L10805, doi: 10. 1029/2006GL025881. 15. Hoarau, K., Bernard, J. and Chalonge, L. (2012), Intense tropical cyclone activities in the northern Indian ocean, Int. J. Climatol., 32(13), 1935–1945. 16. Islam, T. and Peterson, R. E. (2009), Climatology of land falling tropical cyclones in Bangladesh 1877–2003. Nat. Hazard., 48(1), 115–135. 17. Knutson, T. R., and Tuleya, R. E. (2004), Impact of CO2‐induced warming on simulated hurricane intensity and precipitation: Sensitivity to the choice of climate model and convective parameterization. J. Clim., 17(18), 3477–3495. 18. Knutson, T. R., Delworth, T., Dixon, K., Held, I., Lu, J., Ramaswamy, V., Schwarzkopf, M., Stenchikov, G. and Stouffer, R. (2006), Assessment of twentieth‐century regional surface temperature trends using the GFDL CM2 coupled models. J. Clim., 19(9), 1624– 1651. 19. Luo, J.‐J, Sasaki, W. and Masumoto, Y. (2012), Indian ocean warming modulates pacific climate change. Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 109(46), 18,701–18,706. 20. McPhaden, M. J., Foltz, G. R., Lee, T., Murty, V., Ravichandran, M., Vecchi, G. A., Vialard, J., Wiggert, J. D. and Yu, L. (2009), Ocean‐atmosphere interactions during cyclone Nargis. Eos, Trans. AGU, 90(7), 53–54, doi:10.1029/2009EO070001. 21. Ng, E. K., and Chan, J. C. (2012), Interannual variations of tropical cyclone activity over the north Indian Ocean. Int. J. Climatol., 32(6), 819–830. 22. Lin, I.‐I., Chen, C.‐H., Pun, I.‐F., Liu, W. T. and Wu, C.‐C. (2009), Warm ocean anomaly, air sea fluxes, and the rapid intensification of Tropical Cyclone Nargis, 2008. Geophys. Res. Lett., 36, L03817, doi:10.1029/2008GL035815. 23. Lloyd, I. D., and Vecchi, G. A. (2011), Observational evidence for oceanic controls on hurricane intensity. J. Clim., 24(4), 1138–1153. 24. Price, J. F. (2009), Metrics of hurricane‐ocean interaction: Vertically‐integrated or vertically‐averaged ocean temperature?. Ocean Sci. Discuss., 6(2), 909–951. 25. Rayner, N., D. Parker, Horton, E., Folland, C., Alexander, L., Rowell, D., Kent, E. and Kaplan, A. (2003), Global analyses of sea surface temperature, sea ice, and night marine air temperature since the late nineteenth century. J. Geophys. Res., 108(D14), 4407, doi: 10.1029/2002JD002670.

Volume 1, Issue 1 89 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

26. Reynolds, R. W., Rayner, N. A., Smith, T. M., Stokes, D. C. and Wang, W. (2002), An improved in situ and satellite SST analysis for climate. J. Clim., 15(13), 1609–1625. 27. Singh, O. P. (2008), Indian Ocean dipole mode and tropical cyclone frequency. Curr. Sci., 94(1), 29–31. 28. Sprintall, J., and Tomczak, M. (1992), Evidence of the barrier layer in the surface layer of the tropics. J. Geophys. Res., 97(C5), 7305–7316. 29. Sreenivas, P., Gnanaseelan, C. and Prasad, K. (2012), Influence of El Niño and Indian Ocean dipole on sea level variability in the Bay of Bengal. Global Planet. Change, 80, 215–225. 30. Webster, P. J. (2008), Myanmar's deadly daffodil. Nat. Geosci., 1(8), 488–490. 31. Yu, L. (2003), Variability of the depth of the 20 c isotherm along 6 n in the bay of bengal: Its response to remote and local forcing and its relation to satellite SSH variability. Deep Sea Res. Part II, 50(12), 2285–2304. 32. Webster, P. J., Holland, G. J., Curry, J. A. and Chang, H.‐R. (2005), Changes in tropical cyclone number, duration, and intensity in a warming environment. Science, 309(5742), 1844–1846. 33. Sengupta, D., Goddalehundi, B. R. and Anitha, D. (2008), Cyclone‐induced mixing does not cool SST in the post‐monsoon north Bay of Bengal. Atmos. Sci. Lett., 9(1), 1–6. 34. Singh, O., Khan, T. M. A. and Rahman, M. S. (2001), Has the frequency of intense tropical cyclones increased in the north Indian Ocean?. Curr. Sci., 80(4), 575–580. 35. Roy Chowdhury, Biswas, M., Das, S., Bhattacharya, A. B., Lichtman, Jeffery M., A study on the spectral pattern of sferics as derived from ELF/VLF radio signal at Techno India University Campus, Kolkata during cyclone ‗Roanu‘. IEEE Xplorer, 2017. DOI: 10.1109/ICCECE.2016.8009562. 36. Joint Typhoon Warning Centre (May 26, 2017). (2017). 37. Joint Typhoon Warning Center (May 27, 2017). (2017). 38. RSMC bulletin (IMD) – MORA (2017)http://www.rsmcnewdelhi.imd.gov.in 39. J Erdman. (2017) https://weather.com/storms/hurricane/news/deadliest-cyclone-history- bangladesh-20130605#/2 40. PTI. (2017) http://www.dnaindia.com/world/report-cyclone-mora-hits-bangladesh- hundreds-of-thousands-evacuated-2455330

Volume 1, Issue 1 90 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Effect of Pre-Monsoon Lightning Activity on Surface Nox & O3 over GWB

Arpita Das, Sujay Pal, Subrata Kumar Midya Department of Atmospheric Sciences, Calcutta University, 51/2 Hazra Road, Kolkata-700019 [email protected]

Abstract: Lightning is an important source of tropospheric reactive nitrogen oxide species

(NOx) which affect regional air chemistry and directly influence the abundance of tropospheric ozone. The major oxidant O3 and NO2 produced at the upper troposphere due to lightning activity influence the surface concentration of NO2 and O3. Excess surface concentration of O3 can damage forests, crops and can irritate human lungs. For last few years, West Bengal is getting highly affected due to lightning activities. In the present work we have tried to find quantitatively the effects of lightning activity on surface NO2 and O3 at different places of GWB during the pre-monsoon Nor‘wester days (April to early June) for the first-time using ground based lightning network data considering CG, IC and total lightning events. Lightning flash rates for IC, CG and total lightning are analyzed at different radial distances (5 km, 10 km, 15 km, and 25 km) around the stations to check the correlations of surface NO2 and O3 with IC, CG and total lightning counts.

Keywords: Lightning flashes; Nor‘wester; Surface ozone; Thunderstorm activity

1 Introduction

The nitrogen oxides NO and NO2 (collectively known as NOx) are important trace gases in tropospheric chemistry as it facilitates chemical reactions in the troposphere and stratosphere.

NOx determines the concentrations of ozone (O3) [5] in the atmosphere which further impacts the oxidising capacity of the atmosphere. NOx has severe impact on oxidation of hydroxyl (OH) which in turn contributes to acid rain [16]. Natural nitrogen is continuously cycled by many different processes (Xu et al., 2012). NOx, has a very short lifetime of several hours near the ground, mainly originates from anthropogenic combustion of fossil fuel, biomass burning and biogenic soil emissions. These sources primarily influence the lower troposphere. The residence time of NOx get increased in the upper tropospheric region [17]. Lightning is an important source of NOx, particularly for the upper troposphere [20]. At least, 50% of the initial NOx in the upper troposphere is induced by lightning, and only 20% of NOx originates from upward transport from the ground and NOx with lower density reduces ozone production rates [23]. Other sources for upper tropospheric NOx include minor sources like emissions from mid and long-range aircraft [22] and the stratospheric injection of NOx formed by photolysis of nitrous oxide and nitric acid (HNO3) [14]. Lightning NOx affects the generation of tropospheric O3. The production of O3 caused by this NOx is six times greater than that of anthropogenic NOx emissions [24].

Volume 1, Issue 1 91 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

In tropical and subtropical regions, more than 70% of NOx is due to lightning [18]. Lightning- produced NOx is primarily made up of NO and NO2, with NO being the major portion (75- 95%) of the total [11]. The NO thus formed in the lightning channel reacts quickly with 03 to form NO2 and during the daytime a photochemical equilibrium between NO and NO2 is established. Estimates of the global lightning-produced NOx ranges from 1 Tg N/yr [15] to 100 Tg N/yr [10] [Tg = 1012 g]. Considerable progress has been made in the study of lightning induced NOx which includes satellite observations of global lightning [4], satellite observations of NO2 column distributions [2], airborne in-situ measurements of NOx abundance near thunderstorms at mid-latitudes [21] and over tropical continents, cloud- resolving model studies [9], and improved global models [8]. The spatial and temporal distributions of vertical column densities of tropospheric nitrogen dioxide (NO2 VCDs) and lightning activity were extensively analyzed using satellite measurements by Guo et al [12] with the results showing the spatial distribution of lightning activity with NO2 VCDs is greater in the east than in the west of China.

Effect of lightning activity over surface NOx and O3 have been studied by Pawar et al [19] over Pune region during the pre-monsoon and monsoon seasons. The results suggest that surface concentration of NOx increases significantly at the dissipation stage of thunderstorm and increase in NOx greater than titration threshold level reduces the surface ozone concentration. It is also observed that enhancement in NOx at the surface after thunderstorm activity is much greater in pre-monsoon periods compared to the monsoon period. DeCaria et al. [7] used a 3-D cloud scale chemical transport model to simulate the chemical characteristics of a storm in order to estimate convective transport of a variety of chemical species, lightning NOx production, and the impact on tropospheric ozone. It was reported that lightning NOx production resulted in an average ozone enhancement of 10 ppbv/day at 10.5 km MSL which is more than the upper tropospheric enhancement of 7 ppbv as estimated earlier [6]. However, NOx and ozone due to lightning activity for the West Bengal region has not been studied extensively. Middey et al., 2012 reported that increased surface pollution results in increased lightning flash rate, which results in increased surface NOX and thereby increasing surface ozone concentration over the station Kolkata using a Tropical Rainfall Measuring Mission‘s (TRMM) satellite-based instrument Lightning Imaging Sensor (LIS) data. Total lightning activity increases significantly during the pre-monsoon (March, April,May and early June), summer thunderstorms season, locally known as ―Nor‘wester", over the Gangetic

West Bengal (GWB). In this study the data of surface NOx on thunderstorm events have been analyzed along with lightning flash rate during the pre-monsoon season for the first-time using ground based lightning network data considering CG, IC and total lightning events.

This paper illustrate the importance of lightning NOx for tropospheric chemistry and its impact on ground ozone which can be a potential threat to human life. This study shows the variation of surface NO2, O3 on thunderstorm days and their relations with the in-cloud (IC), cloud-to-ground (CG) and total lightning for the pre-monsoon period of 2018 over a tropical metropolitan, Kolkata.

Volume 1, Issue 1 92 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

2 Data Observation Site Location and surface pollutant data: The data over the station Victoria, Kolkata (22°34′N, 88°21′E) is collected Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) which includes the concentration of nitrogen dioxide (NO2), and ozone (O3) for the pre-monsoon moths (March, April, May and early June) for the year 2018. The concentration of these pollutants is measured in µg/m3.

Lightning data: The lightning data in this paper is obtained from Earth Networks total lightning detector cum weather station which has been operating in Kolkata since June 2016. This detector is a part of Earth Networks Total Lightning Network (ENTLN) operated globally for ground-based monitoring of Total lightning activity. Optical Transient Detection/Lightning Imaging Sensor (OTD/LIS) gridded dataset from the Global Hydrology Resource Centre are the two detectors which observe total lightning flashes but do not distinguish cloud from ground discharges.(Cecil et al., 2014). This instrument is capable of monitoring various weather parameters as well as for locating a place using the electric field data.

The integrated lightning sensor of the instrument measures the electromagnetic signals from very low frequency (VLF) to high frequency (HF) of each lightning discharge operating in a frequency range from 1 Hz to 12 MHz (Bui et al, 2015).The ENTLN can detect weaker pulses at longer distances by extending the frequency range of detection from VLF into the MF and HF spectrums (Heckman and Liu, 2010). Time of arrival technique is being used to locate a lightning event. In the ENTLN, new lightning classification algorithm has been added to classify a flash as a CG flash if it contains at least a return stroke, otherwise it is classified as an IC flash. ENTLN can also detect the polarity (positive or negative) for both types of flashes.

3 Methodologies

Hourly average concentration of NO2 & O3 over Victoria on non-thunderstorm days is considered to calculate the monthly mean diurnal variation. This monthly mean diurnal variation along with hourly standard deviations is set as background level. Deviation in the diurnal variations of NO2 and O3 for the thunderstorm dates over this background level is considered for analysis. On the other hand, lightning data (IC, CG) collected from the Earth Networks Total Lightning Network (ENTLN) is the Lightning flash rate i.e., Lightning counts per minute (IC and CG) identify the thunderstorms onset, mature and dissipating phases. Lightning data are collected within a square box of 10 km, 20 km, 30 km, 40 km, 50 km around Victoria to check the correlation with NO2.

4 Results and Discussion Figure 1 represents lightning flash counts per minutes on 17th April 2018 & diurnal variation of NO2 and O3 on the day. NO2 concentration has shown a significant increase at the

Volume 1, Issue 1 93 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) dissipating stage (20:30hr) of the thunderstorm. Very little change in O3 concentration has been noticed at the dissipation stage.

Figure 1 Norwester‘ of 17th April 2018

Figure 2 represents lightning flash counts per minutes on 16th May 2018 & diurnal variation of NO2 and O3 on the day. In this figure NO2 concentration has shown a significant increase at the dissipation stage (11:00hr) of the thunderstorm. In this case also, changes in O3 concentration are low compared to NO2 changes. Normal diurnal variation of O3 is disturbed due to lightning produced NO2.

Volume 1, Issue 1 94 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 2 Norwester‘ of 16th May 2018

The Fig 3 represents lightning flash counts per minutes on 31st May 2018 & diurnal variation of NO2 and O3 on the day. In this figure NO2 concentration has shown a significant increase (>3sigma) at the dissipation stage (15:30hr) of the thunderstorm while changes in O3 concentration are more or less low, almost within 1 sigma level.

Figure 3 Norwester‘ of 31st May 2018

Volume 1, Issue 1 95 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Surface concentration of NO2 is found to be increased significantly at the dissipation stage of thunderstorms by an amount of 80-100 µg/m3, which is much higher than earlier study over GWB (Middey et al. 2012). Also, in contrary to previous research over Kolkata no significant increase of surface O3 concentration at the dissipation stage of thunderstorm has been found. Lightning flash rates for IC, CG and Total lightning at different radial distances (5 km, 10 km, 15 km, 20km, 25 km) around the stations are analyzed to check correlations of surface NO2 and O3 with IC, CG and total lightning counts in Fig 4a-c.

Figure 4a Correlation graph between CG flash count and NO2 at a radial distance of 10km from the sensor

Volume 1, Issue 1 96 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 4b Correlation graph between IC flash count and NO2 at a radial distance of 10km from the sensor

Figure 4c Correlation graph between Total flash count and NO2 at a radial distance of 10km from the sensor

Volume 1, Issue 1 97 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Greater correlation between lightning flash count and NO2 enhancement for CG discharges(R=0.62). Maximum correlation is found for CG lightning within radial distance of 10 km of the pollutant sensor, whereas the correlation with IC and Total lightning are less.

5 Conclusions In the severe thunderstorm days lightning frequency is higher and therefore more number of electric discharges produces a large amount of NO2. This NO2 do not immediately contribute to photochemical ozone production and can lead to ozone decrease by both direct titration and night time chemistry that further reduces ozone. Very little to no change in ozone concentration is observed during the dissipation stage of thunderstorms. This decrease in concentration may be due to reduced solar radiation because of the presence of thunderclouds. A greater correlation is observed with maximum NO2 and CG flash count at a radial distance of 10km. This finding is in line with the fact that, in general, the core of a thunderstorm cell has a dimension of approximately 10 km. Therefore, lightning from outside the radial distance of 10 km zone of the pollutant sensor have less effects on the measurements of surface NO2 and O3.

Acknowledgements The authors would like to thank Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) for providing us the continuous NOx and Ozone data and Earth Networks Total Lighting Network (ENTLN) for providing lightning data over Kolkata for our analysis. This study has been supported by the grant from University Grants Commission-UGC UPE II (non focus) project, under Reference Number: DPO/223/UPEII/Non Focus.

References

1. Bui Vy, Chang Lin-Ching, Heckman Stan. 2015, A Performance Study of Earth Networks Total Lighting Network (ENTLN) and Worldwide Lightning Location Network (WWLLN) International Conference on Computational Science and Computational Intelligence 2. Burrows, J. P., Weber, M., Buchwitz, M., 1999, The Global Ozone Monitoring Experiment (GOME): mission concept and first scientific results, J. Atmos. Sci., 56, 151– 175. 3. Cecil, D.J., Buechler, D.E. and Blakeslee, R.J., 2014, Gridded lightning climatology from TRMM-LIS and OTD: Dataset description. Atmospheric Research, 135, 404-414. 4. Christian, H. J., Blakeslee, R. J., Boccippio, D. J., 2003, Global frequency and distribution of lightning as observed from space by the Optical Transient Detector, J. Geophys. Res., 108, 4005. 5. Crutzen, P. J. 1970, The influence of nitrogen oxides on atmospheric ozone content. Quart. J. Roy. Meteor. Soc., 96, 320–325. 6. DeCaria, A. J., Pickering, K. E., Stenchikov, G. L., Scala, J. R., Stith, J. L., Dye, J. E., Ridley, B. A., and Laroche, P.2000, A cloud-scale model study of lightning-generated

Volume 1, Issue 1 98 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

NOx in an individual thunderstorm during STERAO-A, J. Geophys. Res., 105, 11601– 11616. 7. DeCaria, A. J., Pickering, K. E., Stenchikov, G. L., and Ott, L. E.2005, Lightning- generated NOx and its impact on tropospheric ozone production: A three-dimensional modeling study of a Stratosphere-Troposphere Experiment: Radiation, Aerosols and Ozone (STERAO-A) thunderstorm, J. Geophys. Res., 110, 1–13. 8. Dentener, F. J.: Global Maps of Atmospheric Nitrogen Deposition, 1860, 1993, and 2050. Data set, (http://daac.ornl.gov/), Oak Ridge National Laboratory Distributed Active Archive Center, Oak Ridge, Tennessee, USA, 2006. 9. Fehr, T., H¨oller, H., and Huntrieser, H.2004, Model study on production and transport of lightning-produced NOx in a EULINOX supercell storm, J. Geophys. Res., 109, 1–17. 10. Franzblau, E. and Popp, C. J,1989, Nitrogen oxides produced from lightning, J. Geophys. Res., 94, 11089–11104. 11. Franzblau, E.1991, Electrical discharges involving formation of NO, NO2, HNO3, and O3, J. Geophys. Res., 96, 22337–22345. 12. Guo, F., Ju, X., Bao, M., Lu, G., Liu, Z., Li, Y. and Mu, Y., 2017. Relationship between lightning activity and tropospheric nitrogen dioxide and the estimation of lightning- produced nitrogen oxides over China. Advances in Atmospheric Sciences, 34(2), 235-245. 13. Heckman, S., and Liu, C.2010, The application of total lightning detection and cell tracking for severe weather prediction, in Proc. of GROUND‘2010 & 4th LPE, Salvador, Brazil, 234–240. 14. Huntrieser, H., H. Schlager, C. Feigl, and H. H¨oller, 1998, Transport and production of NOx in electrified thunderstorms: Survey of previous studies and new observations at midlatitudes. J. Geophys. Res., 103(D21), 28247–28264. 15. Levine, J. S.1981, Simultaneous measurements of NOx, NO, and O3 production in a laboratory discharge: atmospheric implications, Geophys. Res. Lett., 8, 357–360. 16. Levy II, H. 1971, Normal atmosphere: Large radical and formaldehyde concentrations predicted, Science, 173, 141–143. 17. Levy II, H., Moxim, W. J., and Kasibhatla, P. S.1996, A global three dimensional time- dependent lightning source of tropospheric NOx, J. Geophys. Res., 101, 22911–22922. 18. Martin, R. V., and Coauthors, 2002, Interpretation of TOMS observations of tropical tropospheric ozone with a global model and in situ observations. J. Geophys. Res., 107(D18), ACH 4-1–ACH 4-27. 19. Pawar, V., S. D. Pawar, G. Beig, and S. K. Sahu ,2012, Effect of lightning activity on surface NOx and O3 over a tropical station during premonsoon and monsoon seasons, J. Geophys. Res., 117, D05310. 20. Pickering, K., Wang, Y., Tao, W.-K., Price, C., and Müller, J.F., 1998, Vertical distributions of lightning NOx for use in regional and global chemical transport models, J. Geophys. Res. 103, 31203–31216. 21. Ridley, B., Ott, L., Pickering, K., 2004, Florida thunderstorms: A faucet of reactive nitrogen to the upper troposphere, J. Geophys. Res., 109, 1–19.

Volume 1, Issue 1 99 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

22. Schumann, U., 2000, Pollution from aircraft emissions in the North Atlantic flight corridor: Overview on the POLINAT projects. J. Geophys. Res., 105, 3605–3631. 23. Seinfeld, J. H., and S. N. Pandis, 2016, Atmospheric Chemistry and Physics: From Air Pollution to Climate. 3rd ed., Wiley,1152. 24. Wu, S. L., L. J. Mickley, D. J. Jacob, J. A. Logan, R. M. Yantosca, and D. Rind, 2007, Why are there large differences between models in global budgets of tropospheric ozone. J. Geophys. Res., 112, D05302. 25. Xu, Y. F., Huang Y., and Li Y. C. 2012, Summary of recent climate change studies on the carbon and nitrogen cycles in the terrestrial ecosystem and ocean in China. Adv. Atmos. Sci., 29(5), 1027–1047.

Volume 1, Issue 1 100 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Air Pollution Status: A case study in West Bengal

Debanjali Roy1, Subhangi Chakraborty1, Koustav Bhowmik1, Sourav Mandal1, Priyadarshini Ghosh2, Amitlal Bhattacharya3, Soumini Chaudhury1 and Rina Bhattacharya1

1Department of Physics, JIS University, Agarpara, West Bengal, 700109 2Department of Physics, S.R.F. College, Beldanga, West Bengal, 742133 3Department of Physics, D.N. College, Aurangabad, West Bengal, 742201 Email: [email protected]

Abstract: Air pollution is one of the major concerns to the living world. We are living dangerously in the poor air vicinity which is creating severe health hazards and at the extreme may cause even deaths. Pollutants viz. NO2, SO2, PM2.5 and PM10 are responsible for respiratory, heart and cardiovascular diseases. In this paper, we have analyzed the air quality of Kolkata city as a case study and compared its status in comparison with the most polluted New Delhi city and an industrial belt of Haldia in West Bengal. Air Quality of Kolkata is found marginally well than New Delhi. However Kolkata is more polluted than Haldia with respect to NO2 and PM2.5 pollutants. Therefore further study is highly needed to improve our air quality and at the same time to raise public awareness as well.

Key Words: Air pollution; PM10,; PM2.5; Health hazard; Air quality index

1 Introduction

In our globe, approximately 7 million people die every year due to air pollution related diseases viz. respiratory illness, heart diseases, cancer and cardiovascular problems [1, 2, 3]. 3 India has the highest PM2.5 concentration of 89.9 µg/m (as on 2017) causing 6.7 lakhs deaths annually [4]. The air pollutants which cause health hazards are mainly due to NO2, SO2, CO, PM2.5, PM10, NH3, O3 and Pb [5]. Sources including industry, transport, agriculture, waste management, households etc. are held responsible for adding these pollutants into the atmosphere. Natural phenomenon like volcanic eruptions and dust storms at micro scale disturbances also contribute to air pollution. Among the air pollutants, particulate matter less than 2.5 micron-m (PM2.5) poses the greatest health risk. These particles can get deep into lungs causing lung cancer and some may even get into the blood stream. Carbon particles from fuel combustion and atmospheric ozone are also the major components responsible for rapid climate change. Air pollution has an impact on atmospheric stability as well. The 3 annual mean concentration of PM2.5 in µg/m of different parts of the world viz Africa, America, Eastern Mediterranean, Europe, South East Asia and Western Pacific as per WHO‘s data are 66, 54, 117, 90, 153 and 80 respectively.

The air pollution induced deaths in those regions are 06.79, 02.27, 04.08, 05.82, 22.75 and 28.85 lakhs respectively [6, 7]. The percentage value of leading diseases which are causing human deaths in World and India are shown in Figure 1. Globally majority of the casualties are due to heart diseases but in India it is due to cerebrovascular stroke [6, 7]. In south East

Volume 1, Issue 1 101 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

3 Asia, India has the highest PM2.5 concentration of 153 µg/m and has led to 6.7 lakhs deaths in year 2017 compared to 6.2 lakhs in 2005. It was reported that long-term effects of air pollution cause the onset of different types of diseases viz respiratory inflammations, cardiovascular dysfunctions and even cancer and therefore linked with millions of death globally [8,9,10].

Figure 1 Comparison of death rate (%) in India (dotted line) and World (Solid line)

Kolkata is an important city in West Bengal where high commercial growth has been occurred since last decade. It is situated at latitude 22.5625°N and longitude 88.3531°E and an elevation of 230 m above msl (mean sea level) and expands over an area of an area of 205 square kilometers and sub-divided into 16 boroughs by the Municipal Corporation. Kolkata is also second most air polluted city in India after New Delhi having particulate levels doubles that of Beijing [11]. So, improvement of our air quality will not only influence our health but also save our life.

In this study an attempt has been made to analyze the status of air pollution and associated health risk of the city Kolkata in comparison with Delhi and industrial belt of Haldia.

2 Materials and Methods

The pollution level can be assessed by Air Quality Index, AQI [12]. It is an index for reporting air quality of a location. It tells you how clean or polluted the air is, and what associated health effects it might pose. The National Air Quality Index (AQI) was launched on September 17, 2014 in New Delhi under the Swachh Bharat Abhiyan to protect public

Volume 1, Issue 1 102 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) health. Table 1 gives the six different levels of AQI, level of health concerns and corresponding impacts [13].

The following equation is used to compute AQI from the pollutant concentration [14]

I = (C - ) + …………………………(1)

where I = the (Air Quality) index, C = the pollutant concentration, and = the concentration breakpoint that is ≤ C and ≥ C respectively, and = the index breakpoint corresponding to and respectively.

Table 1 Levels of AQI and associated health concerns

AQI Level Status of health Health Impact 0-50 I Good Air quality is satisfactory. 51-100 II Satisfactory Air quality is acceptable; Though, a very small number of people may face moderate health concern for some pollutants. For example, people who are extremely sensitive to ozone may experience respiratory symptoms. 101-200 III Moderate At this AQI range, although general public is not affected, but people suffering from lung disease, older adults and children are at a greater risk due to particulate matter present in the atmosphere. 201-300 IV Unhealthy Everybody may begin to experience some significant health effects, and sensitive people may experience more serious effects 301-400 V Very unhealthy Everybody may experience more serious adverse health issues. 401-500 VI Hazardous This would imply health warnings of emergency conditions for any healthy person..

3 Results and Discussions We have compared the pollution level of Kolkata and New Delhi considering AQI data for four consecutive years (2016-2019) during monsoon months i.e. June, July and August (JJA) and winter months i.e. December, January and February (DJF) seasons. The status of polluted air has been analyzed by using AQI data in relation to PM2.5 [www.aqicn.org].

Volume 1, Issue 1 103 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 2 Variation of AQI in monsoon for (a) Kolkata and (b) New Delhi

Figure 3 Variation of AQI in winter for (a) Kolkata and (b) New Delhi

The variation of the average AQI in the two cities Kolkata and New Delhi during monsoon and winter are depicted in Figure 2 and Figure 3 respectively. The range of AQI for Kolkata and New Delhi are respectively from 7 to 312 and 8 to 562 during JJA months whereas it varies from 47 to 565 and 60 to 562 during DJF months as obtained from Table 2 and 3.

Volume 1, Issue 1 104 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Table 2 AQI in monsoon for Kolkata and New Delhi

Months KOLKATA NEW DELHI Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum June’16 173 52 185 51 July’16 158 61 189 44 August’16 174 39 207 38 June’17 164 42 232 25 July’17 156 40 166 12 August’17 166 45 166 25 June’18 162 37 562 52 July’18 165 35 173 37 August’18 312 15 172 8 June’19 153 16 241 52 July’19 156 7 189 49 August’19 152 10 167 13

Table 3 Data of AQI in winter for Kolkata and New Delhi

KOLKATA NEW DELHI Maximum Minimum Maximum Minimum Jan’16 516 164 554 157 Feb’16 409 68 474 73 Dec’16 419 161 510 151 Jan’17 597 151 519 60 Feb’17 322 61 335 62 Dec’17 458 64 520 122 Jan’18 565 160 463 150 Feb’18 374 152 361 78 Dec’18 471 55 517 103 Jan’19 495 141 504 62 Feb’19 414 47 328 60

Volume 1, Issue 1 105 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 4 Hourly variation of AQI in (a) Kolkata and (b) Delhi

It is evident from the figure that the highest average AQI for Kolkata was during January 2018 (277.03) and the same for New Delhi was during January 2016 (330.76). It was observed that 8.79% and 17.74% days of Kolkata belong to level IV and V whereas for Delhi the levels of exposure are 24.73% and 20.55% days during December and January respectively. 4.66% days of January at Kolkata are in danger and warning should be issued regarding public health. This falls in the ―very unhealthy‖ category of air quality and can trigger serious health effects even to a healthy individual. During monsoon the level of pollution varies between category I and II for both the cities. However in winter the air quality is always poor. It is interesting to note that there are a positive trend (+0.306) and a negative trend (-26.75) are observed in Kolkata and Delhi respectively. For both the cities the pollution level is lower in the monsoon than the winter season. The average air quality index of Kolkata (243.99) is slightly less than Delhi (265.57) for winter. The variation of AQI on high pollution day in Kolkata and Delhi for both winter and monsoon seasons during study period is shown in Figure 4.

We have also compared the levels of four pollutants like SO2, NO2, PM10 and PM2.5 of Kolkata with an industrial town Haldia of West Bengal from 2013 to 2017 [11]. The year wise minimum, maximum and average concentration of the pollutants of these two cities is given in Table 4. It is seen from the table that highest value of PM10 is 376 in Haldia in

Volume 1, Issue 1 106 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

2017, whereas, PM 2.5 is maximum (197) in Kolkata in 2016. Also it is found that SO2 value is comparatively high in Haldia but NO2 is high in Kolkata.

Table 4 Pollutants concentrations in Kolkata and Haldia

Year Pollutant Kolkata Haldia Min. Max. Annual Av. Min. Max. Annual Av. 2017 SO2 02 10 04 09 22 14

NO2 21 75 35 32 57 40 PM10 37 293 108 59 376 88 PM2.5 29 169 72 24 62 35 2016 SO2 02 26 04 11 28 18

NO2 22 77 43 34 56 42 PM10 24 317 119 60 208 102 PM2.5 18 197 66 20 107 42 2015 SO2 02 15 03 02 15 03

NO2 19 89 42 11 32 17 PM10 30 273 102 46 151 87 PM2.5 16 181 50 * * * 2014 SO2 02 16 05 06 58 11

NO2 12 87 44 19 52 38 PM10 30 268 120 66 286 136 PM2.5 * * * * * * 2013 SO2 06 15 09 07 16 10

NO2 48 78 62 29 49 39

PM10 95 294 178 72 225 146 PM2.5 11 121 46 * * *  Data not available

4 Conclusion

The pollutants are changing the climate by reducing visibility, increasing acidity in water bodies, discomfortness to our livelihood, instability in atmosphere and even damaging the forest and soil quality to a considerable level [15]. However, it is not yet possible to estimate all the pollutants in the atmosphere. Road transport is the major cause of pollution as seen in the case of Kolkata where PM2.5 level is recorded higher in compared to industrial area likes Haldia. So people of our earth should be more conscious and should be well aware of the air pollution reasons.

A negative trend of AQI in case of the city Delhi whereas in Kolkata a slight increasing trend is observed. A more detailed study and awareness will make our air quality good for the benefit of human existence. Moreover, our study will provide status of air pollution exposure and its potential impact on human beings in the most populated and productive region of West Bengal.

Volume 1, Issue 1 107 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Acknowledgements

The authors pay sincere thanks to the JIS University for providing all facilities to carry out this work. The authors are thankful to WHO, National Pollution Control Board and American embassy in India for the relevant data.

References

1. WHO. 2014, Public health, Environmental and Social Determinants of Health (PHE), Issue 63 (March): 1-2 2. WHO. 2013, Health Effects of Particulate Matter: Policy implications for countries in Eastern Europe, Caucasus and Central Asia. Copenhagen: World Health Organisation Regional Office for Europe: 6 3. Kan, H., Chen, B., Zhao, N., London, S.J., Song, G., Chen, G., et al. 2010, A time-series study of ambient air pollution and daily mortality in Shanghai, China. Res Rep Health Eff Inst. 154, 17–78. 4. Balakrishnan, K., et al, 2019, The impact of air pollution on deaths, disease burden, and life expectancy across the states of India: the Global Burden of Disease Study 2017, 2018, Lancet Planet Health, 3(1):29-31 5. CPCB. 2014, National Ambient Air Quality Status & Trends. Central Pollution Control Board. Ministry of Environment & Forests. Government of India : New Delhi: 2 6. Lim, S.S., Vos, T., Flaxman, A.D., Danaei, G., Shibuya, K., Adair-Rohani, H., et al. 2010, A comparative risk assessment of burden of disease and injury attributable to 67 risk factors and risk factor clusters in 21 regions, 1990-2010: A systematic analysis for the Global Burden of Disease Study 2010. Lancet 2012, 380(9859): 2224-60 7. TERI. 2015. Air Pollution and Health. Discussion Paper by The Energy and Resources Institute: New Delhi. 8. Greenstone, M., Nilekani, J., Pande, R., Ryan, N., Sudarshan, A. and Sugathan A. 2015, Lower Pollution, Longer lives: Life Expectancy Gains if India Reduced Particulate Matter Pollution. Economic and Political weekly, L(8):40-46 9. Biggeri, A., Bellini, P., Terracini, B. 2004, Meta-analysis of the Italian studies on short- term effects of air pollution – MISA 1996-2002. Epidemiol Prev. 28, 4–100. 10. Rumana, H.S., Sharma, R.C., Beniwal, V., Sharma, A.K. 2014, A retrospective approach to assess human health risks associated with growing air pollution in urbanized area of Thar Desert, Western Rajasthan, India. J Environ Health Sci Eng. 12:23. 11. National Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Programme (http://www.cpcbenvis.nic.in/air_quality_data.html)

12. Air Quality Index (AQI) 2012, Air Quality Communication Workshop San Salvador, El Salvador April 16-17, 2012

Volume 1, Issue 1 108 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

13. CPCB. 2014, National Ambient Air Quality Status & Trends. Central Pollution Control Board. Ministry of Environment & Forests. Government of India : New Delhi, 6 14. EPA (Environmental protection Agency), Measuring Air quality: The pollutants standards index.EPA451/K.94-001, (1994). 15. Zhang, W., Qian, C.N., Zeng, Y.X., 2014, Air pollution: A smoking gun for cancer. Chin J Cancer, 33:173–175.

Volume 1, Issue 1 109 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Exploration of dietary Habits of IVF Children – A Comparative Evaluation

Sudipta Kar, T. K. Pal Department of Oral and Dental Sciences, JIS University, Kolkata [email protected] S. L. Seal Department of Gynaecology and Obstetrics, R. G. Kar Medical College, Hospital, Kolkata

Gautam Kumar Kundu Department of Paedodontics & Preventive Dentistry, Guru Nanak Institute of Dental Sciences & Research, Kolkata

Abstract: According to WHO, approximately among 250 million couples attempting for parenthood 13 to 19 million couples are likely to be infertile in India at any given point of time. Nearly 8% of infertile couples need use of advanced ART (Assisted Reproductive Technologies) procedures such as IVF (In-virto Fertilization). But this kind of advanced treatment is too costly and the success rate of any ART procedure is below 30% even under the best of suitable conditions. In UK, on July 25, 1978 Dr. Robert G Edwards and Dr. Patrick Steptoe had successfully documented world‘s first IVF child, Louise Brown. In the same year nearly three months later world‘s second IVF child, Durga was born through the untiring efforts of Dr. Subhas Mukherjee and his two colleagues in Kolkata, India. IVF procedure may induce some risk factors like multiple births, premature delivery and low birth weight, birth defects etc. Moreover recurrent IVF procedures may cause financial, physical and emotional stress. Keywords: Infertile Couples, Reproductive Technologies, In-Virto Fertilization, Multiple Births, Premature Delivery

1 Introduction The birth of first ever IVF human baby in the world occurred in Oldham, England on July 25, 1978. This birth was the result of the extensive collaborative work of two innovative personality - Dr. Patrick Steptoe and Dr. Robert Edwards [1]. In the same year, on 3rd October the birth of world‘s 2nd test tube baby ‗Durga‘ was born as a result of untiring effort advocated by Dr. Saroj Bhattacharya and Dr. Subhas Mukherjee [2] in Kolkata, West Bengal.

IVF may produce potential short- and long-term adverse consequences like perinatal morbidity, prematurity, multiple births, low birth weight and congenital malformations. Regarding long-term consequences, IVF may precipitate cerebral palsy, malignancies like retinoblastoma or hepatoblastoma, or acute leukemia subtypes.

Adverse dietary habit, particularly the intake of free sugars, is considered as a common risk factor for the occurrence of non-communicable diseases [3]. Consumption of free sugars, especially in the form of sugar -sweetened beverages—increases overall energy intake and may reduce the consumption of foods containing more nutritionally adequate calories,

Volume 1, Issue 1 110 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) leading to an weight gain and increased risk of various diseases and conditions due to unhealthy diet. Cardiovascular disease, diabetes, obesity and dental caries [3-4] are considered as modern day diseases due to this kind of dietary habit. The World Health Organization considers the promotion of healthy food practices to be one of the most important challenges required to ensure the health of children throughout the world.

2 Materials and Methods The present study was a cross-sectional study, approved by the Ethical Committee of JIS University, Kolkata. A random sample of 2 – 5 years old IVF children and spontaneously conceived children were included in the study. Frequency of sugar consumption and dietary habits based on quality of food of both group of children were evaluated thoroughly. The children in both case (IVF) and control (spontaneously conceived) groups based on the route of pregnancy were enrolled for the study. Specific inclusion criteria of sample selection for the present study were ‑ (a) baby must be of 37–42 weeks gestational age, (b) singleton babies were preferred, (c) only first children were selected for the present study, (d) family should have medium and high socioeconomic condition. Exclusion criteria were – (a) congenitally malformed children, (b) parent having a history of multiple pregnancy, (c) children having severe asphyxia, (d) children having genetic syndromes and chromosomal abnormalities, were excluded from the present study. Confounding variables of this study were social upbringing of the children, different food habits, different behavioral pattern of individual and variation in parental care. The case group consisted of term (gestational age of the babies were 37–42 weeks), singleton babies whom were end result of IVF of the studied area and were chosen by a computer generated random number list. The control group constitutes of term, first child, singleton, and spontaneously conceived 24-71 months old children whom were referred to the Department of Pedodontics and Preventive Dentistry for the purpose of initial dental health check‑up. Case and control studied individual were matched for the, maternal weight, maternal age, socioeconomic status area of residence gestational age and year of birth. The study was conducted after informed consent was procured from the concerned authorities and respective guardians of children. A total of 321 parents of studied samples were approached to participate in our present study. Out of the above total sample, the parents of 107 IVF and 169 spontaneously agreed to participate in this study. To exclude inter‑observer error all examination and documentation were made by a trained single examiner who was not informed about the birth status of our studied samples. ter Informed consents were collected from the parents, Chi‑square test or Z‑tests were used for statistical analysis.

3 Results During comparison of frequency of sugar consumption with meal in between two groups i.e. IVF children group and Spontaneously Conceived children group we found the value of z is

Volume 1, Issue 1 111 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

3.0405. The value of p is .00236. The result is significant at p <.05. During comparison of in between meal sugar consumption sections the value of z is -1.4063. The value of p is .15854. The result is not significant at p <.05. When children consume sugar in both meal time and in between meal the value of z is -2.5251. The value of p is .0114. The result is significant at p <.05. (Table 1 and 2)

Table 1 Frequency of sugar consumption in IVF Children Sugar consumption IVF Children Male Female Total No. % No. % No. % With meal 53 49.53 31 28.97 84 78.50 In between meal 9 8.41 6 5.60 15 14.01 Both 2 1.86 6 5.60 8 7.47 Never 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total 64 59.81 43 40.18 107 100

Table 2 Frequency of sugar consumption in Spontaneously Conceived Children Sugar consumption Spontaneously Conceived Children Male Female Total No. % No. % No. % With meal 69 40.82 34 20.11 103 60.94 In between meal 23 13.60 12 7.10 35 20.71 Both 15 8.87 16 9.46 31 18.34 Never 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total 107 63.31 62 36.68 169 100

Table 3 Dietary habits based on quality of food in IVF Children Dietary Habits IVF Children Male Female Total No. % No. % No. % Intake of more hard fibrous 42 39.25 33 30.84 75 70.09 food Intake of more soft refined 22 20.56 10 9.34 32 29.90 food Total 64 59.81 43 40.18 107 100

Volume 1, Issue 1 112 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Table 4 Dietary habits based on quality of food in Spontaneously Conceived Children Dietary Habits Spontaneously Conceived Children Male Female Total No. % No. % No. % Intake of more hard fibrous 56 33.13 35 20.71 91 53.84 food Intake of more soft refined 51 30.17 27 15.97 78 46.15 food Total 107 63.31 62 36.68 169 100

During comparison of dietary habits of children of IVF and Spontaneously Conceived Children, considering intake of more hard fibrous food section, the value of z is 2.6861. The value of p is .00714. The result is significant at p <.05. During comparing of intake of soft refined food category the value of z is -2.6861. The value of p is .00714. The result is significant at p <.05. (Table 3 and 4)

4 Discussions WHO recommends the promotion of healthy food practices to be one of the most important challenges required to ensure the worldwide improvement of health of the children. The consumption of sugar in the form of sucrose enables cariogenic microorganisms to use sugar as a primary energy source for their survival and encourages biochemical events through extracellular and intracellular mechanisms[5] Snacking between meals may occur in solid form, like cookies and sweets, or in the form of liquid such as juice , milk, tea, or soft drinks etc. Cross-sectional and longitudinal studies report that the high intake frequency of carbohydrates, especially sucrose, is considered an important factor for the development of caries in children.[6–8] Sugar exposure in infancy is positively associated with the initial acquisition of Streptococcus mutant, one of the causative organisms for dental caries.[9] As no previous studies was found in the field of sugar consumption and dietary habits of IVF children ,no comparison was possible with that of previous study, so more studies are required in this untouched arena .

5 Conclusions This study is the first of its kind in India to find out sugar consumption and dietary habits of IVF children and compare the data with spontaneously conceived children. IVF children are considered better than spontaneously conceived children when studied in relation sugar consumption and dietary habits. This study invites further scope for more study with larger sample size.

Volume 1, Issue 1 113 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

References

1. Steptoe PC, Edwards RG. Birth after the reimplantation of a human embryo. Lancet 1978; 2:366. 2. Chakraborty BN. Test Tube Baby Procedures Miracles, Mysteries and Miseries. 1st ed. Kolkata: The Standard Literature Company Pvt. Ltd.; 2005. p. 1‑3.

3. WHO. Guideline: sugars intake for adults and children. Geneva: World Health Organization;2015. 4. Carmo CDS, Ribeiro MRC, Teixeira JXP, Alves CMC, Franco MM, França AKTC, Benatti BB, Cunha-Cruz J, Ribeiro CCC. Added sugar consumption and chronic oral disease burden among adolescents in Brazil. J Dent Res. 2018;97(5):508–14. 5. Loesche WJ. Role of Streptococcus mutans in human dental decay. Microbiol Rev. 1986;50(4):353–80. 6. Grindefjord M, Dahllöf G, Nilsson B, Modéer T. Stepwise prediction of dental caries in children nup to 3.5 years of age. Caries Res. 1996; 30(4):256–66. 7. Milgrom P, Riedy CA, Weinstein P, Tanner AC, Manibusan L, Bruss J. Dental caries and its relationship to bacterial infection, hypoplasia, diet, and oral hygiene in 6- to 36-month- old children. Community Dent Oral Epidemiol. 2000; 28(4):295–306. 8. Tsai AI, Chen CY, Li LA, Hsiang CL, Hsu KH. Risk indicators for early childhood caries in Taiwan. Community Dent Oral Epidemiol. 2006; 34(6):437–45. 9. Wan AK, Seow WK, Purdie DM, Bird PS, Walsh LJ, Tudehope DI. A longitudinal study of Streptococcus mutans colonization in infants after tooth eruption. J Dent Res. 2003;82(7):504–8.

Volume 1, Issue 1 114 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Frequency and Amplitude Spectra Analysis of the Sound of Indian Folk Musical Instruments Sudipta Pal , Rinku Sarkar and Sushmita Saha Department of Physics, University of Kalyani, Kalyani-741235, West Bengal Email: [email protected] Abstract: The frequency and amplitude spectrum of the sound of traditional Indian folk musical instruments like Khamak and Ektara has been analyzed by using very common instruments like smartphone (for recording the sound) and AUDACITY software(for analyzing the sound frequency). By using Fourier transformation of recorded sound of the folk instrument the frequency distribution have been analyzed. The fundamental frequency and overtones for Ektara has been estimated. It is interesting to note that quite similar type of frequency and amplitude pattern has been observed for both of the instruments. But the fundamental frequencies and harmonics are very prominent and last longer in case of Ektara. The sound spectra of the musical instruments of different size have also been studied. The detail information about frequency, amplitude of different boles of these folk instruments may be helpful in digital signal processing. This work has been done under MSc project.

Keywords: Khamak, Ektara, Indian Folk Musical Instruments, Fourier analysis of Sound Wave

1 Introduction A musical sound is that where all the vibrations of surrounding body are strongly periodic. Wave form of the musical sound is smooth .The root of music in ancient India are found in the Vedic literature of Hinduism. The earliest Indian thought combined three arts, syllabic recital (vadya), melos (gita) and dance (nrtta). As these fields developed, ―sangeeta‖ became a distinct genre of art, in a form equivalent to contemporary music. Music can be a social activity, but it can also be a very spiritual experience. Ancient Indians were deeply impressed by the spiritual power of music, and it is out of this that Indian classical music was born. So, for those who take it seriously, classical music involves single-minded devotion and lifelong commitment. Audio transcription and digitization of musical data is a very interesting and

Figure 1 Khamak and Ektara

Volume 1, Issue 1 115 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

challenging research topic. Scientific studies on Indian musical instruments were first done by Sir C.V Raman [1].

The relaxing effects of these instrumental music on people‘s psychology can be observed through an acoustical approach. Watkin G R proposed Music therapy in physiological mechanisms and clinical implications [2]. Also there is influence of music upon electrocardiograms and blood pressure [3]. Cardiovascular, cerebro vascular and respiratory changes can be induced by different type of music [4]. There are positive and negative effects of specific sound frequencies on health. The pitch of a spectrally rich sound is known to be more easily perceived than that of a sinusoidal tone [5]. Many techniques have been implemented for this in the context of Western music. However, Indian classical music differs from its western counterparts in the type of instruments being played and their harmonic nature. Fourier analysis is a very effective way to analysis the sound wave nature of Indian classical musical instruments [6].

The musical instruments KHAMAK and EKTARA are used in India to create mainly folk music of Bengal, specially ‗baulgaan‘ (see Figure 1). Khamak is a type of stringed percussion instrument. The instrument consists of two single- headed drums, one very small and one large. Between the two heads two nylon strings have been stretched. The large drum is held in pace under the left arm and the small drum is held in the left hand. As tension is maintained by hand, tension doesn‘t remain constant for Khamak when it is played. Ektara is a one-string instrument most often used in traditional music from Bangladesh, Egypt, India, and Pakistan Ektara is more tuned stringed instrument than Khamak. It consists of one metal string. Its tension can be controlled with a controller at the top. Tension can be maintained constant when it is played. The various sizes of ektara are soprano, tenor, and bass. The ektara is a common instrument in Baul music from Bengal. These musical instruments have tremendous effects on human mind. Sound analysis in these instruments can give an idea about the relaxing effect on human brain. So our main object in the present work is to do a basic study about the folk instruments like Khamak and Ektara and to analyse the frequency distribution of various boles and notes.

2 Experimental Procedures Recording of sound was done by a mobile phone Moto G5S Plus in a silent place, using stock recording app. Next the recorded sound was converted to ―WAV‖ format. After this, using ―Audacity‖ software the recorded sound was transformed to ‗frequency vs amplitude graph‘ and ‗time vs frequency graph‘ [7]. In Figure 2 a screen shot from the AUDACITY software window of frequency vs Amplitude plot has been shown for a tuning fork, which is a U-shaped metallic two-pronged fork produces single frequency (known) due to vibration. The frequency of the tuning fork is 341 Hz (written on the tuning fork). From the fig it is clear that there is a distinct peak around 370Hz which is considered to be fundamental tone. There are also peaks in higher frequencies which may be considered as harmonics since tuning fork is not always produce single frequency sound. In the time vs frequency graph (Figure 3) the higher frequency sounds or harmonics die very soon. So by using the Audacity

Volume 1, Issue 1 116 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Figure 2 Frequency vs Time spectrogram plot in Audacity software. Here one can see 370 Hz frequency sound is clearly dominating and is represented by white bar in the plot

software, we get the frequency of that tuning fork 370 Hz. Thus, the given and measured frequency of the tuning fork is nearly same. So it has been concluded that this software is good enough for study the frequency analysis of musical sound. Two different sizes of Khamak and Ektara were taken as sample instruments. A very good player freely played the instruments and the sound was recorded for several times. The string length was noted for each tone by using a normal meter scale (small division 0.1cm). The length of the string and the dimension of the instruments using meter scale were also measured.

Figure 3 Amplitude vs Frequency Fourier transformed plot in Audacity software. The 370 Hz frequency is the most intense sound and is represented by a large peak in the plot.

Volume 1, Issue 1 117 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

3 Results and Discussions

a) Medium size Khamak :

In Figure 4, the waveforms of the bole ―Dha gi ti ta na ki dhin‖, obtained by Audacity software, is shown in Amplitude vs time plot. We have also identified different segments of the sound in the plot by listening the part. The bole ―Dha gi ti ta na ki dhin‖ as usually named marely played for 1.8 sec.

Figure 4 Waveforms of the bole ―Dha gi ti ta na ki dhin‖, given by Audacity software, is shown. We have also identified different notes of the bole.

Next all the individual notes of the total bole have been analysed.

Figure 5 Frequency vs Time waveform plot for ―Dha‖ selected from the total spectrum

Volume 1, Issue 1 118 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

For example one note (say ―Dha‖) of each bole has been taken for frequency and amplitude analysis. Here the region of ―Dha‖ from ―Dha gi ti ta na ki dhin‖ has been zoomed in more expanded region of time (Figure 5). Selecting this region the spectrum has been replotted in frequency domain through fast Fourier transformation by the AUDACITY software shown in Figure 6 [8]. One can see from the figure that it is very difficult to identify fundamental and harmonics from the spectrum. A rough estimate of the total number of frequencies and their relative intensity can be done. Since the musical sounds are produced due to two simultaneously vibrating strings, it is very difficult to identify the fundamental and harmonics [9,10].

Figure 6 Intensity vs Frequency Fourier transformed sound spectrum plot for ―Dha‖

In Table 1 the frequency and amplitude data for different Note has been presented identified from intensity vs amplitude plot.

Volume 1, Issue 1 119 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Table 1 Frequency and amplitude data for different Note

Sl. No. Note Name frequencies in Hz Amplitudes in dB 1 Dha 254 -29.2 441 -11.5 877 -26.6 1313 -30.1

2 Gi 270 -30.3 424 -15.8 808 -44.6 1101 -49.5

3 Ti 278 -28.1 410 -16.9 815 -34.7 889 -33.8 1022 -41.6

4 Ta 262 -25.4 442 -14 655 -33.2 886 -34.5

5 Na 269 -36.1 422 -21.7 610 -47.9 844 -45.7 1065 -48.4

6 Ki 292 -20.6 409 -16.7 780 -29.1 1004 -47.1

7 Dhin 247 -25.8 329 -23.7 423 -19.8 763 -36.7

Volume 1, Issue 1 120 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

The data in table 1 has been plotted in Figure 7. From the figure it is observed that for all the notes the first two frequencies fall almost same region. However in the higher frequency region the data are random. This may be due to noise and other technical difficulties in analysing the sound. Although the Khamak looks very simple, it‘s working mechanism is not

-5 Dha -10 Gi -15 Ti Ta -20 Na Ki -25 Dhin -30 Dha Gi -35 Ti Ta

Intensity indB Intensity -40 Na -45 Ki Dhin -50

-55

1000 Figure 7 Frequency vs AmplitudeFrequency graph in Hz for (in logall the scale) frequencies present of the boles 10 ―Dha gi ti ta na ki dhin‖ in medium size Khamak so simple as it looks. Many difficulties arise while analyzing its sounds.The Tension of wire is controlled by hands. So, while playing, its tension varies abruptly, resulting in slight change of frequency. Also the base surface and upper surface where the wires are connected are made of membrane so tension on the wires varies. Finally there are two parallel wires. There is a fractional time difference between the plucking of two wires. When 1st wire is struck, the tension varies. So, the frequencies of the sounds emitted from the 2nd wire may change slightly compared to 1st note.

Big size Khamak

The same procedure has been followed for analyzing the sound spectrum of big size Khamak. A little difference has been observed in the frequency vs amplitude data (Figure 8). The frequency values shifts towards higher region.

Volume 1, Issue 1 121 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Dha -10 Gi Na -15 Gi Ti -20 Ta Na -25 Ki Dhi -30 Na

-35 AmplitudeindB

-40

-45

-50 1000 Log (frequency in Hz) 10 Figure 8 Frequency vs. Amplitude graph for all the frequencies present of the boles―Dha gi ti ta na ki dhin‖ in medium size Khamak

Figure 9 Waveform of the notes of ektara

b) Ektara: In Figure 9 all the notes in wave form of ektara has been shown in the time vs amplitude plot. The frequencies have been estimated from the Fourier transformed plot similar to earlier procedure. It is observed that the frequencies present in all the notes are same and their

Volume 1, Issue 1 122 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR) amplitude also show similar pattern (Figure 10). The first peak may be considered as the fundamental (around 700Hz) and other peaks with decreasing magnitude are overtones[10].

. Tone 1 Tone 2 -15 Tone 3 -20 Tone 4 Tone 5 -25 Tone 6 Tone 7 -30 Tone 8 -35 Tone 9 Tone 10 -40 Tone 11 Tone 12 -45

Tone 13 Intensity indB Intensity -50

-55

-60

-65 1000 Frequency in Hz (in Log scale) 10 Figure 10 Frequency vs Amplitude plot for all the frequencies for different notes (indicated as 1-15 in Figure 8)

4 Conclusions Using very common instruments like smartphone (for recording the sound) and AUDACITY software (for analyzing the sound frequency) the frequency and amplitude spectrum of the sound of traditional Indian folk musical instruments like Khamak and Ektara has been analyzed. Fourier transformations of recorded sound of the folk instrument give an idea about the frequency distribution in the sound. It is difficult to determine the fundamental frequency and overtones of Khamak from the plots however in case of Ektara those have been estimated. It is interesting to note that quite similar type of frequency and amplitude pattern has been observed for both of the instruments. The wire of Ektara is made up of metal whereas the wires of Khamak are made up of nylon wire. That is why there is a big difference in the sound the produced which can be differentiated easily by listening to them. The sound produced by Ektara is richer in higher harmonics due to the characteristics of metal wire. The sound spectrum of the musical instruments of different size shows that in case bigger Khamak the frequency spectra shifts towards higher region.

Volume 1, Issue 1 123 December, 2019

JISU Journal of Multidisciplinary Research (JISUJMR)

Acknowledgement: The authors acknowledge DST-PURSE (phase II) for partial support.

References

1. Scientific Papers of C.V. Raman: Volume II: Acoustics by C. V. Raman , Oxford University Press (July 6, 1989) 2. Watkins, 1997 Clin Nurse Spec; 11: 43-50 3. Hyde IH, Scalapino W, 1918, Am J Physiol, 46: 35-38 4. Larsen PD, Galletly DC, 2006, Heart Journal, 92: 445-452 5. Tervaniemi M, Schröger E 2000, Neuroscience Letters, 290(1): 66-70 6. ―Vibrations, Waves and acoustics‖(English Edition)-D. Chattopadhyay and P.C. Rakshit. 7. ―The Physics of Musical Instruments‖ (second edition)-Neville H. Fletcher and Thomas D. Rossing Springer, ISBN-13:978-0-387-94151-6 8. Mandal A.K.,. Wahi P, 2015, Journal of Sound and Vibration, 338:, 224. 42–59 9. C. Valette. Mechanics of Musical Instruments, pages 115–183. Springer, Wien, New York, 1995 10. Damodaran A, 2015, Applied Acoustics, 88: 1-5,

Volume 1, Issue 1 124 December, 2019

Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research 2019

12-13 November-2019

Editors Prof (Dr.) A. B. Bhattacharya Dr. Mainak Biswas Dr. Dipankar Ghosh

2019 Ideal International E – PublicationPvt. Ltd. www.isca.co.in

iii

427, Palhar Nagar, RAPTC, VIP-Road, Indore-452005 (MP) INDIA Phone: +91-731-2616100, Mobile: +91-80570-83382 E-mail: [email protected], Website:www.isca.co.in

Title: Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research 2019 Editors: Prof (Dr.) A. B. Bhattacharya, Dr. Mainak Biswas, Dr. Dipankar Ghosh Edition: First Volume: I

© Copyright Reserved 2019 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored, in a retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, reordering or otherwise, without the prior permission of the publisher.

ISBN: 978-81-941310-1-4

Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 iv

Contents Serial Title of the Paper Authors Page No. Number On the Trajectory Design and X-S-Band Abhijit Banerjee,R. 1. Radio Signal Communication of Mars Bhattacharya& A. B. 1 Missions Bhattacharya Electron Density Profile at High-Altitude J. Pandit 2. Ionosphere at the Onset of Tropical Monsoon 13

Hardware Efficient Analog Encryption Sourish Haldar, Methodology for Digital Data Transmission Samayita Sarkar, 3. Ranjana Ray, 20 Sreyansh Bhupal

Environmental Impact Assessment and Social Souvik Chatterji Impact Assessment in case of Displacement 4. 27 relating to SEZs and Infrastructure Projects

Single Axis Solar Tracking System using Suparna Pal 5. Arduino Uno 35

The Analysis of the Modern Power System Suparna Pal, Amitava with Distributed Network Biswas,Shubham Kumar, Supriyo 44 6. Sarkar, Pankaj Mandal and Mrinmoy Sarkar

Analysis of Economics of power by load Suparna Pal, duration curve for KV distribution line of Amitava Biswas, JIS College of Engineering: A Case Study Basudeb Dey, Avilash Paul, 7. Abhilekh Kumar 49 Sah, Mrinmoy Sarkar, Subham Kumar, Supriyo Sarkar

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 v

A case study of Deviation in the Kousik Roy , Pratik Electromagnetic Radiation from Mobile Base Dey, Jyotirmay Station Antennas to its Vicinity Tewary, Partha 8. 55 Pratim Bhattacharya,Susanta Kumar Parui A novel Design of low power Rectifier circuit Kousik Roy,Naimul in RF Energy Harvesting Hasan, Partha Pratim 9. 64 Bhattacharya, Susanta Kumar Parui Mobile Robot Loco Motion Avoiding Subir Kumar Das, Obstacles Kousik Roy, Aniket 10. Kumar, Tanmoy 69 Pandey, Partha Pratim Bhattacharya Effect of process parameters on surface Soumojit Dasgupta, roughness and optimization Manish Kumar in turning of Titanium Grade 5 Alloy Sharma, Souparna 11. Bhowmick, 76 Gurkamal Deep Singh, Mahendra Tripathi Educational Development of Rural Girl in Susanta 12. 85 India Pandey Assessment of Training Need of High School Tapati Bhadra 13. Dropouts: A study in Joypur Gram Panchayat (Banerjee) and 91 of Murshidabad District of West Bengal Moumita Mondal HIV/AIDS Epidemic: Knowledge towards Kalyani Mitra 14. HIV/AIDS among adolescent students of 97 North 24 Parganas District in West Bengal Postmortem analysis of severe cyclonic storm Abhijit Banerjee, Sushreeta Pal, 15. Arkadip Nandan, 104 Pranay Kr. Saha, Dhruba Jyoti Das and Rina Bhattacharya Nazrana Khatoon A critical Studies on Rural Sustainable 16. 113 Livelihood and Rural Transformation Psychological and Psychosocial Analysis of Rudra Prasad Oral Precancer And Cancer Patients- A Chatterjee, M Pal, G 17. 117 Comparative – Qualitative Cum Quantitative Bandyopadhyay, R R Evaluation Paul Interdisciplinary Assessment of Coral Reef Kousiki Das, Jenyca 18. Processes, Climate Change and the World‘s Challam, Puja Pal, 120 Coral Reefs Bleaching by Satellite Remote Sagar Saha,

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 vi

Sensing Evanriakor Kurbah, Animesh Mondal, Purbita Bhaduri, Sayan Chowdhury and A. B. Bhattacharya Luminosity of the Setting Sun and Rayleigh Banashree Hazra, scattering of Light by Small Particles Anushree Bairagi, NilufaYeasmin, 19. Bitayan Mandal, 132 Sneha Dey, Konia Basu and A. B. Bhattacharya Study of some irreversible inhibitors as drugs Indrani Sarkar, of Human Cathepsin B by Quantitative Farooq Ahmed 20. 139 Structure Activity Relationship Method

Studies on Vegetation Indices based on Simran Parvin and A. 21. Landsat OLI 8 and TIRS Data B. Bhattacharya 140

Frequency and Amplitude Spectra Analysis of Sudipta Pal, Rinku 22. the Sound of Indian Folk Musical Instruments Sarkar and Sushmita 141 Saha Fuzzy Inventory Model for Srabani Sheeand Deteriorating Items in a Tripti Chakrabarti 23. Supply Chain System with 142 Time Dependent Demand Rate An overview of health risk associated with air Debanjali Roy, pollution at Kolkata, West Bengal Subhangi Chakraborty, Koustav Bhowmik, Sourav Mandal, P. 24. 143 Ghosh, Amitlal Bhattacharya, Soumini Chaudhury and Rina Bhattacharya Design and Development of Perforated Tray Subha Manash Roy 25. Aerator and B. C. Mal 144 Arsenic Contamination of Groundwater in M. Roy 26. West Bengal: A Human Health Threat 145

A novel angular distribution function for Mainak Biswas, 27. 146 characterization of breast cancer using k- Saikat Maity,

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 vii

Nearest Neighbor algorithm Shubhro Chakrabartty Electromagnetic Radiation from mobile tower Sauvik Bose, and avians: A pilot survey at Arambagh Rajeshwari Roy, Urbi subdivision of Hooghly District, West Bengal Chakraborti, Risha Samanta, Sipra Jana, 28. 147 Tanusree Mondal, Soumini Chaudhuryand Rina Bhattacharya A statistical approach to analyze the thermal Ahana Mitra, Gourab 148 stress during summer months Biswas, Joyeesha Manna, Arkadip 29. Nandan, Soumi Bose, Soumini Chaudhury and Rina Bhattacharya Bioelectricity Generation from Waste Water Dipankar Ghosh, 149 using Microbial Fuel Cell: A Literature Shrestha Debnathand 30. Survey Pritha Mondal

Observations of the Cyclone ‗MORA‘ from Hazer R. D. Warjri, 150 Remote Sensing Perspective using Radar and Hasina Paslein, Satellite Studies Mebashongdor Kharkongor, 31. Dipankar Dam, Zahidul Islam, D. K. Tripathi and A. B. Bhattacharya A Two-element Array with Tulip-flower Kalyan Sundar Kola 151 32. shaped Antennas for X-band Application and Anirban Chatterjee Effect of Pre-Monsoon Lightning Activity on Arpita Das, Sujay 152 33. Surface Nox & O3 over Gwb Pal, Subrata Kumar Midya A Study on Emission potentiality of Methane Susmita Karmakar 153 34. and Nitrous Oxide from Rice Seedbed and Biswajit Kar Group-Assisted Purification (GAP) Chemistry Partha Pratim Ghosh 154 35. for the Synthesis of Pyran Derivatives: A Critical Survey Epithelial to Mesenchymal Transition in Oral Sanjeet Kumar Das 155 36. Cancer and R. R. Paul

Two Warehouse Inventory Model for Raja Mollah, Srabani 156 37. Deteriorating items with Lead Time and Shee and Tripti Selling price Dependent Demand rate under Chakrabarti

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 viii

Shortages

Comparative study of Extended Kalman filter, Gaurav Kumar, 157 Adaptive Extended Koushik Shit, Kavita 38. Kalman Filter and Unscented Kalman Filter Nanshikar, Soumitra Das The Impact of Information and Samiran Chowdhury 158 Communication on the Socio-Economic and Moumita Poddar 39. Development in the Rural Areas of Eastern India

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 1

On the Trajectory Design and X-S-Band Radio Signal Communication of Mars Missions

Abhijit Banerjee1,R. Bhattacharya2 [email protected], [email protected] 1, 2 Department of Physics, JIS University 81, Nigunj Road; Kolkata 700109, West Bengal, India

A. B. Bhattacharya3 3Pro Vice Chancellor, JIS University 81, Nigunj Road; Kolkata 700109, West Bengal, India [email protected]

Abstract: With the advancement of the space technology for last few decades we are able to probe something beyond our planet. Travelling through the interplanetary space the red planet is our most curious place to halt. There are some similarities lies between the planetary neighbors, Earth and Mars, in various respects. The Martian environments are mainly developed by hydrosphere, cryosphere and lithosphere interaction which is very much similar to the Earth. These interesting features draw the Scientists and technologists immensely towards the expedition of the Mars, the red planet. In this paper we have compared orbit placement and trajectory design of two most important Mars mission of which one is Mars Reconnaissance Orbiter (MRO) of USA and the other is the Mars Orbiter Mission (MOM: Mangalyaan) of India. A probable model design from the past to the near future in respect to Mars orbiter and Earth communication links for the choice of frequencies like X, S and higher bands is emphasized in the paper. The Radio signal communication technologies by X, S band for different Mars missions are compared. The Martian surface data through X, S band radio signal communication of very recent Martian expedition like MRO, MOM, and Curiosity Rover Opportunity are then compared.

Keywords: interplanetary space, Red planet, Radio signal, Orbiter, Trajectory, Martian environments, Earth 1 Introduction In the history of planetary exploration mission to Mars keeps a special interest in view of many likeness with the Earth. This paper provides an inside look to choice of frequency range for the high data rate links for the ongoing and forthcoming Mars missions. Very near past and also some recent expedition of Mars local links use Ultra High frequency (UHF): 400 MHz, this satisfies the data rates of 2 Mb/s [1]. If the data rate is higher, then the improved link performance and wider bandwidth is required. Improved performance will be easily achieved by using frequencies greater than UHF. The selected frequency should be taken in cautious way that there will be no interference with the direct-to-Earth links for present and future Mars spacecraft [2]. An important point is the approaching spacecraft navigation which should be supported by the considered frequency. By considering the above requirement some frequency bands are identified Mars to Earth and vice versa for successful communication procedure with their strengths and weakness. Recent works deals with the frequency band X and S with UHF for Martian communication [3]. Various Mars Orbiter mission like Mars Reconnaissance Orbiter [4], Indian Mars Orbiter Mission, Magalyaan [5] and mars mission named Curiosity Rover Opportunity [6] are taken into account to study this communication links. This paper draws a comparison of communication processes among those missions with a brief emphasis on Indian

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 2

Mars Orbitor Mission Magalyaan. This paper enlightens some of the important aspects of the concept design and planning for lining the way for the successful Indian Mars Orbiter Mission (MOM). Summarizations of historical fall outs of Mars missions are considered. The main motivating factors of the MOM design are reliability and how existing launch systems can optimally be utilized. This paper also discusses the highly elliptic orbit placement with a minimum energy requirement of MOM trajectory design. A comparison between trajectory or orbit placement of two Mars missions, Mars Reconnaissance Orbiter and MOM: Magalyaan have also been taken into account in the present study.

2 Unsuccessful Attempts The number of Mars mission attempted recent pastis55, only out of which 26 is successful. The success rate is still trying to reach the fifty percent of its attempted. Many of them had achieved partial success [7]. Thus, historically Mars has been a hard-hitting target for space investigation. A timeline of the failure history of Mars Mission is presented in Table 1. Table 1Timeline of the failure history of Mars Mission Name of Name of the Year Cause of Failure Country Spacecraft and Orbiter Soviet Korabl4 and October 1960 The third stage of both launch vehicles Union Korabl5(Marsnik1 and unsuccessful and also failed reach Marsnik2) [8] Earth‘s orbit. USA Mariner3[9] November 1964 A shield was designed to cover the instruments on-board of the space-craft during the launch unable to release while it had reached Earth‘s orbit. For this additional mass, the spacecraft was not capable of enter the required Mars trajectory to reach Mars. The craft is now in a Solar orbit. Japan Nozomi [10] July 1998 In December 2003 the spacecraft flew by Mars went into a more or less a heliocentric orbit of two year time. Russia + 1.Phobos-Grunt January 2012 1. The upper stage unsuccessful to Chinese. mission(Russia) [11] ignite at an Earth Orbit 2. Yinghuo-1 as a 2. Take it to the Mars transfer piggyback(Chinese) trajectory. [12] 3. The craft along with the orbiter ultimately decayed and fallen into the Pacific Ocean 3. The failure analysis report shows the loss of the probe to memory chips damaged by cosmic rays. Europe: Mars Express + June 2003 1. It is a partially successful mission. European Beagle 2[13] 2. It is clear from the pictures of Space NASA‘s MRO on January, 2015 that Agency Beagle 2 is intact on the Mars surface. (ESA)

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 3

3 Trajectory Design On 5 November, 2013 at the time 09.08 UTC the Mars Orbiter Mission (MOM, Mangalyaan) probe was launched at Satish Dhawan Space Centre (Sriharikota: SHAR, Andhra Pradesh, India) The launching was done by Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle (PSLV) rocket C25. The window of launching was just about 20 days long, which is started on 28 October 2013. The MOM probe orbits round earth for a month then seven apogee-raising orbital maneuvers (AOP) is done [5]. Then trans-Mars injection is done on 30 November 2013. It took 298-day transit to Mars. The successful insertion into Mars orbit happened on 24 September 2014. The secondary objective of it is to gather images and atmospheric knowledge about the Mars for that it carries five instruments. The main driving factors of this mission are the 1.Minimum energy orbit assignment around Mars, 2. To utilize optimally the existing launch vehicle systems [14, 15]. Figure 1 shows the PSLV trajectories for a usual Geosynchronous Transfer Orbit (GTO) type elliptic shape parking orbit mission and for the MOM. The Argument for perigee for normal type is 1780 and that for the MOM is 2750. Third stage of the vehicle is separated from the Fourth state while the later one is ignited. This process in MOM design is done in 1600 seconds [16, 17].

Figure 1 Optimal Trajectories for usual and MOM type Mission [18]

3.1 Geocentric Phases vs. Heliocentric Trajectory

A detail of Geocentric Phases are given in Table 2. The heliocentric trajectory transfer towards the Mars (which is at the far away from the Earth‘s orbit) of the Mangalyaan is done by 23 minutes of engine firing on 30 November 2013 at 19:19 UTC. Then a distance of 780,000,000 kilometers (480,000,000 mi) is travelled by the Probe to reach the destination. Then among the planned four trajectory corrections only three were executed. Details of Mom Trajectory (heliocentric trajectory) are presented in Table 3.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 4

Table 2Details of Geocentric Phase [19]

Orbit Fuel Burn Date Time Apogee Comments raising time (UTC) Raising maneuvers First 416 6 November 19:47 28,825 km By firing of space craft 440 seconds 2013 (17,911 mi) Newton liquid engine Second 570.6 7 November 20:48 40,186 km By firing of space craft 440 seconds 2013 (24,970 mi) Newton liquid engine Third 707 8 November 20:40 71,636 km By firing of space craft 440 seconds 2013 (44,513 mi) Newton liquid engine Fourth Burn 10 20:36 78,276 km Incomplete burn gives an incomplete November (48,638 mi) incremental velocity of 35 m/s 2013 or 110 ft/s to the spacecraft instead of the planned 135 m/s or 440 ft/s.Apogee planned:100,000 km (62,000 mi) Fifth 303.8 11 23:33 118,642 km Supplementary burn, position seconds November (73,721 mi) of apogee slightly higher 2013 altitude than originally intended in the fourth maneuvers Sixth 243.5 15 19:57 192,874 km By firing of space craft 440 seconds November (119,846 mi) Newton liquid engine 2013

Table 3Details of heliocentric trajectory [20] Trajectory Fuel Burn time Date Time (UTC) Comments correction maneuver (TCM) First 40.5 seconds 11 December 01:00 Firing the 22-Newton Thrusters 2013 Second Nil 9 April 2014 Nil It was planned but not required (According to the plan) Second 16 sec 11 June 2014 11.00 Firing the 22-Newton Thrusters Third Nil August 2014 Nil Withhold, as the orbiter's trajectory is (according closely matching with the planned to the plan) trajectory. Third 3.968 seconds 22 September 09:00 The 440-Newton liquid apogee motor 2014 was test fired, about 41 hours before actual orbit insertion.

Areocentric Phase, i.e. the final stage Mars orbit insertion is performed on 24 Sep, 2014. The altitude control maneuver is started with the Thruster. The liquid Apogee fires for 1388.67 seconds. A reverse

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 5

maneuver is performed by the craft to reposition from its deceleration burn. Finally it entered into the Martian orbit [21].

3.2 Mars Reconnaissance Orbiter trajectory

On August 12, 2005, a rocket Atlas V-401 launched Mars Reconnaissance Orbiter (MRO) from Space Launch Complex 41 of Cape Canaveral Air Force Station. The burning of the Centaur upper stage of the rocket was completed within a period of a fifty-six-minute and positioned MRO in an interplanetary transfer orbit towards Mars [4]. Cruising of MRO through interplanetary space was taken seven and a half months. To have definite insertion in orbit upon reaching Mars, trajectory correction maneuvers were thought [4, 22]; the details of which have shown in Table 4.

Table 4Trajectory correction maneuvers [23] Trajectory correction Time Comments maneuvers First 15 days after launch 1.Injection errors correction 2.Removal of injection bias 3. Final aim point targeting Second 99 days after launch 1. Orbit Determination (OD) correction 2.Maneuver execution errors Third 40 days before Mars Orbit 1. Orbit Determination (OD) Insertion correction2.Maneuver execution errors Fourth 10 days before Mars Orbit 1. Orbit Determination (OD) Insertion correction 2.Maneuver execution errors Fifth 24hrs before mars orbit This only for Orbiter Safety insertion 6hrs before Mars orbit insertion

After the orbital insertion the orbiter was placed in a highly elliptical polar orbit. The period of revolution was approximately 35.5 hours. After insertion, the periaps was happened, which is the point in the orbit nearest to Mars surface. That position was 426 km (265 mi) distant from the surface and 3,806 km (2,365 mi) from the center. Again the apoaps was the farthest point in the orbit of the Mars. It is about 44,500 km (27,700 mi) distant from the surface and 47,972 km (29,808 mi) distant from the center of the Mars. On March 30, 2006, the process of aero braking was started by the MRO [4]. It was a three-step process. Within a shorter period more circular orbit can be achieved by this process with lessening the fuel needed in half. In September 2006, the thrusters on MRO fired twice to fine-tune its final orbit shape. That was nearly a circular orbit of 250 to 316 km (155 to 196 mi) distant from the Martian surface. The revolution a period is 112 minutes [4, 23].

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 6

Figure 2 Orbit trajectory diagram (not to scale) of (a) MOM: Mangalyaan (b) Mars Reconnaissance Orbiter (MRO)

The designing of the above two Mars missions differ in some respect. Figure 2 shows how the two mission trajectories differ from each other. In the Mom trajectory design the orbit raising maneuvers taken for approximately six times after that four trajectory correction maneuvers are taken [19]. But in case of Mars Reconnaissance Orbiter, no such orbit raising maneuver is taken. Only trajectory correction maneuver is done. After that aero braking procedure is taken for fine tuning the orbit. In MRO its first five orbits of the planet, orbiter starts its thrusters for lessening the periapsis of its orbit into aerobraking altitude. The Martain Atmosphere density changes with seasonal effects and thickness of the atmosphere also changes that effects the altitude. Second, thrusters are started to make minor corrections to its altitude of periapsis. This time the MRO maintained aerobraking altitude for five Earth months i.e. for 445 planetary orbits and to decrease the apoapsis of the orbit nearly about 450 kilometers (280 mi) [5]. In this case excessive heating spacecraft is taken care of. Also atmospheric dip makes the spacecraft slow and down. The time frame during which MOM and MRO reached Mars was nearly equal. Though MOM reached 41 hrs early than that it was planned [19]. But existing resource utilization and orbital raising maneuvering technology make this mission historically cheaper. The gaining of potential to set in a desired insertion of Mars orbit is done through the orbit raising maneuvering procedure. We know that the centrifugal force orbiter is equal to the gravitational weight. Hence = ; m= mass of the orbiter;

v=velocity of the orbiter, g= acceleration due to gravity. Then it implies = ; = = = = =g, √ where v1, v2, v3, v4, v5velocity after each maneuvers and r1, r2, r3, r4, r5 radius after each maneuvers. For orbit rising maneuvers liquid engine fires and recoil kinetic energy of the craft increases i.e. and gives a great propulsion. As velocity increases in each maneuvers and radius also increases and at the last required radius of Mars orbit insertion is achieved. r5>r4>r3>r2>r1, r5 is required radius for the escape into the mars trajectory. Again the dates of Mars mission in case MOM is chosen at about the Earth- Mars synodic cycles. This Opportunity occurs nearly every 2.1 years in a cycle. This repeats more or less between every 15 and 17 years. Within this span the mission opportunity characteristics are similar but not the same. These orbits have fundamentally three components: (1) Earth orbital phase (phasing orbits), (2) Trans-Mars phase, (3) Mars orbit-capture phase. The minimum-energy opportunity is captured at the Trans-Mars phase [5]. The November 2013 and January 2016 are the two minimum energy Earth Departure opportunities. About 380 m/s less velocity can be achieved at November 2013. Significantly the utilization of PSLV as the launch system can be done in 2013, but not in 2016 [5, 19]. The main

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 7

problem of MOM is the lower solar irradiance due the large distances therefore the system should be provided much larger solar panel area.

4 Communication Technologies through X- and S-Bands

The UHF (390- to 450-MHz) band is used for local links between Landers, Rovers, and Orbiting Spacecraft in Mars missions contemporarily. Low data rates (8 to 512 kb/s) UHF equipment is required for these links. Wide-beam, low-gain antennas which do not require active pointing control is important for this links. Higher-data-rate local links is desirable for future missions. Higher bandwidth, effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) and also higher gain/temperature (G/T) values are required for these links [1]. The frequencies higher than UHF higher gain antennas more realizable. Several different bands of higher width have been considered: S-band, X-band, Ku-band, and Ka-band. S-band (2.1 to 2.3 GHz) is important because at this frequency the commercial components are available. For near-Earth and deep space existing frequency allocations S band is important. Most future deep-space missions, which will mainly use X-band or Ka-band for direct-to-Earth (DTE) links cannot interfere with S band communication. X-band (7.2 to 8.5 GHz) is attractive as the existing frequency allocations for near-Earth and deep-space is done by this band [24]. Onboard hardware for the deep-space and local links can be shared by this links. The major concern is probable self-interference during concurrent passing of DTE (Direct to Earth) and local-link communication. The Ku-band (14.5 to 17.1 GHz) is attractive because it supports the requirements of technologically mature components from the commercial satellite industry. Interference with the DTE links in Ku-band can be overcome [24,25]. Space Research Service (SRS) downlink band at 15 GHz can be allocated which is close to the commercial satellite band and for SRS uplink allocation of another band at 16 GHz is done. A brief consideration is done for Ka-band (32 to 34 GHz) because a very high bandwidth and potentially a large EIRP and G/T can obtained from this. Problem lies here is that fine-antenna-pointing control is necessary for this band. Also, like other frequency bands hardware maturity and availability is lacking [26].

Figure 3 (a) Past and Present, (b) Present, (c) Further modeling for X-S band communications [24, 25]

In Figure 3(a), (b) and (c) models are designed to show the communication scheme with frequency selection possibilities. In Figure 3 (a) it is shown that X band is used for direct to Earth link (DTE) with frequencies 8.4 GHz (uplink) and 7.2 GHz (downlink) and UHF local links with frequencies 405.1MHz (downlink) and 437.1 MHz (uplink). UHF local links are for the Lander or Rover to the orbiter communication process, in Figure 3 (b) Frequency scheme at Mars: X-band (8.4 GHz uplink, 7.2 GHz

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 8

downlink) and Ka-band (32 GHz uplink) can be used as DTE links, UHF and X-band (this may be deep space or near earth X band) as local links with frequency 435-450 MHz for uplink and 390-405 MHz downlink frequency. The Figure 3 (c) shows the X band (7.2 GHz downlink) and Ku (32GHz uplink) and for DTE dedicated Ku band link high data rate can be created [24]. In Table 5 we have shown various X- S-bands Mars Mission Communication Technology for making a comparative study, while Table 6 we have considered Martian Atmospheric and topographical data from various missions for comparison.

Table 5A comparison of communication technology Technology MOM: MRO [4] Curiosity[6] Mangalyaan[5] Telecom ISRO telemetry : Digital Digital communication System Digital communication system Communication system: Turbo Codes Electra Nil UHF software- UHF software-defined communications defined radio (SDR) , radio for communicating relay capabilities with Mars orbiters

Signal Band S X , Ka X Antenna on 1.Communications 1. Large (3 m 1. Orbiters with more board are handled by two (9.8 ft)) antenna for power and larger 230-watt TWTAs transmit data through antennas than the lander (Travelling Wave the Deep Space for faster transmission tube Antenna) + two Network via speeds. coherent i. X-band 2. Telecommunication transponders. frequencies at 8 GHz i. a small deep space 2. Antenna array ii. Higher data rate transponder on the with through (32 GHz), Ka descent stage i. low-gain antenna, band. ii. Rover: X band, Solid- ii. medium-gain 2. i. Two 100-watt state power amplifier. antenna iii. high-gain X-band amplifiers 3. Rover: two UHF antenna. ii. One 35-watt Ka- radios, 3. The high-gain band amplifier, 4. Earth and Mars signal antenna with a single iii. Two Small Deep travel time: 14 minutes, 6 2.2-metre (7 ft 3 in) Space Transponders seconds (Approximately) reflector fed by (SDSTs). 5. Curiosity signals in S-band. iv. Two smaller low- communicates :(i) Earth 4. Transmit and gain antennas for directly at 32 kbit/s, receive data for the lower-rate of (ii)MRO and Mars telemetry, tracking, communication Odyssey 2000 k3+ commanding to and 2. Bit transfer rate: 6 from the Indian Deep Mbits/sec(Maximum) bit/s and 256 kbit/s, Space Network. respectively.

Deep Space 1. The ISRO NASA Deep Space NASA Deep Space Network Telemetry, Network (DSN) Network (DSN) with Receiving Tracking and with its 34-m its 34-m beam- Station Command beam-waveguide waveguide (BWG) Network ground (BWG) antenna antenna subnet. based stations. subnet. 2.After

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 9

apogeeabove 100,000 km, an 18 m (59 ft) and a 32 m (105 ft) diameter antenna of the Indian Deep Space Network 3. NASA's Deep Space Networkduring the non-observable period of ISRO's network.

Table 6Martian atmospheric and topographical data from various missions [27-29] Orbitor Radio Lander Radio Data Data Position Mangalyaan(MO Mars Curiosity Rover: Opportunity On Mars M) Reconssiance Position

Surface Orbitor on Mars

Arsia Mons Perseverance Valley

Canyon

valleyof the Marineris

igantic Santa Maria Crater G

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 10

The westThe rimof

BakhuysenCrater Endeavour Crater

From a comparative study we find thatthe data for the Curiosity Rover Opportunity is taken for the different position. The data of Rover Opportunity is prominent because this takes the data by staying on the surface of the planet. But the process of crawling of the automated robotic vehicle through ground of the Mars is still progressing. The Mangalyaan is technology demonstrator project i.e. launching budget minimization and with this realization that at the existing condition for launching, how an orbiter can be placed at this kind of unreachable target [5]. Secondary option is to take the data from the several scientifically developed devices like hydrogen spectra photometer, methane sensor, thermal infra-red imaging spectrometer, sensitive cameras etc. Since the data transmission is the secondary option thus the technological advancement in data imaging transmission is traded off with the technology demonstration of orbit placement. The MRO data is perfect as an orbiter. The main concern of the MRO is to take the image and atmospheric radio data from the Mars. The Rovers like Opportunity also transfers data through the MRO and Mars Odyssey. In spite of this direct data transmission from of the rover to the Earth also takes places through the mature engineered instruments [4]. The MRO has transmitted record amount of data ever to our planet. X-S band communications of this two special kind of orbiter and the rover has supported us to study the Mars in detail. It is clear that if we can minimize the cost of fuel and hence mission expenditure with lessening the time of flight in major level then extreme distant object of the interplanetary space become revealed by this kind of X-S band Radio study [30].

5 Conclusions

The Expedition of Mars is endangered from several issues like complex undertaking of the Trajectories though it have somewhat solved by technology demonstrator project MOM. Deep into the cosmos to reach the Mars, it requires heavy payload and a number of launch vehicle. Radiation in interplanetary space from the two important sources during this expedition is the galactic cosmic ray heavy ions and irregular energetic proton production from large Solar bursts [31, 32]. Second one is the absence of gravity at the Mars transfer trajectory insertion. Another aspect is the long time weightlessness in the space traversing is hazardous to the human beings. The aero assists technology is helpful for descent into the Mars but this is dependent on Mars atmospheric density and velocity factors of the descending device [33]. Possibility of human race for achieving Mars, have to face some interesting challenges and with the development of science and technology this challenges can be overcome. Again in this paper we have discussed about the X, S and also Ka and Ku band communications so from that perspective we may conclude by focusing into some interesting facts. The X band frequency has the major drawback of self- interference when it is used at the DTE link. The adaptation of filtration procedure may be the good way out of this. The high-rate local link can be obtained if the in Mars Rover and Lander are operate at X- band for both DTE and local-link then the Orbiters should communicate in X-band and Ka-band [25].

Acknowledgement

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 11

We express our sincere thanks to different data sources, like Jet Propulsion Laboratory of NASA and ISRO (Indian Space Research Organization) as well as other organizations for using partly their received data in this paper.

References 1. "IEEE 521-2002 - IEEE Standard Letter Designations for Radar-Frequency Bands". Standards.ieee.org. Retrieved 17 December 2017. 2. https://ntrs.nasa.gov/archive/nasa/casi.ntrs.nasa.gov/20070025081.pdf 3. Hao, U.,Chenghua,W. and Jie, W. 2016, Research on Mars Communication Link Budget, Advances in Computer Science Research, 7th International Conference on Education, Management, Computer and Medicine (EMCM 2016), Atlantis Press, 59: 76- 81. 4. https://mars.nasa.gov/mro/ 5. https://www.isro.gov.in/pslv-c25-mars-orbiter-mission 6. https://www.nasa.gov/mission_pages/msl/index.html 7. https://www.theguardian.com/science/datablog/2016/jul/23/forty-years-of-missions-to-mars 8. .jtgnew.sjrdesign.net/exploration_space_planetary_mars.html 9. https://mars.nasa.gov/programmissions/missions/past/mariner34/ 10. http://www.isas.jaxa.jp/en/missions/spacecraft/past/nozomi.html 11. www.russianspaceweb.com/phobos_grunt.html 12. https://space.skyrocket.de/doc_sdat/yinghuo-1.htm 13. https://www.esa.int/Our_Activities/.../Mars_Express/Beagle-2_lander_found_on_Mars 14. http://iopscience.iop.org/article/10.1088/2058-7058/27/11/18/pdf 15. Sundarajan, P.V.,2013, Mangalyaan- Overview and Technical Architecture of India‘s first Inter planetary mission to mars, Conference Paper, AIAA SPACE 2013 Conference and Exposition. 16. http://www.gisresources.com/the-mangalyaan-indias-journey-to-mars/ 17. Adimurthy, V.,1987, Launch vehicle trajectory optimization,Acta Astronaut., 15:845–850. 18. Adimurthy,V.,Ramanan, R.V.andPriyadarshi,P.2012,Optimization in AeroSpace Dynamics, ISRO Monograph-2012, pp. 204,ISBN978-81-908956-5-1. 19. Adimurthy, V. 2005, Concept design and planning of India‘s first interplanetary mission, Current Science, 106(9): 1050-1054. 20. https://www.isro.gov.in/pslv-c25-mars-orbiter-mission/mars-orbiter-mission-profile 21. Nwankwo, V.U.J.,Chakraborti, S.K. , 2015, Analysis of Planetary and Solar-induces Perturbations on Trans-Martian trajectory of Mars Missions before and after Mars Orbit Insertion, Indian Journal of Physics,.89(12):1235-1245. 22. Helfrich,C. 2015, etal. A Journey with Mom, Jet Propulsion Laboratory, California Institute of Technology, http://issfd.org/2015/files/downloads/papers/001_Helfrich.pdf 23. Zurek, W.R.,Smrekar,S.E.2007, An overview of the Mars Reconnaissance Orbiter (MRO) science mission,J.Geophys.Res.,112(E05S01),doi:10.1029/2006JE002701https://ntrs.nasa.gov/search.jsp? R=20080012702 24. https://tmo.jpl.nasa.gov/progress_report/42-153/153H.pdf 25. Kilore, A. J.,Fjeldbo, G., Seidel, B.L., Stykes, M.J. andWoiceshyn, P.M., 1973, S band radio occultation measurements of the atmosphere and topography of Mars with Mariner 9: Extended mission coverage of polar and intermediate latitudes,Journal of Geophysica Research,78(20): 4331-4351. 26. Bayer, T.J., 2008,In-Flight Anomalies and Lessons Learned from the Mars Reconnaissance Orbiter Mission. IEEE Aerospace Conference,IEEE,1–13. 27. https://www.isro.gov.in/pslv-c25-mars-orbiter-mission/olympus-mons-image-mars-orbiter 28. https://www.jpl.nasa.gov/spaceimages/details.php?id=PIA20728 29. NASA/JPL/Cornell/Marco Di Lorenzo/Ken Kremer/kenkremer.com

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 12

30. Banerjee., A, Bhattacharya, A.B., Biswas, S,Chowdhury, G.R., 2016, New Horizon X Band Communications System for Exploring the Pluto’s Atmosphere,2016 International Conference on Computer, Electrical & Communication Engineering (ICCECE), IEEE Explore Digital Library, IEEE,ISBN: 978-1-5090-4432-0. 31. Bhattacharya, A.B., Lichtman, J.M., 2016, Solar Planetary Syatems Stardust to Terrestrail and extra Terrestrial Planetary Sciences, CRC Press, ISBN 9781498762069. 32. Bhattacharya, A.B., Banerjee, A. and Sarkar, H, 2017. Today‘s biggest Cosmic Mysteries, LAP LAMBERT Academic Publishing,Germany, ISBN:978-620-2-05883-4. 33. Dong, K.J., Sun, Z., Rao, W., Jia, Y., Meng, L., Wang, C. and B. Chen, 2017,Mission Profile and Design Challenges for Mars Landing Exploration, Int. Arch. Photogramm. Remote Sens. Spatial Inf. Sci., XLII-3(W1): 35-39. https://doi.org/10.5194/isprs-archives-XLII-3-W1-35- 2017

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 13

Electron Density Profile at High-Altitude Ionosphere at the Onset of Tropical Monsoon

J. Pandit

Department of Physics, JIS School of Polytechnic, Kalyani 741235, West Bengal, India [email protected]

Abstract: Electron density profiles at the upper ionosphere, particularly their structural and chemical properties, exhibit characteristic changes at the perturbed condition of the atmosphere. Radio wave signals are affected accordingly at the time of their transmissions. Electromagnetic signals radiated during lightning discharges received by sensitive receivers as atmospherics at 40 kHz have been examined to investigate the electron density profile at the onset and stable conditions of South-West monsoon. We have analyzed characteristic variations of the field intensity of atmospherics and the diurnal change of electron density profile in the upper ionospheric layers during some selective dates of interest and the results are interpreted from a consideration of the source activity. In this paper we have shown the average diurnal variation of electron density in the upper ionospheric layers corresponding to when the monsoon was in the process of formation and when the monsoon gets a very stable shape.

Key words: Atmospherics, Tropical monsoon, Electron density, Electrical discharges

1 Introduction In different ionospheric layers of varying electron density, radio waves of sufficient length are reflected; whereas the shorter waves penetrate and may be reflected by a higher layer of greater electron density. Any information on the time variations of the atmospheric electric field, space charge and aerosols in the surface boundary layer under different meteorological conditions is of significant importance for the progress of atmospheric electricity, cloud physics and air pollution. The method of VLF/LF radio sounding of the upper atmosphere and the study of ionospheric disturbances requires knowledge of signal variations related to other forcing. The behaviour of the radio signal depends not only on magnetic and solar activities but also on the meteorological characteristics of the lower atmosphere. Meteorological effects in the ionosphere have been studied for a long time. A study of the influence of the tropical monsoon on the atmospherics level has been a subject of great interest over the years [1-4]. In this paper, we have examined the radio signal properties during the transitional days from pre- monsoon to arrival of monsoon by analyzing our recorded data at 40 kHz. The average diurnal variations of electron density in the upper ionospheric layers for selective dates when the monsoon was in the process of formation as well as when the monsoon gets stable have been investigated. The possible association between the atmospheric electric field during onset and stable conditions of Indian monsoon has also been examined in order to understand whether the ionosphere could have any remarkable response in onset and stable conditions of Indian monsoon period [5-6].

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 14

2 Received Radio Signal Instrument and Monsoon Data Considered The receiver employed for the observation of radio signal at 40 kHz is designed in such a manner so that it can accommodate variation of radio signal field intensities originated from meteorological disturbances. The different sections of the unit are tuned r. f. stages followed by a detector and D.C. amplifier. It is in turn feed the recorder where a master computer records the atmospherics data in digital form. An inverted-L type antenna can be successfully used for receiving the radio signal data at the said frequency. The receiver is composed of a very sharp double tuned filter and the output of the amplifiers is fed to a diode detector and thereby to a 10 second integrator. The block diagram of the 40 kHz atmospherics receiver is shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1 Block diagram of the 40 kHz atmospherics receiver

Table 1 shows the onset dates of monsoon for the eight years under consideration. We recorded the data round-the-clock before the arrival of monsoon over the station and continued the observation till the monsoon gets a stable shape.

Table 1 Onset dates of SW monsoon during 2011 to 2018 Date of onset of Year monsoon in West Bengal 2011 13th June 2012 17th June 2013 9th June 2014 18th June 2015 20th June 2016 17th June

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 15

2017 12th June 2018 11th June

3 Radio Signal Characteristics Characteristic variations of atmospherics at 40 kHz recorded for the consecutive eight years surrounding the onset dates of monsoon as presented in Table 1 have examined to find the typical changes at such times. When the monsoon was in the process of formation over the Bay of Bengal i.e. a few days before the onset of local monsoon, we observed the data carefully with our recorded instruments. We have shown in Figure 2theonset effects in the atmospherics level before the arrival of SW monsoon at West Bengal. The recorded data we have shown in the figure for the following dates: (a) June 9, 2011, (b) June 10, 2012, (c) June 8, 2013, (d) June 17, 2014, (e) June 18, 2015, (f) June 16, 2016 (g) June 10, 2017 and (h) June 09, 2018. It is interesting to note from the figures that after a distinct and a very short period fall of the intensity level it exhibits an enhancement sharply and then with a clear pause time a sudden fall appears in the atmospherics records which subsequently comes to the normal level.

Figure 2 Onset effects in the atmospherics level before the arrival of SW monsoon, West Bengal. The data were recorded on (a) June 9, 2011, (b) June 10, 2012, (c) June 8, 2013, (d)

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 16

June 17, 2014, (e) June 18, 2015, (f) June 16, 2016 (g) June 10, 2017 and June 09, 2018.

In Figure 3 we have shown some patterns indicating the signal level of atmospherics when the monsoon gets stable. The data samples shown in the figure were recorded on (a) June 15, 2011, (b) June 25, 2012, (c) June 12, 2013, (d) June 26, 2014, (e) June 28, 2015, (f) June 25, 2016, (g) June 21, 2017 and (h) June 19, 2018. Our records show that the level of sudden fall of atmospherics is comparable to that of the sudden enhancement atmospherics. In practice, we have noted a finite time delay by a few seconds between the sudden fall and the associated raining due to monsoon cloud.

Figure 3 Some typical patterns of atmospherics when the monsoon gets a very stable shape. The data were recorded on (a) June 15, 2011, (b) June 25, 2012, (c) June 12, 2013, (d) June 26, 2014, (e) June 28, 2015, (f) June 25, 2016, (g) June 21, 2017 and (h) June 19, 2018

4 High Electron Densities before Stable Monsoon The Earth's ionosphere starts from an altitude of 60 km during daytime with the appearance of the Sun. The solar radiation ionizes the gas molecules into positive ions and free electrons. The free electrons generated by the ionization of the ionosphere can largely affect the transmission of radio signals [7-8]. In an undisturbed day when the sun rises, the appearance

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 17

of solar electromagnetic radiation rapidly ionizes the ionosphere and when the sun goes down, the disappearance of the electromagnetic radiation causes the decrease of ionosphere‘s ion density. The distribution of charged particles in the ionosphere depends in a complicated way on latitude, solar zenith angle, season and solar activity including certain other parameters. In spite of this, ionospheric ion density can change due to perturbed conditions at the pre- monsoon and monsoon days. We have observed average diurnal variation of electron density profile in the upper ionospheric layers (~150 km to ~250 km) for the selective dates of interest of during monsoon of the eight years under consideration. The propagation of the radio signal in the ionosphere can be characterized by its electron and ion density profiles. The altitude range of the ionosphere that plays a vital role in the guiding of VLF/LF waves depends on the particular frequency of interest. In Figure 4, we have compared daily average of electron density of ionosphere corresponding to three different altitudes, viz., 100 km, 150 km and 250 km. A remarkable variation is noticed in the upper ionospheres compared to lower ionosphere. We find that the electron density in the upper ionospheres (150 km to 500 km) are always high and also the diurnal variation of electron density in the upper ionospheric layers is more on the few days before onset days of SW monsoon compared to when monsoon gets stable.

Figure 4Daily average of electron density of ionosphere in the three different altitudes.

In Figure 5, we have compared the average of diurnal variation of electron density in the upper ionospheric layers when the monsoon gets a very stable shape with the average of normal undisturbed days. Due to the remarkable variation in upper ionospheres, we have compared average of diurnal variation of electron densities in the upper ionospheric layers and observed that electron density is more when the monsoon was in the process of formation than when it gets stable.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 18

Figure 5 Average diurnal variation of electron density in the upper ionospheric layers when the monsoon was in the process of formation and when it gets stable 5 Discussions During the monsoon activity the average intensity level in atmospherics attains a higher value compared to other months of the year. The characteristic development of the patterns as recorded in Figure 2 and Figure 3 being originated from the surrounding active cloud sources. The occurrence of heat trough type circulation over the monsoon zone may contribute significantly in any major transition in the signal level [9-12]. The electric charge of raindrops reaching the ground is positive due to the presence of positive charges at the lower part and negative charges at the upper parts of these clouds [13-15]. The results reported here suggest that the discharges associated with the fall or enhancement of atmospherics is largely monitored by a tropical discharge pattern [16-18]. At the time of onset of monsoon, VLF/LF signal perturbations in association with thunderstorm activity appear as changes in the signal amplitude and phase. In fact, VLF/LF signals are very sensitive with the change of meteorological factors and the levels of sferics are dominated by local effects of the transition to monsoon in the Bay of Bengal of eastern India.We have reported evidences of a good correlation with diurnal variation of electron density in the upper ionospheric layers when the monsoon was in the process of formation and when the monsoon gets a very stable shape [18]. Acknowledgements The author likes to express sincere thanks to Prof. (Dr) AB Bhattacharya, Pro-Vice Chancellor, JIS University, for valuable suggestions. Acknowledgement is also due to the NASA's International Reference Ionosphere (IRI) project (iri.gsfc.nasa.gov) for using some of their IRI parameters.

References 1. Bhattacharya, A.B., Dutta, B.K. and Bhattacharya, R. 1994, Some distinct effect of tropical monsoon clouds as derived from atmospherics, Theor. and Appl. Climat, 50(1): 83-92. 2. Gadgil, S. and Srinivasan, J. 2011, Seasonal prediction of the Indian monsoon, Current Science, 100(3): 343-353. 3. Padmakumari, B. and Goswami, B.N. 2010, Seminal role of clouds on solar dimming over the Indian monsoon region, Geophy. Res. Lett., 37(L06703): 1-5. 4. Pant, G.B. 2003, Long-term climate variability and change over monsoon Asia, J. Ind. Geophys Union, 7(3): 125-134.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 19

5. Selvam A. M., Manohar G. K., Khandalgaonkar, A. S. Ramachandra, Murty A. S. R. and & Bh. V. Ramana Murty B. V. R. 2016, Diurnal and seasonal variations of space charge, electric field and cloud condensation nuclei in the lowest layer of the atmosphere, Tellus, 32:3, 232-244. 6. Bhattacharya, A. B. and Pandit, J., 2014, Seasonal variation of spread-F occurrence probability at low latitude and its relation with sunspot number, International Journal of Electronics & Communication Technology, 5(1): 40–42. 7. Williams, E. R., Geotis, S. G., and Bhattacharya, A. B. 1989, A radar study of the plasma and geometry of lightning, J. Atmos. Sci., 46:1173-1185. 8. Bhattacharya, A. B. 1994, Multitechnique studies of nor‘wester using meteorological and electrical parameters, Ann. Geophys, 12(3): 232-239. 9. Bhattacharya, A. B., Pandit, J. and Bhattacharya, R. 2014, Rare Super Cyclone Phailin in the Indian Ocean: Analysis of VIIRS high-resolution IR images and 40 kHz Sferics Data, Earth, Moon, and Planets, 112. 10. McBride, J. L. and Frank, W. M. 1999, Relationship between stability and monsoon convection, Journal of the Atmospheric Sciences, 56: 24–36. 11. Skauen, A.N. & Olsen, O. 2016, Signal environment mapping of the Automatic Identification System frequencies from space, Advances in Space Res, 57(3):725-741. 12. McBride, J.L. & Frank, W.M. 1999, Relationship between stability and monsoon convection, J. Atmos. Sc, 56(1): 24-36. 13. Hunsucker, R. D. and Hargreaves, J. K. 2003, The high-latitude ionosphere and its effects on radio propagation, Cambridge University Press, U.K., 617. 14. Thomson, N. R. and Clilverd, M. A. 2001, Solar flare induced ionospheric D-region enhancements from VLF amplitude observations, Atmos Sol-Terr Phys, 63:1729-1737. 15.Cummer, S. A., Inan,U. S. and Bell, T. F. 1998, Ionospheric D region remote sensing using VLF radio atmospherics, Radio Sci., 33:1781–1792.. 16. Han, F., and Cummer, S. A. 2010, Midlatitude nighttime D region ionosphere variability on hourly to monthly timescales, J. Geophys. Res., 115. 17. Shao, X. M., Lay, E. and Jacobson, A. 2014, Ionospheric Variations in Response to Lightning Discharges and Their Parental Thunderstorms, XV International Conference on Atmospheric Electricity, Norman, Oklahoma, U.S.A. 18. Wang, L. C. X. Z. J., Li, Q., Zhou, M. and Fan, 2019, Y. The Foshan Total Lightning Location System in China and Its Initial Operation Results, Atmosphere, 10(3): 149

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 20

Hardware Efficient Analog Encryption Methodology for Digital Data Transmission Sourish Haldar1, Samayita Sarkar2, Ranjana Ray3, Sreyansh Bhupal4

1,2,3,4 -ECE Department, JIS College Of Engineering, Kalyani, Nadia,W.B. 1Email: [email protected], 2Email: [email protected] 3Email: [email protected] 4Email: [email protected]

Abstract:Development of numerous low cost micro-controllers with on-chip flash memory and ADC has enabled researchers with limited resources, to implement complex mathematical functions. Cryptography has become an integral part of Digital Communication Systems Standards. Present state-of-art Point-to-Point encryption standards employ many methods of securing data transfer in several layers of OSI model. Data encryption is limited mostly in the presentation layer [1]. In the PHY layer scrambling has become standard operating procedure in secure communication. The degree of security by scrambling depends on the length of the chipping code. Increasing randomness by increasing chipping length comes at the cost of hardware and bandwidth. This work proposes and demonstrates a method of securing point-to- point digital data communication by representing 1s and 0s as distinct but arbitrary wave-shape. The arbitrary wave-shapes being generated by a micro-controller is real-time user programmable and hence would be known only to the sender and recipient, thereby ensuring the security of the data transmitted. This differs from the ongoing method in terms of amount of computation, hardware complexity and bandwidth efficiency.

Keywords: Point-to-Point Encryption, Digital Communication, Micro-controller, Line-coding, Arbitrary Waveform, Digital Synthesis

1 Introduction Efficient encryption of communication signal is presently a necessity in order to secure sensitive communications like online-banking, private messaging, reservations and many other applications. With several methods of encryption the cost and complexity has also increased with time. Arbitrary waveforms are a very useful variety of waveform having several applications in Communication, Control Systems, Digital Signal Processing, Signal Analysis, etc. Direct Digital Synthesis (DDS) of wave-shapes enables the user to define precision control over amplitude and frequency together with absolute repeatability. Most of the bench-top arbitrary wave generators are expensive, space inefficient, and not meant to be integrated in a system. Most of the Arbitrary Waveform Generation methods reported till now have static programmability [1, 2]. This work introduces real-time variation of waveform. In the whole, this article proposes a method of encryption by using user-defined arbitrary wave-shapes as line codes that can be integrated in the signal chain of digital communication system without substantial increase of overhead.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 21

2 Input Methods A. Resistor Array In this method a number of variable resistors (potentiometers) as shown in Figure 1 are used to define the waypoints of the arbitrary wave by supplying different analog voltage signals which will be digitized in the later stage. In the present work eight such resistors are used to for defining the shape of the wave.

Figure 1 Variable Resistor Array B. Predefining The values of the voltage levels that will define the shape of the wave can also be provided by the user while programming the micro-controller which would be static and reprogramming the chip with new values will be required for generating a waveform with different shape.

C. Real time input Another way for precise shaping of the wave is to define larger number of way-points by supplying the time and voltage information from a file in a computer. This can be done with ATMEGA microcontrollers since include USART bus in the packages. This increases the cost of system realization but, certain applications become possible which would be discussed later. Now to analyze the number of arbitrary shapes possible through this direct digital synthesis, ATMEGA series has 8-bit register system. Each way-point in the waveform can be of any value between 0 and 255. Assuming 8-way points in a time period the total number of possible arbitrary shapes that could be realized is (256)8 or (2)64. A low-cost 8 bit DAC and only a single port of the microcontroller of 8 bit output has been used for generating the wave in digital form. More precise waveform with higher number of way-point definition and higher number of quantization levels is a possibility at the cost of more registers per way- point and higher number of Microcontroller machine cycle per time-period. Alternately an expensive microcontroller with 16-bit register and higher clock frequency could be used as per the requirement of a specific application. The current work aims at proof-of-concept. This method opens up several possible applications including secure data transmission through arbitrary line coding. One can now transmit digital data stored in the computer through arbitrary line coding. This has immense potential for secure data communication. 2.1 Digitization of User Input The inputs provided by user from the resistor bank as supposed to be in analog form which has to be digitized in order to be processed by the microcontroller. This is done by the built-in 8 channel, 10 bit, Analog-to-Digital converter of the microcontroller which in this case is an ATMEGA32A of ATMEL.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 22

2.2 Microcontroller Description In this work an ATMEL‘s ATmega16 microcontroller has been used which follows Harvard architecture,40-pin DIP, with a built in 8-channel, 10-bit Analog-to-Digital Converter, Byte- Oriented Two-wire Serial Interface (I2C), Master/Slave SPI Serial Interface, Programmable Watchdog Timer, USART Interface and 32 Programmable I/O Lines. The block diagram of the ADC is shown in Figure 2. At the input of the ADC is an analog multiplexer, which is used to select between eight analog inputs. After conversion the corresponding value is transferred to the registers ADCH and ADCL. As the AVR's registers are 8-bit wide, the 10-bit value can only be held in two registers. The analog voltage at the input of the ADC must be greater than 0V, and smaller than the ADC's reference voltage Aref. The reference voltage is an external voltage which must be supplied at the Aref pin of the chip. The value the voltage at the input is converted to can be calculated with the following formula: ADC conversion value = round ((Vin / Vref) * 1023)

Even though the ADC has a 10 bit resolution we have an option to use only 8 bit for the conversion value since the DAC used has an 8 bit resolution. Hence the new formula would be:

ADC conversion value = round ((Vin / Vref) * 255)

3 Clock descriptions of Microcontroller, Frequency and Time Period Manipulation The new generations of microcontrollers are capable of working on internal as well as on external clock option. But then the question comes as to how do we make them work on a desired clock option? How to disable/enable a particular peripheral? There are few parameters in the chip which are used to configure it before it can be used for external environment. These parameters are set with the use of Fuse Bits. In other words, the fuse bit determines the behavior of the chip, whether it has a boot loader, what is the speed and voltage it runs at, the Watchdog Timer conditions, etc. The main advantage of fuse bits is that the microcontroller can be configured as per the requirement. Once the fuse bits are set for a particular configuration, the controller can be used again and again (program can be burned again and again). The fuse bits need not be set every time the controller is used till the time it is required to be used in the same configuration. The Fuse bits are configured to use the built in oscillator of 8 MHz frequency by default which can be changed to use any external crystal oscillator, resonator, etc. After the clock has been set up and configured, the time period of the output signal can be provided during the programming of microcontroller using delay functions or appropriate assembly code.

4 General Outputs The microcontroller is programmed to take input from each ADC input or directly from a computer, store it in the memory and then furnish it digitally to another output port of 8-bits continuously with a constant time delay, hence enabling the control the frequency of the generated arbitrary wave. These 8 bits are now provided as input to an 8-bit Digital-to-Analog converter. A typical DAC converts the abstract numbers into a concrete sequence of impulses that are then processed by a reconstruction filter using some form of interpolation to fill in data between the impulses. Other DAC methods (e.g., methods based on delta-sigma

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 23

modulation) produce a pulse-density modulated signal that can then be filtered in a similar way to produce a smoothly varying signal. As per the Nyquist–Shannon sampling theorem, a DAC can reconstruct the original signal from the sampled data provided that its bandwidth meets certain requirements (e.g., a baseband signal with bandwidth less than the Nyquist frequency). Digital sampling introduces quantization error that manifests as low-level noise added to the reconstructed signal. The fact that DACs output a sequence of piecewise constant values (known as zero-order hold in sample data textbooks) or rectangular pulses causes multiple harmonics above the Nyquist frequency. Now the outputs generated from the microcontroller in Digital form defining the 8 points of each time cycle is to be converted to an analog signal which can be done using a simple Digital to analog converter (In this case a DAC8EP 8 bit DAC chip has been used as shown below) as the AVR microcontroller used does not contain a built-in DAC. The Digital waveform obtained from the output of the DAC is shown in Figure 3. The frequency of this wave is 20 KHz (Approx.).

Figure 2 Unipolar Returns to Zero Signals 5 Filtering and Band limiting It was observed from the obtained waveform from the DAC that it has sharp step edges; it is also known that the frequency signature of waveform with sharp step edges is very high and it also causes adjacent channel interference. To eliminate these undesired responses it was determined that filtering of the waveform was necessary. Hence, a third order low pass filter was designed as shown in Figure 4. It is very important to select the components of the filter precisely; In this case a pi section L-C filter has been used. A standard approach was followed to synthesize the filter and calculate the component values [3, 4]. The response of the filter and their FFTs are shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6 respectively, where the waveform in blue color represents the filtered output and the one in yellow represents the unfiltered output. The filter helped as it forced a suppression of 15 dB at 96 kHz. The suppression increases which frequency and thus helps in band-limiting the arbitrary waveform. Due to the L-C nature of the filter certain ringing is observable. This could be controlled by decreasing the quality factor of the inductor by adding a small amount of resistance in series.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 24

Figure 3 Output from DAC (Unfiltered)

Figure 4 Third Order Low Pass Filter

Figure5 Filtered Output (Time Domain)

Figure 6 FFT of Filtered and Unfiltered Waveform

6 Digital Communications with Arbitrary Line Coding That arbitrary wave-shapes with low cost hard-ware is shown to be feasible, the USART port of the Micro-controller could be linked with Serial Port or Universal Serial Bus of a Computer opening a custom channel for data communication. If used in Line Communication, the output of the filter could be amplified and fed into a transmission line with adequate bandwidth. The shapes for transmitting ―ONE‖ and ―ZERO‖ could be of any arbitrary form as shown earlier and it would be decided by the user. After proper hand-shaking, the receiver would know the wave-shape for ―ONE‖ and ―ZERO‖, and would extract them from the received time vs. signal data through correlation. If used for wireless communication, the arbitrary line-coded base-band data could be up-converted to appropriate carrier frequency band, and at the receiver, properly down-converted. While several articles on arbitrary

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 25

waveform synthesis have been reported, use of AWG for encrypted line communication was not found by the authors of this work. To convert the arbitrary waves to standard line codes, further algorithms are to be implemented for DC cancellation [5-8].

7 Further Developments The order of the filter needs to be chosen appropriately for an established communication standard [9-14]. A software application customized for data communication through the developed hardware would be designed and implemented enabling seamless secure data- transfer. The developed hardware is mostly composed of discrete elements. The system would be integrated into a hand-held appliance with or without modulation option. The correlation receiver section would be implemented. When all these would be complete, this could be complete solution for secure communication of high priority data.

8 Conclusions Although the use of potentiometers for input of waypoints is not efficient as the precision level of voltage supplied is not fine, and it is quite difficult to make it function precisely when all the components are discrete. Conversely this method makes a system comparatively cheaper and simpler to build. This also enables the user to establish a very secure form of communication. Also this method brings much insight about microcontrollers, analog and digital signals, communication systems, cryptography, interfacing and other knowledge, up to a much greater level of understanding. The short comings can be solved by using Integrated Circuits to attain reliability and precision at the cost of more hardware resources and lesser insight. With implementations of proper devices and modules this system can be used for a vast range of tests, studies and practical applications and securing data transmission to.

References 1. US 4514761 A, ―Data encryption technique for subscription television system‖ 2. V. Kulkarni et.al. ―A Multilevel NRZ Line Coding Technique‖, International Conference on Technology Systems and Management ―. 3. (ICTSM) 2011, Proceedings published by International Journal of Computer Applications® (IJCA) 4. N.C. Karmakar, R. Koswatta, P. Kalansuriya, Rubayet-E-Azim, ―Chipless RFID Reader Architecture‖, 5.2 99. 5. Dr. A. Chakraborty, An Introduction to Network Filters and Transmission Lines, Dhanpat Rai & Co. Tech. Publ. 2002. 6. Liu Xiaodong; Shi Yanyan; Li Shubo "A MCU-Based Arbi-trary Waveform Generator for SLH Power Amplifier Using DDS Technique", Electronic Measurement and Instru-ments, 2007. ICEMI '07. 8th International Conference on, on page(s): 4-895 - 4-899. 7. Valls, J.; Sansaloni, T.; Perez-Pascual, A.; Torres, V.; Almenar, V. "The use of CORDIC in software defined radios: a tutorial", Communications Magazine, IEEE, on page(s): 46 - 50 Volume: 44, Issue: 9, Sept. 2006. 8. X. Liu; S. Li; Y. Shi ―An Arbitrary Waveform Generator for Switch-Linear Hybrid Flexible Waveform Power Amplifi-er‖, Industrial Electronics and Applications, 2007. ICIEA 2007. 2nd IEEE Conference on, on page(s): 2732 – 2736. 9. M.B.Yeary, J.Fink, and David Beck, "A DSP-Based Mixed-Signal Waveform Generator", IEEE Trans. Instrumentation and Measurement. Vol.53, June 2004. pp. 665-671. 10. Jouko Vankka, Mikko Waltari, Marko Kosunen, Kari A.I.Halonen. "A Direct Digital Synthesizer with an On-chip D/A-Converter," IEEE Journal. Solid-state Circuits. VOL.33. FEBUARY 1998. pp 218-227. 11. C. Quint ns, Frequency accuracy improvement in the Direct Digital Synthesis for the wave form generators", Proc. 2006 Instrumentation and Measurement Technology Conference, pp. 1380-1385, Apr. 2006.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 26

12. Jen-Wei Hsieh, Guo-Ruey Tsai and Min-Chum Lin, "Using FPGA to Implement a N- channel Arbitrary Waveform Ge-nerator with Various Add-on Functions", Department of Electronic Engineering, KunShan University of Technology, pp. 296-298. 13. Ashkan Ashrafi, Reza Adhami, Laurie Joiner, Parisa Kaveh. "Arbitrary Waveform DDFS Utilizing Chebyshev Polynomials Interpolation," IEEE Trans. Circuits and Systems. Vol. 51. August 2004.pp1468-1475. 14. L. Cordness, "Direct Digital Synthesis: A Tool for Periodic Wave Generation (Part 1)", IEEE Sig. Proc. Mag., vol. 21, pp. 50-54, 2004.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 27

Environmental Impact Assessment and Social Impact Assessment in case of Displacement relating to SEZs and Infrastructure Projects Souvik Chatterji Department of Juridical Sciences, JIS University, Kolkata 700109

Abstract: In India Special Economic Zones and Infrastructure Projects are built in huge numbers over the last 15 years. While the Special Economic Zones are administered by the SEZ Act, the major infrastructure projects were guided by the Land Acquisition Act of 1894 before the New Act came into being. After the recent enactment of Land Acquisition and Rehabilitation and Resettlement Act, 2013, the legislature has introduced process of Social Impact Assessment in projects where big mass of people are displaced. At the same time the environmental impact assessment is also done. The paper examines the laws and case laws like Narmada Bachao Andolan case in the light of displacement and evaluates the issues relating to building of Special Economic Zones and Infrastructure Projects. There were two issues. Generally for big projects private lands of rural masses are affected. These groups of rural persons don‘t have the adequate legal papers which show the correct cost of the private land. At the same time their livelihood is disturbed after displacement. So both environmental and social impact assessment are required to balance the need of the rural people especially in cases of displacement related to SEZs. As State has right to acquire any private land for public purpose under eminent domain, the landowners cannot stop the state from taking the land. But presently there is good mechanism where fair compensation is paid to the persons whose lands are used and they are rehabilitated. The problem is actual implementation of social impact assessment process and also carrying out proper environmental impact assessment. The paper had given information about the law and challenge of implementation of the laws for the best interest of the displaced groups and rural mass.

Keywords: Economic Zones, Land Acquisition Act, Social Impact Assessment, Environmental Impact Assessment, displacement

1 Introduction Special Economic Zones and Infrastructure Projects were developed in huge numbers all over India in the last 15 years. Effective from 10th February, 2006, Special Economic Zones Act, 2005 and Special Economic Zones Rules, 2006 have put in place a dynamic piece of legislation with multifold objectives of: (a) generation of additional economic activity, (b) promotion of exports of goods and services, (c) promotion of investment from domestic and foreign sources, (d) creation of employment opportunities, (e) development of infrastructure facilities. With a view to provide an internationally competitive environment for exports, the Govt. of India announced the SEZ Policy in April, 2000. The major goal of the creating the policy was to increase economic growth within the country.

2 Objectives of SEZ Policy The objectives of SEZ Policy are as follows: (i) Making goods and services free of taxes and duties supported by integrated infrastructure for export production; (ii) Create expeditious

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 28

approval mechanism and package of incentives to attract foreign and domestic investments for promoting export-led growth; (iii) SEZs in India functioned from 1.11. 2000 to 9.2.2006 under the provisions of the Exim Policy/ Foreign Trade Policy and fiscal incentives were made available through the provisions of relevant statutes.

3 Development of Infrastructure As per the Global Competitiveness Report, India stands at the 76th position in terms of infrastructural facilities. The SEZ policy intends to improve the infrastructural facilities. Thereby, the infrastructural development within SEZ has been very widely defined. It means all facilities needed for development, operation and maintenance of an SEZ including industrial, business and social amenities like roads, buildings, sewerage and effluent treatment facilities, solid waste management facilities, ports, airports, railways, transport system, generation and distribution of power, gas and other forms of energy, telecommunication, networks etc. It also means social & recreational infrastructure like hospitals, hotels, educational institutions, residential and business complexes etc. Only bigger sized multi- product SEZs help in this regard. Small, fragmented SEZs do not contribute in building infrastructure. According to the Ministry of Commerce, about 35 per cent of the land within the SEZ is to be used for processing purposes and about 40 per cent of the land is to be reserved for open space, drainage, sewerage, etc. Housing for dwelling, hospital, school, recreation, etc. are to be developed in the remaining 25 per cent of the land. Therefore, huge property development is involved in multi-product SEZs due to the nature of the proposition. The sector-wise composition of approved SEZs reflects that more than 60 per cent of the SEZs are from the IT category due to the boom in the IT related businesses. The land requirement for IT SEZs was fixed at 10 hectare as compared to large stretches of land required for multi-product SEZs. But sector specific small and fragmented SEZs may not be a viable business option in the long-run as they are susceptible to market and cyclical shocks.

4 Scope of Misuse Non-SEZs shift to SEZs only to avail benefits. The objective of the Special Economic Zone Policy was to generate fresh investment and employment. Thereby, the SEZ Act and Rules stipulate that SEZs can be set up only on vacant land. But misuse by industries from the non- SEZ area is rampant. Those industries can relocate to the SEZ area to avail the benefits of SEZ. The major problem relating to setting up SEZs and infrastructure projects lied in respect of agricultural lands in India. So questions of environmental impact assessment and social impact assessment came up.

5 Research Gap Identified The foundation of the entire research is based on doctrinaire research. Major Books, Acts, papers, articles were reviewed. There is no empirical data to substantiate the answers to the challenges. The main objective of the study is to find out a way where development can take place by setting up SEZs and infrastructure projects, on the other hand the interest of common rural agricultural mass also taken care of. By proper social impact assessment and environmental assessment justice can be done to displaced tribes.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 29

Table 1: Comparison of Execution of Special Economic Zones in India and China. Issue China India Size Large SEZs, e.g. Shenzen SEZ is Small, fragmented SEZs, e.g the spread over 49000 hectares Largest SEZ in India, the Reliance Navi and Maha Mumbai SEZ is spread over 14000 hectares Location Near Ports Not much attention is paid to locations; many SEZs are situated in land –locked areas. Labour Relaxed Inflexible Laws Policy Experimentation of liberal policies in Based on Fiscal sops Regime specified areas Investors Mostly foreign Mostly local Number Less in number but large in size, 6 Large in number but small in size major SEZs: Shenzen, Zhuhai, Shantou, Xiamen, Hainan and Pudong

6 Theoretical Models The theoretical model is that the Regulators relating to environmental concerns should examine the environmental norms of SEZs. The environmental impact assessment should be done in such a way that ecological balance is not disturbed in anyway. At the same time under LARR Act, 2013, serious social impact assessment is required. On the part of the appropriate government fair compensation should be given to farmers and rehabilitation and resettlement issues sorted out. If they lose livelihood, it should be provided back.

7 Hypotheses Framed The environmental impact assessment and social impact assessment in displacement cases relating to creating SEZS and infrastructure projects are inadequate in India.

7.1 Methodology The entire research is doctrinaire in nature. The major cases where the creation of SEZs led to revolt of farmer group were taken as case study. The reasons were analyzed and new amended laws reviewed. The laws are right in their places. The major challenge is the implementation.

7.2 Data Analysis and Finding According to the Ministry of Commerce, about 35 per cent of the land within the SEZ is to be used for processing purposes and about 40 per cent of the land is to be reserved for open space, drainage, roadways, lanes, sewerage, etc. Housing for dwelling, hospital, school, recreation, etc., are to be developed in the remaining 25 per cent of the land. Therefore, huge property development is involved in the multi-product or specific product SEZs due to the nature of the proposition and the real estate activities will boom in the initial phase of the

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 30

development of SEZs. Though in the guidelines, there is no mention about the SEZs proposed to be set up in sensitive areas that may have an adverse impact on the natural equilibrium, forestry, wildlife or the environment as such, yet from the various pronouncements of the Courts, a view seems to be emerging that the SEZs in such sensitive areas may not be permitted by the Govt. Halar Utkarsh Samity v. State of Gujarat, Civil Application No. 1778, 5476 nd 5928 of 2000, High Court of Gujarat at Ahmedabad, decided on 3.8.2000. In this case, the validity and regularity of the authorization by the State Government of Gujarat, permitting the Chief Conservator of Forest (WL) and the Chief Wildlife Warden to grant permission to Bharat Oman Refineries Ltd for laying the pipeline from the Single Point Mooring (SPM) in the high sea to the Crude oil Terminal (COT) at Vadiner passing through the ecological sensitive area which has been declared as a Marine Sanctuary was in question [1]. In Narmada Bachao Andolan v. Union of India AIR 2000 SC 3715 – The Supreme Court held that if for one reason or the other, the work on the project, now or at any time in future, does not proceed and the project is not completed, all oustees who had been rehabilitated must have the option to continue to reside where they have rehabilitated [2] They can also return to where they were ousted from, provided such place remains habitable, and they must not be made at all liable in monetary or other terms on this account. An adverse impact on the environment can have disastrous consequences for this generation and generations to come. The Court cannot approve a project without first ensuring that those best fitted to do so have had the opportunity of gathering all necessary data on the environmental impact of the project and assessing it. The States have been persuaded to set up Grievance Redressal Authorities and it will be the responsibility of these Authorities to ensure that those ousted by reason of the project are given relief and rehabilitation in due measure. In Bombay Dyeing Mfg. Co. Ltd. v. Bombay Environmental Action Group Case, AIR 2006 SC 1489, it was held that projects involving public interest should be examined after considering the following factors: (a) consideration of ecology, (b) interest of workers, (c ) interest of public sector institution, other financial institutions, (d) interest and rights of owners, (e) the interest of a sick and closed industry, etc. [3].

The land Acquisition and Rehabilitation Resettlement Act 2013 brought about changes in the laws relating to displacement of displaced tribes. Both fair compensation and resettlement and rehabilitation are recommended by the new Act. The implementation of Social Impact Assessment is a challenge. U/s 4 (1) whenever it is desired to undertake a new project or expansion of an existing project, which involves involuntary displacement of four hundred or more families in tribal or hilly areas, DDP (Desert Development Program) Blocks, or areas mentioned in the Fifth or Sixth Schedule to the Constitution, the Appropriate Government shall ensure that a social impact assessment study is carried out in the proposed affected areas in the manner as may be prescribed, (2) while undertaking a social impact assessment, the Appropriate Government shall take into consideration the impact that the project will have on public and community properties, assets and infrastructure, particularly roads, public transport, drainage, sanitation, sources of drinking water, etc. [4, 5]. U/s 9 (1) where the appropriate Govt. is satisfied that there is likely to be involuntary displacement of large number of persons due to acquisition of land then the State Govt. shall by notification appoint in respect of the project, an officer not below the rank of District Collector to be the

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 31

administrator for Rehabilitation and Resettlement. (2) The Administrator for Resettlement and Rehabilitation shall be assisted by the officers and employees as the State Govt. may decide. The social impact assessment report shall be submitted to the appropriate government for its examination by an independent multi-disciplinary expert group, as may be notified by the Appropriate Government. The expert group shall consist of the following persons, viz. (a) Two non-official social scientist and rehabilitation experts, to be nominated by the appropriate Govt., (b) The Secretary of the Departments of the Appropriate Govt., concerned with the welfare of the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes or his nominee, (c) A representative of the requiring body, to be nominated by the appropriate Govt. U/s 10 (3) the Administrator for Resettlement and Rehabilitation shall perform the following functions. (i) minimize displacement of persons and to identify non-displacing or least – displacing alternatives in consultation with the requiring body, (ii) hold consultation with the effected persons while formulating a resettlement and rehabilitation scheme or plan, (iii) ensure that the interests of the adversely affected persons of the Scheduled Tribes and weaker sections are protected while formulating the rehabilitation and resettlement plan, (iv) prepare a scheme or plan of resettlement or rehabilitation, (v) prepare a budget including expenditure of various components of acquisition of land, rehabilitation and resettlement activities in consultation with the representatives of the affected families, (vi) arrange land for rehabilitation and resettlement of the affected families, (vii) allot land for the displaced groups. A Supreme Court judgment dismissing Reliance Industries‘ special leave petition seeking a stay on land acquisition proceedings for its Special Economic Zone (SEZ) in Raigad district of Maharashtra was described by many agitating farmers as the ―highpoint‖ of their four-year struggle . The court‘s refusal to stay the land acquisition process that otherwise had to conclude by June 8, 2009, meant the project is close to being scrapped because of the failure to acquire land within the stipulated period. Against a requirement of over 10,000 hectares, the company has acquired only 2,151 hectares. Two years ago, the Maharashtra government imposed Section 4 of the Land Acquisition Act 1894, under which it could purchase land from local farmers for the SEZ. Provisions in this section stipulate that land acquisition must be completed within a year. It can be extended for another year, but if the acquisition is still not complete after two years the process lapses. Reliance pleaded for a stay on grounds that compensation awarded to farmers had not been passed within the stipulated period of two years from the date of notification of the acquisition -- June 8, 2007. It contended that if the consent awards had not been passed by this date, the entire acquisition proceedings would lapse causing grave financial loss to the company that had already invested INR 600 crore in the project. The Maharashtra government though is unlikely to come to the rescue of Mumbai SEZ Ltd. Maharashtra Revenue Minister and former Minister for Co-operation, Relief and Rehabilitation Patangrao Kadam said the government would not interfere in the acquisition process between the buyer (Reliance) and the owners of the land. The company was offering compensation of Rs 20 lakh per hectare and had taken power of attorney from a few farmers. Activists allege that the methods used were illegal. ―There are complaints that most of the farmers who have given Reliance Industries power of attorney are fake. They are not the real owners of the land,‖ said Vaishali Patil, an activist fighting against the SEZ. U/s 1A – the provisions of the Rehabilitation and Resettlement Act, 2013, shall apply in respect of acquisition of land by the appropriate Govt. under this Act. U/s 3 (b) person interested includes: (i) all persons claiming an interest in compensation to be made on the account of the

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 32

acquisition of the land under this Act, (ii) tribals and other traditional forest dwellers, who have lost any traditional rights, or related rights, recognized under the Scheduled Tribes and other Forest Dwellers (Recognition of Forest Rights) Act, 2006, (iii) a person interested in an easement affecting the land, (iv) persons having tenancy rights under the State laws, etc. U/s 17A (1) the State Government shall for the purpose of speedy disposal of disputes relating to land acquisition compensation establish an authority called Land Acquisition Compensation Disputes Settlement Authority. The Authority shall consist of two to three members including Chairperson to be appointed by the State Govt. A person shall not be a member of the Authority unless he (a) has been a judge of a Supreme Court, (b) an officer of the State Govt. not below the rank of a District Collector, (c) an officer of the State Govt. in the Law Department not below the rank of a Director. U/s 11B the Collector shall adopt the following criteria for assessing and determining the market value of the land: (i) the minimum value specified under the Stamps Act, 1899, according to the Sale Deeds in the area where the land is situated, (ii) the average of the sale price for similar piece of land situated in the village or vicinity, ascertained from not less than 50% of the sale deeds registered in the preceding three years, where higher price has been paid, (iii) the average of the sale price, ascertained from the prices paid or agreed to be paid for not less than 50% of the land already purchased for the project where higher price has been paid. U/s 17 (I), the applications relating to settlement of land acquisition compensation under this Act, shall be decided by the Authority as expeditiously as possible which is within 6 months from the date of reference. Similarly Land Acquisition Compensation Dispute Settlement Authority shall be established at the Centre. The qualifications of members of the Authority, powers and functions shall be the same as that of the Authority at the State. U/s 13, the Central Govt. shall in the case of existing SEZs, within 6 months from the date of commencement of this Act, by notification, constitute a Committee for every SEZ, to be called Approval Committee. U/s 14, every Approval Committee may discharge the functions and exercise the powers in respect of the following matters, namely: (a) approve the import or procurement of goods from the Domestic Tariff Area, in the SEZ for carrying on the authorized operations by the Developer, in the SEZ, (b) approve the providing of services by a service provider, from outside India, for carrying on the authorized operations by the Developer, in the SEZ, (c ) monitor the utilization of goods or services or warehousing or trading in the SEZ, etc. U/s 20 of the Act, the Central Govt. may, by notification, specify any officer or agency to carry out surveys or inspections for securing of compliance with the provisions of any Central Act by a developer or an entrepreneur. Such officer or agency shall submit verification and compliance reports. U/s 23 of the Act, the State Govt., in which the SEZ is situated, may, designate one or more courts, (a) to try all suits of a civil nature arising in the SEZ, (b) to try notified offences committed in the SEZ. U/s 3 (b) of the Act, affected family means (i) a family whose primary place of residence or other property or source of livelihood is adversely affected by the acquisition of land for a project or involuntary displacement due to any other reason, (ii) any tenure holder, tenant, lessee or owner of other property, who on account of acquisition of land in the affected area has been involuntarily displaced from such land or other property, (iii) any agricultural or non- agricultural laborer, landless person, rural artisan, small trader or self-employed person, who has been engaged in trade, business, occupation or vocation continuously for a period not less than five years in the affected area preceding the date of declaration of the affected area.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 33

U/s 4 (1) whenever it is desired to undertake a new project or expansion of an existing project, which involves involuntary displacement of four hundred or more families in tribal or hilly areas, DDP (Desert Development Program) Blocks, or areas mentioned in the Fifth or Sixth Schedule to the Constitution, the Appropriate Government shall ensure that a social impact assessment study is carried out in the proposed affected areas in the manner as may be prescribed, (2) while undertaking a social impact assessment, the Appropriate Government shall take into consideration the impact that the project will have on public and community properties, assets and infrastructure, particularly roads, public transport, drainage, sanitation, sources of drinking water, etc. The social impact assessment report shall be submitted to the appropriate government for its examination by an independent multi-disciplinary expert group, as may be notified by the Appropriate Government. The expert group shall consist of the following persons, viz., (a) two non-official social scientist and rehabilitation experts, to be nominated by the appropriate Govt., (b) the Secretary of the Departments of the Appropriate Govt., concerned with the welfare of the Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes or his nominee, (c) a representative of the requiring body, to be nominated by the appropriate Govt. 8 Conclusions In conclusion it can be said that the laws are in place. The biggest challenge is implementation. The minimum area of land prescribed for multi-products SEZ is 1000 Ha. Small states like Jammu & Kashmir, Goa and the Union Territories do not have sufficient barren land stretches to develop multi-product SEZs. Therefore, the minimum land requirement has been prescribed at 100 Ha for these regions. The reduced land requirement is applicable for sector specific SEZs also. The minimum land requirement is very low with a minimum build up processing area of one lakh square meter, more than 50 per cent of the SEZs belong to the IT/ITES segments in almost all major states. This makes real estate development for processing, office accommodation as well as for dwellings imperative. Regulations permit the developers of sector-specific SEZs to build a maximum of 7,500 houses, a 100-room hotel, a 25-bed hospital, and have office space, retail stores and multiplexes up to 50,000 square meter, while a multi-product SEZ developer can build a maximum of 25,000 houses, a 250-room hotel, a 100-bed hospital and office space, retail stores and multiplexes of 200,000 square meter. According to the Ministry of Commerce, about 35 per cent of the land within the SEZ is to be used for processing purposes and about 40 per cent of the land is to be reserved for open space, drainage, sewerage, etc. Housing for dwelling, hospital, school, recreation, etc., are to be developed in the remaining 25 per cent of the land. Therefore, huge property development is involved in the multi-product or specific product SEZs due to the nature of the proposition and the real estate activities will boom in the initial phase of the development of SEZs. If the SEZs and infrastructure groups really build hospitals, roads and provide livelihood solutions to the lands of the displaced groups it can really bring development. There are many environmental regulators which will help in seeing that ecological balance is not disturbed by creation of SEZs.

End Notes:

[1] Halar Utkarsh Samity v. State of Gujarat, Civil Application No. 1778, 5476 nd 5928 of 2000, High Court of Gujarat at Ahmedabad, decided on 3.8.2000

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 34

[2] Narmada Bachao Andolan v. Union of India AIR 2000 SC 3715

[3] Bombay Dyeing Mfg. Co. Ltd. v. Bombay Environmental Action Group Case, AIR 2006 SC 1489

[4] Section 4 (1) of the Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation, Resettlement Act, 2013

[5] Section 9 (1) of LARR Act 2013 [6] Section 10 (3) of LARR Act 2013

[7] Reliance Case relating to SEZ in Maharashtra in Raigad District, 2009

Acknowledgements I want to acknowledge the contribution of my Late Father who had inspired me to write a paper with analytical thinking. I acknowledge the contribution of all the authors I have referred who had shown light in the specified area. I want to show regard to the Hon‘ble Vice Chancellor Sir, Hon‘ble Pro Vice Chancellor Sir and Hon‘ble Dean Sir of JISU, who acted as inspiration at every step of completing this paper.

References

1. Joshi, P, Law relating to Infrastructure Projects, 2nd Edition. Lexis Nexis, 2003, pages 102 to 167. 2. Chaturvedi, P and Dalal, A, Law of Special Economic Zone, National and International Perspective, Eastern Law House, Kolkata, New Delhi; 1st Edition, 2009, pages 65 to 198. 3. Mehta, H. , Taxmann’s Law & Practice Relating to Special Economic Zones, Published by Taxmann Allied Services (P) Ltd., New Delhi, India, 2007, Butterworth Publication, 2003; pages 49 to 237. 4. Chatterji, S, Laws of Infrastructure Development in India, Published by YS Books International Limited, India, 1st Edition, Volumes 1 , 2014; pages 22 to 79. 5. Chatterji, S, Competition Law in India and interface with sectoral regulators, Thomson Reuters South Asia Publication, 1st Edition, Volume 2, 2018, pages 39 to 89.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 35

Single Axis Solar Tracking System using Arduino Uno

Suparna Pal Electrical Engineering Department, JIS College of Engineering Kalyani, Nadia, West Bengal [email protected] Abstract: With the impending scarcity of non-renewable resources, people are considering using alternate sources of energy. From all other available resources sun energy is the most abundant and it‘s comparatively easy to convert it to electrical energy. Use of solar panel to convert sun‘s energy to electrical is very popular, but due to transition of the Sun from east to west the fixed solar panel may be able to generate optimum energy. The proposed system solves the problem by an arrangement for the solar panel to track the Sun. This paper is based on the use of solar panel coupled to a dc motor to track the Sun so that maximum sun light is incident upon the panel at any given time of the day and year. Moreover, the code is constructed using C++ programming language and targeted to Arduino UNO controller. Therefore, the system has been proven working for capturing the maximum sunlight.

Keywords: Advantages of Renewable Energy, solar tracker, circuit description, advantages, future scope

1 Introduction As power demands are increasing day by day, so fulfilment of the requirement of power we are increasing our energy generation by fossil fuel (CHP generation).But increasing CHP power environment get polluted and fossil fuel storage is decreasing day by day. It is heard that only 150 years fossil fuel are storage in world, after this stipulated time period we cannot produce bulk power through our conventional system. It is the time now to increase our generation by renewable energy. If we are not focusing our power generation by renewable sources, we will not survive. For that reasons every corner of the planet concentrate on solar power mainly because it is clean, green energy. But solar energy totally depends upon solar radiation which is uncertainty of everywhere. Though high end research we are not generate bulk way power from solar due to its low efficiency. To increase efficiency of solar panel radiation must be concentrate on plates but it is impossible to trap same radiation whole day time. We know that Sun position is not same whole day long, for maximum trapping of solar energy; solar panel must be rotate according to position of sun [1].

2 Objective of Solar Tracking System As we know, the angle of incidence lies between -90degrees after sunrise and 90 degrees before sunset passing zero degrees at noon. This makes the solar radiations to be 0% during sunrise and sunset and 100% during noon. This variation causes solar panel to lose more than 40% of the collected energy. Fig. shows sun‘s path yearly at latitude of 30 degrees. From the fig. we can estimate the exact position of the sun [2].

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 36

At any time of the month or a day, the position of the sun is decided by two angles in the spherical co-ordinate system- the Altitude angle which is the Angle of the sun in the vertical plane in which the sun lies and the Azimuth angle which represents Figure 1 . The fifth angle of the projected position of the sun is in the horizontal plane. Below Figure 2 shows that the sun rays received are maximum when the angle of incidence is 0 degrees i.e. the solar panel is perpendicular to the sun. The Dual Axis Solar Tracker used to solve this problem consists of two essential parts: 1.The solar panel 2.The tracking system

Figure 1 solar angle of incidence with solar reflection

Figure 2 Histograms showing the characteristic changes

3 Methodologies

Proposed Model Solar tracking is a widely-applied proven technology that increases energy production by directing or concentrated the photovoltaic to track the sun on its path from dawn until dusk. Instantaneous solar radiation collected by the photovoltaic modules, assembled in a tracking system, is higher than the critical irradiance level for a longer number of hours than in fixed

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 37

systems. There are numerous types of solar trackers, of varying costs, performance and sophistication. One of those is: Single Axis Trackers Single axis trackers have one degree of freedom that acts as an axis of rotation. The axis of rotation of single axis trackers is typically aligned along a true North meridian. It is possible to align them in any cardinal direction with advanced tracking algorithms. Their types are 1. Horizontal Single Axis Tracker (HSAT) 2. Vertical Single Axis Tracker (VSAT) 3. Tilted Single Axis Tracker (TSAT)

Main components of solar tracking system The Solar tracking system consists of two main parts: 1. Circuit for sensing and controlling the microcontroller (Arduino UNO) and motor driver. 2. The circuit required for solar panel.

Hardware requirements 1. Solar panel 2. Sensors (2 LDRs) 3. Potentiometer 4. DC motor 5. Motor driver 6. Microcontroller (Arduino UNO) 7. D.c power supply 8. Rechargeable battery

Working principle & block diagram In general the electricity generated by the PV panels is influenced the solar radiation and ambient temperature .To generate the maximum electric power PV must be controlled so that the position of PV is always perpendicular to the sunlight to track the maximum intensity of light .The proposed model of single axis solar tracking system offers optimal energy conversion process of solar energy. Now we describe about how it is working (Figure 3).

Step-1 First we connect the solar panel to the rechargeable battery. Step-2 We use the microcontroller named Arduino Uno which is connected with an external source in which the program is installed. Step-3 The arduino which is connected with the LDR will sense an analog input & gives a digital output to the motor Step-4 In this step the two LDR‘s (Light dependent Resistor) which are connected with the panel will come into action. Step-5 As the sunlight travels from east to west the intensity of light also changes. Step-6 As the intensity of light changes the LDR which senses more intensity will instruct the arduino to rotate the motor in that side with the help of motor driver to move the panel to that side. Step-7 The output of rechargeable battery which is charged by the solar panel, will supply a power to run the motor.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 38

Step-8 When the sun comes over head means in the middle of the day both the sensor will sense the same intensity then the panel will become stationery.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 39

Figure 3 Specification of hardware components

3.1 Experimentation Photographs of the different parts of the experiments are presented below:

Snapshot of sensor circuit

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 40

Snapshot of power supply circuit

Snapshot of Arduino Uno circuit along with both the sensor circuits

Figure 4 Some typical photographs

4 Arduino programming const int east = 2; const int west = 3; const int motorpin1 = 4; //Pin 2 of L293D; const int motorpin2 = 5; //Pin 7 of L293D; const int en = 6; //Pin 1 of L293D; int a = 0; int b = 0; void setup() { // put your setup code here, to run once: pinMode(east, INPUT); pinMode(west, INPUT); pinMode(motorpin1, OUTPUT); pinMode(motorpin2, OUTPUT); pinMode(en, OUTPUT); digitalWrite(east,LOW); digitalWrite(west,LOW); digitalWrite(en,LOW); digitalWrite(motorpin1,LOW); digitalWrite(motorpin2,LOW); } void loop() { // put your main code here, to run repeatedly:

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 41

a=digitalRead(east); b=digitalRead(west); digitalWrite(en,HIGH); if(a>b) { digitalWrite(motorpin1,HIGH); digitalWrite(motorpin2,LOW); delay(3000); digitalWrite(motorpin1,LOW); digitalWrite(motorpin2,LOW); } else if(a

4.1 FINAL SETUP After Integrating all the hardware components and optimizing the designs through software analysis our final setup is made and the screenshot is also attached with it.

Figure 5 Final set up at a glance

5 Advantages and Limitations The conservation of non-renewable energy resources

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 42

Lower amount of Waste and Pollution PV solar power systems minimize the amount of waste production. For example, the entire process of converting coal to electricity produces a lot of dust, discarded solid waste, spillages of toxins and harmful emissions, as well as wasting energy, heat, land and water. Pollution from non-renewable fuels is inevitable. Emissions such as Sulphur Dioxide, Nitrogen Oxide and Carbon Dioxide all can have a negative effect on farming, people‘s health and water. Ecosystems are also at risk of being destroyed. Furthermore, pollutants from kerosene used for lighting purposes is reduced with the use of solar power systems, as well as the decrease in use of diesel generators for the production of electricity.

Offsetting Green House Gases PV Solar power systems produce electricity without giving off carbon dioxide. One PV Solar system can offset approximately six tons of CO2 emissions over a twenty year life span.

Limiting the use of conventional energy sources Solar power improves energy efficiency and is therefore it is beneficial to us. Use of solar energy for generation of electricity reduces the consumption of conventional power for built up cities.It is cheaper and hence can be used for industrial and commercial purposes to run various operations. Thus, the use of photovoltaic systems to generate power is one of the most efficient ones ways of generating power.

Universal application The versatility of the solar tracker is that, it can be used for various applications and can be implemented in various parts of world except for Polar Regions.

Generating efficiency Over 40% increase in radiation reception from sun comparing with fixed installation. With dual axis tracker, additional over 45% increase in radiation reception from sun will be gained.

Independent control The important factor concerning the system is that, it can be installed anywhere, where no manual operation is involved. LDR sensors play a vital role in making the system automated by sensing the intensity resulting in generation of pulse, thus making the system independent.

Limitations

1) When there is cloudy atmosphere it is difficult to tracking the sun.

2) Panel rotations require an extra power from outside of power used that produce by panel itself.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 43

3) Fixing arrangement of LDR at perpendicular to sun light is somewhat problematic

4) LDRs are very sensitive elements and so may get damaged in extreme climatic conditions.

6 Conclusions A solar tracker is designed employing the new principle of using smaller cells to function as self-adjusting light sensors, providing a variable indication of their relative angle to the sun by detecting their voltage output. By using this method, the solar tracker was successful in maintaining a solar array at a sufficiently perpendicular angle to the sun. The power increase gained over a fixed horizontal array was in excess of 30%.The solar trackers are a mean of controlling a sun tracking array with an embedded microprocessor system. Specifically it demonstrates a working software solution for maximizing solar cell output by positioning a solar array at the point of maximum light intensity. The electronics needed to activate the motors are simple and the system can be applied to any electromechanical configuration. With minor adjustments it can be used with various types of collectors including flat-plate, compound-parabolic, evacuated tube, parabolic trough, Fresnel lenses, parabolic dish and heliostat field collectors.

References

1. www.arduino.com 2. Khan, M. D., Shahrer Tanzil, S. M. and Shfiul Alam, S. M., Design and Construction of an Automatic Solar Tracking System, Conference: 6th International Conference on Electrical and Computer Engineering ICECE 2010, December.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 44

The Analysis of the Modern Power System with Distributed Network Suparna Pal1, Amitava Biswas2,Shubham Kumar1, Supriyo Sarkar1, Pankaj Mandal1 and Mrinmoy Sarkar1 1JIS College of Engineering, Kalyani, WB, India 2University of Calcutta, Kolkata, WB, India [email protected]

Abstract:This paper state the analysis of change of structure of a power system by implementing modern grid network and also focus of modern structure of advanced power system for fulfillment of demandsEnergy is the basic necessity for the economic development of our country, many functions necessary to present day living grind to halt when the supply of energy stops. It is practically impossible to estimate the actual magnitude of the part of that energy has played in the building up of present-day Civilization. So balanced power flow maintained only when power system runs modern structure which is discussed below.

Keywords: Power structure, single line diagram, modern structure. Grid, Power, Planning, Generation, Demand

1 Introduction An electric power system is a network of electrical components deployed to supply, transfer, store, and use electric power. An example of an electric power system is the grid that provides power to an extended area. An electrical grid power system can be broadly divided into the generators that supply the power, the transmission system that carries the power from the generating center‘s to the load centers, and the distribution system that feeds the power to nearby homes and industries. Smaller power systems are also found in industry, hospitals, commercial buildings and homes. The majority of these systems rely upon three-phase AC power—the standard for large-scale power transmission and distribution across the modern world. Specialized power systems that do not always rely upon three-phase AC power are found in aircraft, electric rail systems, ocean liners and automobiles.

2Basic structure of Power system network Single line diagram is the representation of a power system using the simple symbol for each component. The single line diagram of a power system is the network which shows the main connections and arrangement of the system components along with their data (such as output rating, voltage, resistance and reactance, etc.).The electrical energy is produced at generating stations, and through the transmission network, it is transmitted to the consumers. Between the generating stations and the distribution stations, three different levels of voltage (transmission, sub-transmission and distribution level of voltage) are used. The high voltage is required for long distance transmission and, the low voltage is required for utility purposes. The voltage level is going on decreasing from the transmission system to the distribution system. The electrical energy is generated by the three-phase synchronous generator (alternators) as shown in the figure below. The generation voltage is usually 11kV and 33 KV. This voltage is too low for transmission over long distance. It is, therefore, stepped up to 132, 220, 400 KV, or more by step-up transformers. At that voltage, the electrical energy is

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 45

transmitted to the bulk power substation where energy is supplied from several power substations. The voltage at these substations is stepped down to 66KV and fed to the sub- transmission system for onward transmission to the distribution sub-stations. These substations are located in the region of the load centres. The voltage is further stepped down to 33KV and 11KV. The large industrial consumers are supplied at the primary distribution level of 33KV while the smaller industrial consumer is supplied at 11KV.The voltage is stepped down further by a distribution transformer located in the residential and commercial area, where it is supplied to these consumers at the secondary distribution level of 400V three phase and 230V single phase.[4,8,10]

Figure 1Basic structure of Power system

Figure 2 Modern Structure of Power System Network

3 Modern Structure of Power System

Generating stations and distribution systems are connected through transmission lines. The transmission system of a particular area (e.g., state) is known as a grid. Different grids are interconnected through tie lines to form a regional grid (Also called power pools).Different grids

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 46

are further connected to form a national grid. Interconnected operations are always economical and reliable. Generating stations must be interconnected so that they feed into the general system but not into particular load. Economic advantages of interconnection are to reduce the reserve generation capacity in each area. If there is sudden increase of load or loss of generation in one area, it is possible to borrow power from adjoining interconnected areas. So, modern structure is based on interconnected network for better efficiency [5].

4 Power Crisis in India The Electricity requirements in India have grown tremendously and demand has been running ahead of supply. So we produced our power bulk from Thermal power plant mainly. Our transmission and distribution system not so much well and good to maintained balanced power supply all loads and also our transmission line losses are also so much high compare than other developing country (23.68%).To reduced transmission losses and maintained balanced supply we will restructure our power system network by incorporation of renewable energy generation in our same grid network by distributed generation and make our system smart. The below picture shown that.

Figure 3 An approach towards solving of power crisis

5 Reasons of Distribution Network For distributed generation of power to complete successfully with central generation in a competitive environment, network when it operated in large scale. The conventional arrangement of a modern large power system has a number of advantages. Large generating units can be made efficient and operated only a relatively small staff only when it operated in distributed network. The interconnected high voltage transmission network allows the most efficient generating plant to be dispatched at any time, bulk power to be transported large distances with limited electrical losses and generation reserve to be minimized. The distribution networks can be designed simply

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 47

for unidirectional flows of power and sized to accommodate customer loads only. But now a day‘s response of climate change, many governments has set ambitious targets to increase the use of renewable energy and to reduce greenhouse gas emissions from electricity generations.

6 Smart Grids Throughout the world, energy policy is developing rapidly with the aims of providing electrical energy supplies that are 1. Low or Zero –carbon to reduce the production of greenhouse gases and mitigate climate change. 2. Secure and not dependent on imported fossil fuel. 3. Economic and affordable by industry, commerce and all sections of society. The objectives of energy policy converge in the use of distributed generation, renewable and co- generation(Combined heat and power, CHP).Recently the name Smart grids has become common to describe the future power network that will make extensive use of modern information and communication technologies to support a flexible ,secure and cost –effective de- carbonized electrical power system. Smart Grids are intelligently controlled active networks that facilitate the integration of distributed generation into the power system. The European Technology Platform for Smart Grids has published a definition of a Smart Grid‖ A Smart Grid is an electricity network that can intelligently integrate the actions of all users connected to it- generators, Consumers and those that do both-in order to efficiently deliver sustainable, economic and secure electricity supplies.[3] A Smart Grid employs innovative products and services together with intelligent monitoring, control, communication and self-healing technologies to  Better facilitate the connection and operation of generators of all sizes and technologies.  Allow electricity consumers to play a part in optimizing the operation of the system  Provide consumers with greater information and choice of supply;  Significantly reduce the environmental impact of the total electricity supply system  Deliver enhanced levels of reliability and security of supply.

7 The Future Development of Distributed Generation Atpresent, distributed generation is seen primarily as a means of producing electrical energy and making a limited contribution to the other ancillary services that are required in any power system. In our present distribution networks has different problems that can be overcome only when we will incorporated renewable energy resources in our conventional systems and adopting new technologies like deep learning, AI, Virtual Machine learning technologies for making our conventional systems by smart systems.

8 Power Sector Reforms in India To meet up with large gap between demand and supply, various steps are required to be taken up. For this, instead of planning and building power plants in isolation, studies must be made to optimal generating capacity expansion. Now is the high time to get reformed and more modern techniques should be applied to the electricity production and transmission. Every attempt should be made to improve system load factors by flattening the load curve by giving proper tariff incentives and taking other administrative measures.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 48

The government target of 20000MW of nuclear capacities by year 2025 needs accelerated efforts to get achieved. The renewable and combined power plants with help of modern technologies should get supported both public and private sectors.[2]

9 Conclusions The electricity supply undertakings need to analyze the system, spot the weakness and take corrective measures to improve reliabilities and conditions responsible for power crisis. There is also need to improve the utilization of generating equipment and take care of the environmental aspects of energy generations [1]. So India‘s power slogan is `One nation, one grid `which is possible only in modern structure of power system network.

References 1. Gupta, J.B., A course in Power Systems, Kataria Publications, 2014 2. Jenkins, N., Ekanayake, J.B. and Strbac, G., Distributed Generation, 2010 3. Commission of the European,Union Smart Grids Technology Platform.European Technology Platform for the Electricity Networks of the Future, Available from URL://www.smartgrids.eu/[Accessed February 2010. 4. Mehta. V.K., Principles of Power System, S.Chand, 2005 5. Das D., Electrical Power Systems, New Age International Publishers, 2006 6. Blune, S.W., 2007, Electric Power System Basics for Nonelectrical professional, IEEE, press. 7. IEEE 1547, 2003, IEEE Standard for interconnecting Distributed Resources With Electrica Power Systems. 8. Electricity Network Associations Engineering Recommendation G59/1, 1991, Recommendations for the connection of Embedded Generation Plant to the Public Electrical Suppliers Distribution Systems. 9. Kothari, Nagrath, Modern Power System Analysis,TMH, 2016

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 49

Analysis of Economics of power by load duration curve for 11 KV distribution line of JIS College of Engineering: A Case Study Suparna Pal1, Amitava Biswas2, Basudeb Dey3, Avilash Paul4, Abhilekh Kumar Sah5, Mrinmoy Sarkar6, Subham Kumar7, Supriyo Sarkar8

1,3,4,5,6,7,8 Department of Electrical Engineering JIS College of Engineering, Kalyani, India 2University of Calcutta, Kolkata, W. B., India

Abstract: Load prognostication plays a crucial role in facility coming up with, and management. A decent forecast reflective current and future trends, tempered with smart judgment, is that the key to any or all coming up with, so Knowing the load behavior ahead is incredibly necessary in coming up with, associate analysis and operation of power systems to take care of an uninterrupted, reliable to money success. This paper reflects a true case study of load utilization and predicts what proportion powers are require to maintained operation. This paper is additionally highlight prices criteria of load and predicted on load survey.

Keywords: Load information, Load curve, Load length curve

1 Introduction The power station is needed to deliver power to an outsized range of shoppers to fulfill their needs. Whereas coming up with and building an influence station, efforts ought to be created to realize overall economy in order that per cost of production as low as doable. This may change the electrical provide company to sell power at profit and guarantee reliable service. The matter of deciding the price of production of power is highly advanced and poses a challenge to. There are many factors that influence value like value instrumentation, depreciation of kit, interest on capital investment etc. Therefore, a study should be created to calculate the price of production. The political economy of power generation has assumed an excellent importance during this quick developing power station engineering. A client can use electrical power given that it's provided at affordable rate. Therefore, power engineers need to realize convenient ways to provide electrical power as low cost as doable in order that shoppers are tempted to use electrical ways. The power created by an influence station is delivered to an out sized range of shoppers. The shoppers will be persuaded to use power if it's oversubscribed at affordable rates. The speed at that power is oversubscribed naturally becomes attention tantalizing for electrical provide company. The availability company should make sure that the tariff is specified it not solely recovers the entire value of manufacturing power however additionally earns profit on the capital investment. However, the profit should be marginal significantly for a rustic like India where electrical provides corporations are return beneath public sector and are perpetually subject to criticism. thus during this paper we have a tendency to are going a case study of total masses, consummation and rate on the idea of hours, day, week and month and attracts totally different load curves [1, 2, 3] . From this load curves we have a tendency to get full plan of total power consumptions of masses (power), peak masses and

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 50

base masses etc, which is able to be helps India/World clear style and consumptions of masses/power. 2. Theory and statement The load on an influence station is rarely constant; it varies from time to time. Power has been utilized by load sections. To style and maintained balanced provide towards distribution section, it's essential load flow studies equally to grasp the operational powers of each load sectors are got to draw load curves from wherever they get a transparent plan of energy utilisations and changed their desires according of that data [2]. Statement: - This paper is light of that form of case study or project of collegian students. Wherever students are studied regarding many different buildings and draw the load length curves.

Objectives 1. Our Aim is that identify power consumption via analysing each loads of different equipments and calculating overall total loads. 2. Draw load curves. 3. Identify total loads with respect of time(hourly basis) 4. Get idea how loads are utilised

3 Case study observation and results In JISCE School eleven potential unit transmission lines entered in JISCE station and so it's step right down to 440V. This 440 V line once more distributed towards totally different section of JISCE ,like Chemistry Dept, B.C Roy area, Canteen, Jim building, CMS building, Main building, Administration Block, Civil building, workshops, mechanical building. So, eleven potential unit main powers distribute totally in different sections. Thus our aim is to calculate total actual load consumption (approx.) that we are able to get a transparent plan of what proportion power we've got consumed within which section via developed their load curves. JISCE MAIN BUILDING:

Data sheet:-

MAIN Building CHEMISTRY Civil Dept Mechanical Dept Time Tota Load Tota Load Tot Load Tot Lo Period l Distrib l Distrib al Distrib al ad Loa ution in Load ution Lo ution Loa Di d in KW in in KW ad in KW d in stri KW KW in K but K W ion W in K W 10 am to 60.4 29.06 34.94 23.59 31.64 13.86 27.50 11.2 11am 2

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 51

34.94 28.98 31.64 19.129 11 am to 60.4 39.06 27. 22. 12am 50 50

12 am to 60.4 39.06 34.94 26.741 31.64 19.129 27. 23. 1pm 50 50

1 pm to 60.4 23.02 34.94 14.494 31.64 15.53 27. 24. 2pm 50 50

2 pm to 60.4 23.06 34.94 23.14 31.64 19.129 27. 24. 3pm 50 50

3 pm to 60.4 12.04 34.94 28.98 31.64 19.129 27. 28. 4pm 50 50

34.94 26.741 31.64 19.129 4 pm to 60.4 11.46 27. 28. 5pm 50 50

5pm t0 6 60.4 5.06 34.94 2.247 31.64 9.129 27. 17. pm 50 50

Data sheet:-

CMS Building GYM Building B.C.Roy Library Auditorium Time Tota Load Tota Load Tot Load Tot Lo Period l Distrib l Distrib al Distrib al ad Loa ution in Load ution Lo ution Loa Dis d in KW in in KW ad in KW d in trib KW KW in K uti K W on W in K W 10 am to 88 39.4 4.94 3.59 6.64 3.86 7.50 1.22 11am 5 8.98 6.64 9.129 7.50 1.75 11 am to 88 87.84 4.94 12am

12 am to 48 73.2 4.94 6.741 6.64 9.129 7.50 3.5 1pm

1 pm to 88 48.8 4.94 4.494 6.64 5.53 7.50 3.5 2pm

2 pm to 88 73.2 4.94 3.14 6.64 9.129 7.50 2.62

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 52

3pm 5

3 pm to 488 87.84 4.94 8.98 6.64 9.129 7.50 2.62 4pm 5

4 pm to 488 48.8 4.94 6.741 6.64 9.129 7.50 1.67 5pm

5pm t0 6 488 29.28 4.94 2.247 6.64 9.129 7.50 0.87 pm 5

Sample of individual Load duration curve: - CMS Building 90 87.84 87.84 73.2 73.2 70

50 48.8

39.4 48.8 KWH 30 29.28 10

-10 10am-11am 11am-12pm 12pm-01pm 01pm-02pm 02pm-03pm 03pm-04pm 04pm-05pm 05pm-06pm

TIME

Load duration Curve in KWH JIM Building 10 8.98 8.98 8 6.741 6.741 6

4KWH 4.494 3.59 3.14 2 2.247 0 10am- 11am- 12pm- 01pm- 02pm- 03pm- 04pm- 05pm- 11am 12pm 01pm 02pm TIME03pm 04pm 05pm 06pm

Load curve B.C. Roy Auditorium 10 9.129 9.129 9.129 9.129 9.129 9.129 8

6 5.53

4KWH 3.86 2

0 10am- 11am- 12pm- 01pm- 02pm- 03pm- 04pm- 05pm- 11am 12pm 01pm 02pm 03pm 04pm 05pm 06pm TIME

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 53

Load duration Curve in Library LOAD IN KWH Libarary 10 8

KWH 4 3.5 3.5 2.625 2.625 2 1.225 1.75 1.67 0.875 0 0.875 10am-11am 10am-11am 11am- 12pm- 01pm- 02pm- 03pm- 04pm- 05pm- 12pm 01pm 02pm 03pm 04pm 05pm 06pm

TIME

4 Result Analysis  From this different load curves we are getting a clear idea of power consumptions of different equipments and give a full idea of design criteria of loads consumption ,indoor substation, expansion of loads, capacitor design  Then we design and analysis of this case study in E-TAP software for load flow study  Getting idea overall load flows in different lines  Utilisation of this load flow studies is to implement reactive power consumption(SVC/Capacitor bank) design for better utilization (Load factor, Plant use factor)  We can easily determine maximum demand, base load demand, which will helpful for further load extension criteria.  We can see that load consumption is increasing with time(10 a.m to 1 p.m, classes and labs are starting ) and 1 p.m to 2 p.m decreasing and again it is increasing (2 pm to 4pm,When students laboratories and classes are running)  This load curves varies according to load demands. From that each and every hours we will get a clear idea of power consumption.  This case study can be done any area and from that we get overall designing of power generation. Transmission and distribution. The generation of electrical energy economically is not an ordinary matter, rather it requires a long experience to decide about the type, location and rating of generating sections. Not only this Power system planning, generation, transmission, distribution totally depends upon how much loads we are actually consummated. So load curve plays an important role of power system planning and design. It will be better design if we analysis it in micro levels.

6 Conclusions In an engineering works, the question of cost is of first importance .In most cases the cost decides whether a certain project will be carried out or not, although political and other considerations may intervene sometimes. Power system network should be design in optimal

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 54

reliabilities, minimum capital and operating costs conditions. For this it is necessary that the layout should be such that the maintenance and repairs can be carried out easily: the design must be compact and well planned, equipment used must be standard one so that capital cost is reduced and replacement of worn –out parts becomes easy and equipment used should be so simple so that it can be operated semi-skilled workers. To avoid the semi/complete shutdown in faults each and every sector should be divided number of sections and analyse their load curve. Load duration curve, maximum demand curves, base load curves, Mass curves, integrated Load duration curve and calculated all load factors in hourly, weekly, monthly, half yearly and yearly basis, for better operations . This case study is simplest way to analysis and design criteria of distribution section loads [1]. At present, the number of electric energy consumers is ever increasing, once with the tendency towards diversifying energy conversion and towards continuously modifying the load at the consumer. The liberalization of the energy market and the current regulations upon the introduction of the binomial and monomial charging system for consumed electric energy has propelled the development of the consumption monitoring systems in real time, through data transmission metering systems. The information obtained may be thereby used for affecting the consumers‘ load curves, whose analysis enables solving the complex issues in planning and in optimally exploiting electric networks. This way, through being acquainted with the load characteristics, the energy distributor may optimize the energy consumption and the losses in the distribution network [4, 5].

References 1. Gupta, J.B., A course in Power Systems, Kataria Publications 2014. 2. Mehta. V.K., Principles of Power System, S. Chand 2008 3. Nagrath & Kothari, Power System Analysis, TMH. 4. Jenkins, N., Ekanayake, J.B. and Strbac, G., Distributed generation. 5. Cătălin MIHAI, Ionel LEPADAT, Elena HELEREA and Daniel CĂLIN, ―Load Curve Analysis for an Industrial Consumer, 2010, 12th International Conference on optimization of Electrical and Electronic Equipment, OPTIM 2010, Transilvania SUD Electrica Distribution

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 55

A case study of Deviation in the Electromagnetic Radiation from Mobile Base Station Antennas to its Vicinity

Kousik Roy1 , Pratik Dey*2, Jyotirmay Tewary3, Partha Pratim Bhattacharya1,Susanta Kumar Parui4

1Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, Asansol Engineering College, Asansol, West Bengal, India *2Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, Maulana Abul Kalam Azad University of Technology, Kolkata, West Bengal, India 3 Dept. of Electronics and Communication Engineering, Bengal College of Engineering and Technology, Durgapur, West Bengal, India 4Department of Electronics and Tele Communication Engineering, Indian Institute of Engineering Science and Technology, Shibpur, West Bengal, India

[email protected],9851402083

Abstract:With rapid progress in the field of communication, the atmospheric exposure of electromagnetic emission from mobile base station antenna and its related health hazards have now cause to the increase of public nervousness for human exposure to Electromagnetic field (EMF) and its different health effect. Cellular communication antennas, built up on the base transceiver station (BTS), are meant to emit in a directional pattern into a great level occupied regions. The whole biological structures of our atmosphere are now touched by the result of electromagnetic radiation from BTS in its environment. The important reason of this study is to study the interference of Electromagnetic Radiation in terms of power density and electric field in the surrounding area. Here the radiation exposure level was identified for two different months.

Keywords: Base Transceiver Station, Electromagnetic radiation,Electric field Power density

1 Introduction Cellular concept is built in recent telecommunication system. The easily seen advancement in mobile phone technology has made our everyday life much additional good position, as a result the effective use of cell phone having been made greater in size for the duration of the previous couple of decades regardless of its many atmospheric risks. Wireless and mobile communications provide the facility to communicate with public on the onward movement. In preceding two decades the effective use and equipment of cell phones are significantly increased. To provide radio exposure, huge numbers of base transmitter stations (BTS) were established in heavily occupied region. As a result of constant electromagnetic radiation from BTS, various kinds of health and atmospheric risk are also increased gradually [1-4]. Access of area near to Base Station antennas is frequently extent where radio frequency signal may go above international exposure restrictions limits [5,6]. However the majority of the people are not aware of the effects of atmospheric coverage of electromagnetic radiation lying on our health. This current study was allowed to examine the variation in the electromagnetic emission coverage intensity from cellular mobile base station antennas to its vicinity in terms of power density and electric field.

2 Theoretical information 2.1 Cell Tower Radiation GSM 900 band BTS antennas can broadcast all through the frequency range of 935-960 MHz. This particular 25 MHz frequency band is separated into twenty sub bands (carrier frequency) each of 1.2 MHz, which are

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 56

allocated to a variety of operators. Each and every carrier frequency may transmit 10 to 20 watts of power. Power density at a particular distance from cell tower can be determined by using the following equation [4],

⁄

Where, = transmitter power in watts, = transmitting antenna gain, = distance from the antenna in meter.

Table 1 Radiated frequency range of BTS [5] Range of Frequency Cellular Uplink Frequency Download Frequency Services (MHz) (MHz) GSM 880-915 935-960 900 GSM 1710-1785 1805-1880 1800 UMTS 1920-1980 2110-2170

2.2 Cellular Mobile Communication In cellular mobile communication, the whole environmental area is separated into small areas (known as Cell) and each and every area is set with the base transceiver station (BTS) wherein directional antennas are built up. These major directional antennas are radiating maximum power towards main lobe of the radiation pattern [6]. The whole transmitting antennas have two areas fallen on the distance from the antenna which are called near field and far field [7-8].

Figure 1 Pictorial view of cellular mobile concept

3 Methodologies Electric field strength and Power density are two fundamental physical parameters for studying the intensity of atmospheric coverage to RF Energy. Electric field strength is explained by means of the force exposed on a charged particle apart from of its movement in space. It is expressed in Volt per meter (V/m). This means that not only the E-field component but also the H-field element has to be evaluated In this study, EMR coverage intensity at surrounding area of BTS has been plotted in terms of power density (μw/cm2) and also electric field (v/m) .The field meter covers all through the frequency band from 300 MHz to 3 GHz for the practical use of cellular mobile communication. This study and experimentation has been carried out at Ramsagar, Bankura, in the state of West Bengal which is depicted in Figure 2.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 57

Figure 2 Cellular Base Transceiver Station 4 Results and discussion This portion of our study depicts the practically measured data of electromagnetic emission coverage intensity in terms of power density as well as electric field throughout our field analysis by means of three axis field strength meter. The study noticeably demonstrates how the EM exposure level from BTS alters at different co-ordinate positions

Table 2 EMR Exposure for the month of February Date and Time Coordinates (Latitude, Power Electric Longitude) Density Field (mW/m²) (V/m) 03/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.2996"N, 3.752 1.189 AM 87°15'53.1936"E 09/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.2708"N, 3.68 1.178 AM 87°15'53.1648"E 10/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.3716"N, 3.88 1.209 AM 87°15'53.2188"E 12/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'9.7164"N, 3.97 1.223 AM 87°16'3.72"E

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 58

14/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'9.8784"N, 3.65 1.173 PM 87°16'39.9972"E 15/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'9.792"N, 3.88 1.209 PM 87°15'54.36"E 16/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'37.908"N, 3.97 1.223 AM 87°15'4.68"E 21/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.26"N, 3.66 1.175 AM 87°15'54.4032"E 22/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.728"N, 3.71 1.183 AM 87°15'54.432"E 23/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'11.16"N, 3.75 1.189 PM 87°15'35.9964"E 24/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.2996"N, 3.54 1.155 AM 87°15'53.1936"E 25/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.2708"N, 3.78 1.194 AM 87°15'53.1648"E 26/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.26"N, 3.66 1.175 PM 87°15'54.4032"E 27/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.728"N, 4.345 1.280 AM 87°15'54.432"E 28/02/2019 , 8:30 23°6'11.16"N, 3.71 1.183 PM 87°15'35.9964"E

Figure 3 EMR Exposure (Power Density Vs Date and Time) for the month of February

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 59

Figure 4 EMR Exposure (Electric Field Vs Date and Time) for the month of February

Table 3 EMR Exposure for the month of March Date and Time Coordinates (Latitude, Power Electric Longitude) Density Field (mW/m²) (V/m) 04/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.2996"N, 6.12 1.819 AM 87°15'53.1936"E 05/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.2708"N, 7.89 1.925 AM 87°15'53.1648"E 06/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.3716"N, 18.32 2.928 AM 87°15'53.2188"E 07/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'9.7164"N, 87°16'3.72"E 13.24 2.834 PM 08/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'9.8784"N, 10.29 2.370 PM 87°16'39.9972"E 09/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'9.792"N, 87°15'54.36"E 8.75 2.216 AM 10/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'37.908"N, 87°15'4.68"E 9.51 2.293 AM 11/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.26"N, 17.65 2.880 AM 87°15'54.4032"E 12/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.728"N, 15.55 2.721 PM 87°15'54.432"E 13/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'11.16"N, 17.87 2.896 AM 87°15'35.9964"E 14/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.2996"N, 16.65 2.705 AM 87°15'53.1936"E 15/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.2708"N, 13.33 2.542

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 60

PM 87°15'53.1648"E 16/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.26"N, 10.444 2.184 AM 87°15'54.4032"E 18/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'10.728"N, 16.96 2.929 AM 87°15'54.432"E 19/03/2019 , 8:30 23°6'11.16"N, 17.23 2.849 PM 87°15'35.9964"E

Figure 5 EMR Exposure (Power Density Vs Date and Time) for the month of March

Figure 6 EMR Exposure (Electric Field Vs Date and Time) for the month of March

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 61

Figure 7 EMR Exposure of highest value (Power Density Vs Date and Time) for the month of February and March

Figure 8 EMR Exposure of highest value (Electric Field Vs Date and Time) for the month of February and March

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 62

From Table 2 we can see the different value of EMR (Electromagnetic Radiation) exposure in terms of Power Density and Electric Field for the month of February, which we have plotted in Figure 3 and Figure 4 respectively. Here we can see that as the temperature is very low at the beginning of the month so the radiation is very low. As the temperature is increased from low to high the EMR exposure is also increased. From Table 4 we can see the different value of EMR (Electromagnetic Radiation) exposure in terms of Power Density and Electric Field for the month of March, which we are plotted in Figure 5 and Figure 6 respectively. Here also it is noticed that as the temperature is increased from low to high the EMR exposure is also increased. Figure 7 presents EMR Exposure of highest value (Power Density Vs Date and Time) for the month of February and March. In figure 8, EMR Exposure of highest value (Electric Field Vs Date and Time) for the month of February and March is depicted.

5 Conclusions The alteration in the Electromagnetic emission coverage level from Cellular Base Transceiver Station (BTS) for two months has been studied and illustrated in our present analysis. The finding of our analysis consist of that the EM emission coverage level from BTS alters at various co-ordinate locations and attained to its optimal value at a specific distance (region) from BTS, may be regarded as a large amount responsive region for public concern of human revelation to Electromagnetic field (EMF) and its correlate health hazards, subsequently the EM radiation coverage intensity decreases steadily with distance from BTS also. On the other hand it has also been noticed that, human exposure over the examined are allocated in the close vicinity of Cellular Base Transceiver Station abide by DOT rules and typical coverage restrictions and strategies set by ICNIRP/IEEE for RF exposure.

References 1. Verloock, L., Joseph, W., Goeminne, F., Martens, L., Verlaek, M., Constandt, K.,2014, Assessment of radio frequency exposures in schools, homes, and public places in Belgium, Health Physics, 107(6),503-513. 2. Hamiti, E., Ibrani, M., Ahma, L., Shala, V., Halili, R.,Comparative Analysis of Electromagnetic Field Exposure Levels and Determination of the Minimum Safe Distances from Mobile-Phone Base Stations in Urban Areas, Progress in Electromagnetic Research M,2016, 50:117-128. 3. Singh, K., Nagaraj, A., Yousuf, A., Ganta, S., Pareek, S., Vishnani, P, Effect of electromagnetic radiations from mobile phone base stations on general health and salivary function, J. Int. Soc. Prev. Community. Dent, 2016, 6(1): 54–59. 4. Chitranshi, R., Mehrotra, R., Pancoli, P.: Analysis of Cell Tower Radiation, RF Safety and Practical Realiazation of Compliance Distance. International Journal of Scientific and Research Publications, 2014,4(4):1-6. 5. Berg-Beckhoff, G., Blettner, M., Kowall, B., Breckenkamp, J., Schlehofer, B., Schmiedel, S., Bornkessel, C., Reis, U., Potthoff, P., Schuz, J, Mobile phone base stations and adverse health effects: phase 2 of a cross-sectional study with measured radio frequency electromagnetic fields, Occup. Environ. Med,2009,66(2):124–130. 6. Dusgotra, A., Singhal, A., A Pilot Study: Health Hazards of Electromagnetic Waves from BTS and Its Compliance through NEP,International Journal of Advanced Research in Computer Science and Software Engineering,2016, 6(7):507-511.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 63

7. Joseph, W., Vermeeren G., Verloock, L., and Martens ,L.,Estimation of Whole-Body SAR From Electromagnetic Fields Using Personal Exposure Meters, Bioelectromagnetics,2010,31(4):286-295. 8.Joseph,W., and Martens,L.,Comparison of Safety Distances Based on the Electromagnetic Field and Based on the SAR For Occupational Exposure of a 900-mhz Base Station Antenna,IEEE Transactions on Electromagnetic compatibility, 2005,.47(4) :977-985.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 64

A novel Design of low power Rectifier circuit in RF Energy Harvesting

Kousik Roy1,Naimul Hasan2, Partha Pratim Bhattacharya1, Susanta Kumar Parui3

1Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering,Asansol Engineering College, Asansol- 713305 *2 Department of Electronics & communication Engineering, Sanaka Educational Trust‘s Group of Institution, Durgapur-713212, West Bengal, India 3Department of Electronics and Tele Communication Engineering, Indian Institute of Engineering Science and Technology, Shibpur, West Bengal, India [email protected]

Abstract:In this paper the schematic diagrams for realization of low power RF to DC rectifier have been exemplified. Here we have executed the rectifier circuit at 2.45 GHz. 0 dBm and 10 dBm input powers are taken to devise and simulate the rectifier circuit. Variation of input power with respect to DC voltage is shown at 2.45 GHz frequency. Likewise change of S1,1& variation of output power with respect to frequency is also presented.In this paper we have demonstrated the schematic design of the rectifier circuit in conjunction with the matching circuit utilizing HSMS 2820. Simulations explain that the DC voltage of 0.158V, 1.622V, can be obtained at 0dBm, 10 dBm input power when input frequency 2.45GHz and load resistance of 1kΩ.

Keywords: Return loss, RF to DC converter, Wireless Sensor Networks 1 Introduction Energy harvesting is a technique wherein energy stored from surroundings that will be converted in electrical energy for power electrical devices. As a consequence of this energy substitute, it is identified energy scavenging and power harvesting [1, 2]. In recent era, energy harvesting at radio frequency has been a rapid rising topic. Since the foremost wireless energy transmission was planned and recognized in the 1890‘s by Nikola Tesla [3-4]. The field is stretched and linked to a number of reasons for example microwave-powered helicopter prototype, solar power satellite system, microwave power transmission in space and radio-frequency identification [5- 10]. A rectifier and an antenna are amalgamated to be the rectenna that was principally planned by W. C. Brown to alter the microwave power into the DC power [5]. Consequently, the majority significant ground of the RF energy harvesting is the rectenna that recognizes the ambient RF energy by the antenna and amends the received energy to the DC power by the rectifier circuit. To achieve the high RF-to- DC power alteration efficiency for the RF energy harvesting, high gain and wideband antennas must be anticipated to augment the power density and also to generate every single one of the ambient RF energy. Otherwise, the rectifier circuit has to be implemented to afford the high efficiency of RF-to-DC power alteration and maintain multiband for attaining the high DC power from accumulation of different frequencies.The rectifier circuit is utilized to modify the RF input into DC and exceed through to the DC output load which is used in a variety of functions .Here RF energy harvesting system for the 2.45 GHz is exemplified to utilize and develop the low power devices, e.g. wireless sensor systems.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 65

2 Rectifier Design The usefulness of the rectifier is to alter microwave RF energy into DC electrical energy. Schottky Diodes are ideal as if at all possible low forward bias voltage of 0.15 V with swift switching at high frequencies which is mainly suitable for enormously low RF input power uses. Here we have designed one rectifier with the help of matching network, operated at 2.45 GHz frequency shown in Figure 1 .DC output voltage of rectifiers depend on different parameters such as width, length of layer etc.The circuit is engraved on the substrate having Dielectric constant = 4.34 and h = 1.5mm,T=0.035mm.

Figure 1 Schematic Diagram of rectifier Circuit 3 Results and Discussion The Rectifiers with matching circuit are simulated using Harmonic Balance (HB) Simulation method of ADS-2019. Figure 3 represents the Variation of Output DC Voltage(V) with respect to input Power (dBm). The simulated DC output voltage obtained for different input RF power with respect to the 1 kΩ load are depicted in Figure 2 . We get output DC voltage 0.158 V when input power 0.00 dBm and similarly output voltage 1.622 V is obtained for input power 10.00 dBm. In both cases we have considered the load resistance 1kOhm.Figure 3 illustrates the Variation of Reflection Coefficient S(1,1) dB with respect to frequency (GHz) .Here we have considered the centre frequency as 2.438 GHz and we obtained the return loss -19.281 dB.Figure 4 shows Variation of Efficiency with respect to Input Power (dBm). When input power is taken 10 dBm , the efficiency is obtained 27.633 and similarly for input power 0.00 dBm we have got the efficiency 3.062.Figure 5 depicts thevariation of Output DCVoltage(V) with respect to frequency (GHz). The output DC voltage 1.637 Volt and 0.434 volt are obtained for the frequencies 3.700 GHz and 5.500 GHz. In both the cases we have considered the load resistance 1KOhm.Figure 6 shows the variation of Efficiency with respect to frequency (GHz). We have obtained the efficiency 35.829 and 12.382 for the input frequencies 3.700 GHz and 5.500 GHz respectively. In figure 7, the variation of Efficiency (%) with respect to Load (KOhm) is shown. The Efficiency are acquired 13.72%, 5.210%, 3.211% for the load resistances 10KOhm, 30KOhm, 50K Ohm respectively. Figure 8 shows the variation of Output DC Voltage

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 66

(V) with respect to Load (K Ohm). For the different load resistances 10KOhm, 40KOhm, 60KOhm the Output voltage are achieved 3.374 V, 3.593 V,3.557 V respectively.

Figure 2Variation of Output DC Voltage(V) with respect to input Power (dBm)

Figure 3 Variation of Reflection Coefficient S(1,1) dB with respect to frequency (GHz)

Figure 4 Variation of Efficiency with respect to Input Power (dBm)

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 67

Figure 5 Variation of Output DC Voltage(V) with respect to frequency (GHz)

Figure 6 Variation of Efficiency with respect to frequency (GHz)

Figure 7 Variation of Efficiency (%) with respect to Load (KOhm)

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 68

Figure 8 Variation of Output DC Voltage (V) with respect to Load (KOhm)

4 Conclusions RF power harvesting technology illustrates a vivid outlook in minute power consumer electronics and wireless sensor arrangement. With raising the devising frequency of rectifier circuits it has been observed that DC output voltage is significantly reduced when the length and width of rectifier circuits alter. Here a design of RF energy harvesting system at 2.45 GHz is presented, which can be employed to make stronger small power devices such as wireless sensor structure. This paper contemplates on the RF to DC transformation unit of a RF energy harvesting structure which operates radio frequency waves as the input source. The RF energy controlled by the receiving antenna is nourished into the rectifier. A matching network is utilized to equal the input impedance of the rectifier with that of the antenna‘s output impedance so as to reduce power loss. References 1.Chalasani, S., Conrad,JM., A Survey of Energy Harvesting Sources for Embedded Systems, IEEE Southeast Conference,2008 2.Sudevalayam,S., Kulkarni,P., Energy Harvesting Sensor Nodes: Survey and Implications,IEEE Communications Surveys & Tutorials; 2011, 443 - 461. 3.Marincic, A. S. 1982, Nikola tesla and the wireless transmission of energy, IEEE Trans. Power Apparants and Systems, 101(10) ,4064-4068. 4. Brown,W.C. 1984,The history of Power Transmission by radio waves,IEEE Trans. Microwave Theory and Techniques, 32(9) , 1230-1242. 5.Alam,S.B., Ullah,M.S., and Moury,S., 2013,,Design of a low power 2.45 GHz RF energy harvesting circuit for rectenna, ICIEV conf., 1-4. 6. Brown,W.C, Minms,J.R, and Heenan,N.I., 1965,An experimentalmicrowave powered helicopter, In Proc. IRE Int. Conv. Rec, 13( 5),225-235. 7. P. E. Glaser,P.E., 1968,Power from the sun, Sience, 162, 857-886. 8. Matsumoto,H., Microwave power trnsmission from space and related nonlinear plasma effects, In The Radio Science Bulletin, 1995,273,11-35. 9.Matsumoto,H., 2003,Research on solar power station and microwave power transmission in Japan: review and prospectives, In IEEE Microwave Magazine, 36-45. 10. Chin,C.H.K., Xue,Q., and Chan,C.H., 2005, Design of a 5.8-GHz Rectenna Incorporating a new patch antenna, In IEEE Antennas and Wireless Propargation Letters, 4, 175-178.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 69

Mobile Robot Loco Motion Avoiding Obstacles

Subir Kumar Das1, Kousik Roy2, Aniket Kumar3, Tanmoy Pandey4 , Partha Pratim Bhattacharya5 1 , 2 ,5 Asansol Engineering College, Vivekananda Sarani, Asansol, Burdwan, West Bengal – 713 304, India 3,4 Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, Maulana Abul Kalam Azad University of Technology, Kolkata, West Bengal, India [email protected]

Abstract: This paper describes a system which performs task-oriented navigation for an intelligent mobile robot. Local straight line movements are planned and monitored using this local model. The estimated position of the robot is corrected by the difference in position between observed sensor signals and the corresponding symbols in the local model. This system is useful for navigation in a finite, pre-learned domain such as a house, office, or factory. The techniques described in this paper are part of an effort to develop a low-cost ―Intelligent Mobile Robot‖. By the term intelligent we mean that the navigation is ―task-oriented‖ and that it is based on dynamically sensing and modelling the external world. The result of the problem describes the route through which the Robot traverses from its source to destination avoiding static obstacles.

Keyword: Path Planning, Autonomous Mobile Robot, Obstacle Avoidance

1 Introduction An autonomous mobile robot is a machine with the capability to traverse freely in the surroundings avoiding obstacles. Path planning of a mobile robot using sensor involves routing from an original position to a finishing one with or without complete prior information of the environment. Mobile robot navigation is an important task for robotic system and many researchers have shown their interest in it. The environment may be familiar or unfamiliar and may be static or dynamic. Depending on these significant features algorithms are developed. Autonomous path planning is related to the skill of a mobile robot moving around in unknown environment to reach a goal without colliding to any obstacles. We can classify path planning problems in two kinds: (1) static path planning, where a mobile robot to traverse through static environment, and (2) dynamic path planning, where a mobile robot creates a path in response to a changing environment. From a philosophical perspective, navigation in a dynamic environment has a clear solution: though on the basis of available information about the environment the path has been planned, the robot must also be free to take decisions in real-time on the basis of its current perceptions. The mobile robot is controlled by online sensor information obtained while navigating through the environment. The Robot will make its way automatically using algorithms so that the path traversed by it becomes optimum. It is expected to use the sensor to sense the existence of obstacles on it‘s routes as well as the condition of surface through which it moves and for avoiding such obstacles it deviates. Obstacle avoidance that may be static or dynamic is the primary requirement of path planning. The planning algorithm may also be for Autonomous Underwater Vehicle (AUV) application, an inspection and/or exploration mission where the robot is made-up to fly at a fixed altitude [1]. The researcher used different concept to the problem of dynamic situation. For instance Homotopy classes can be use to guide path planning algorithms [1]. Qingbao Zhu et al. proposed an algorithm for dynamic unknown environments using dynamic path re-computation and an improved scout ant algorithm [2]. Volkan Sezer proposed obstacle avoidance algorithm:

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 70

―Follow the Gap Method‖ [3]. Amitava Chatterjee et al. presented a two-layered sub goal based mobile robot navigation algorithm with vision system and IR sensors [4]. There are furthermore navigation methods based on bacterial foraging technique [5], Artificial Bee Colony Optimization [6], Genetic Algorithm [7], Dynamic Path Modification Sequence [8] Artificial Potential Field [9, 10], Fuzzy logic [11] and other kinds of real time path planning. In this paper, we propose a loco motion algorithm with the ability to avoid obstacle having regular shape. Before proceeding to the algorithm we are taking some assumptions which is given below.

2 Assumptions 1. The robot moves by one complete rotation of its wheel. 2. The robot moves in the 1st quadrant only. 3. The front position of the body and the wheels are in the same position. 4. The robot moves in a straight line. 5. The robot can view any obstacle when it is just one complete rotation of its wheel away from it. 6. Less than 10 turning is not possible for the robot. 7. The robot considers the distance it covers, the surface condition and the angle of the Source- Destination line. 8. The robot breaks the total path into initial source and initial destination. After one movement the initial destination becomes the source and it fixes up a new destination and so on. 9. The robot stores the positions from which it traverses. 10. The robot breaks the total path into initial source and initial destination. After one movement the initial destination becomes the source and it fixes up a new initial destination and so on.

3 Algorithm Transformation of Origin and Co-ordinate system We take the polar co-ordinate system for calculations. So the x and y axes becomes rcos and rsin as shown in Figure 1.

rsin θ r2sinθ 2

rcos r2cosθ θ 2 Figure 1 Polar co-ordinate system

The coordinate of S is (r1, 1) and of D is (r2,2). The angle between S and D is (1-2). If the angle of the S-D line is above 900, then there is a rotation of the co-ordinate axes by 900 anticlockwise as shown in Figure 2.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 71

rcos θ

rsin θ Figure 2 The angle between S and D

1. Angular Rotation of axes is done to make the S-D a 450 line (clockwise or anticlockwise). (i) If θ > 450 the rotation of the coordinate axes is anticlockwise. Then rcosθ and rsinθ are rotated by (θ-450). (ii) If θ < 450 the rotation of the coordinate axes is clockwise.Then rcosθ and rsinθ are rotated clockwise by (450 – θ). (iii) If θ = 450 the rotation of the coordinate axes is not required. 2. Calculating the surface condition of each line along every angle, weights are assigned to the surface condition and angle of movements. 3. The objective function is constructed with the help of the weights of the angle and the surface condition. It is maximized subject to the surface condition constraint i.e. the minimum surface condition below which the robot will be unable to move. The robot moves to the point containing the maximum value of the function containing the objective function and the constraints after saving the current position. Considering only 10 turning is possible for the robot, there will 91 paths for the robot of which the destination is at 450. 2 Let us suppose that the weights of each angle is xi and the weights given to the surface wj. 2 The total weight function F becomes xi + wj. It is to be maximized with respect to the minimum surface condition wj g. Where xi follows Symmetric Distribution say Normal Distribution for simplicity i.e. we assign the maximum weightage to the 450 line. The weightage decreases as the angle is increased to 90 or decreased to 0 and wj is random. We construct the Function in such a way that the 450 line gets the maximum weightage as 2 F = 2025 – (x – 45) + wj If there is no obstacle then the robot will not be able to move and so go to step 5 – 6 else go to step 4. 4. If there is any obstacle, the robot will calculate rcosθmin , rcosθmax, rsinθmin& rsinθmax . If rcosθmin> 0 & rsinθmin> 0, there is a path to pass. The Figure 3 – 7 shows different situations as discussed below. Weights of the angle between rcosθmin& rcosθmax and between rsinθmin& rcosθmax is assigned 0. (a) Weights of the angle is positiveif θ> θmax or θ < θmin and 0 otherwise.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 72

rsin θ

rsinθmax

rsinθmin rcosθ rcosθmin rcosθmax

Figure 3 Weights of the angle is positiveif θ > θmax or θ < θmin

(b) If rcosθmin> 0 and rsinθmin 0, there is a path to pass. Weights of the angle more than θmin and less than θmax will be assigned 0. 0 Weights of the angle is positive whenθmax< θ < 90 . Weights of the angle more than θmin and less than θmax will be assigned 0. 0 Weights of the angle is positive whenθmax< θ < 90 .

rsi nθ

rsin θmax

rco sθ Figure 4Weights of the angle is positive 0 whenθmax< θ < 90 .

(c) If rcosθmin 0 and rsinθmin > 0, there is a path to pass. Weights of the angles more than θmin and less than θmax will be assigned 0. Weights of the angle is positive when θmin> θ > 0.

rsin θ

rcos rcosθma θ x Figure 5 Weights of the angle is positive when θmin> θ > 0.

(d) If rcosθmin< 0 and rsinθmin < 0, there is no path to pass.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 73

rsin θ

rcos θ

Figure 6rcosθmin< 0 and rsinθmin < 0

There will be 900 anticlockwise rotation of the rcosθ and the rsinθ line. Then it will search for optimal path as in step 3. If the obstacle is positioned in such a way that it cannot move then it moves backward to the previous position.

rcos θ

rsin θ

Figure 7 The obstacle is positioned in such a way that it cannot move then it moves backward to the previous position.

If it moves back to its previous position by backtracking, then the angle which it traversed before to reach the current position is assigned 0. 5. The current position is saved. 6. Repeat step 1 – 6 until the destination is reached

4 Results and Discussion The presented method can be used for the moving of an autonomous mobile robot to get an optimized path. To understand this, the developed algorithm is assigned with weights to surface condition and angles of movement in a way such that the weights decrease as we move away from the 450 angle in both the direction i.e. towards 00 and towards 900, then we calculated the total weights to calculate the angle through which it moves. The data is generated in MS Excel and gives a view of how it will work.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 74

Weight of Weight of Surface Total Weight Iteration Angle Angle Condition (wi + wj) (wi2) (wj) 1 45 2025 86 2111 2 46 2024 96 2120 3 45 2025 85 2110 4 46 2024 95 2119 5 50 2000 95 2095 6 43 2021 98 2119 7 47 2021 93 2114 8 45 2025 99 2124 9 45 2025 95 2120 10 46 2024 95 2119

5 Conclusions We presented a method for the movement of an Automated Robot for optimizing the path; it traverses and is capable of avoiding the obstacles as well. To realize this we developed an algorithm by assigning weights to surface condition and angles of movement in such a way that the weights decrease as we move away from the 450 angle in both the direction i.e. towards 00 and towards 900.then we calculated the total weights to calculate the angle through which it moves. The algorithm developed might ignite further research on this topic. The algorithm can be extended to 3D space with the addition of another axis. That might lead to the application of Robotics on Aero plane Flights.

Acknowledgements The authors wish to acknowledge the help of the colleagues in their research group in the Asansol Engineering College, Maulana Abul Kalam Azad University of Technology (MAKAUT). The authors also acknowledge the constant encouragement of Dr. Ajoy Kumar Dutta, Prof. Dept. of Production Engineering, Jadavpur University during the period of this research work.

References 1. Hernandez Emili, Carreras Marc, Ridao Pere 2015,A comparison of homotopic path planning algorithms for robotic applications. Robotics and Autonomous Systems 64: 44–58 2. Qingbao Zhua,b, Jun Hua,b, Wenbin Caia,b, Larry Henschenc, 2011, A new robot navigation algorithm for dynamic unknown environments based on dynamic path re- computation and an improved scout ant algorithm. Applied Soft Computing 11: 4667–4676 3. Volkan Sezer, Metin Gokasan, 2012, A novel obstacle avoidance algorithm: ‗‗Follow the Gap Method‘‘. Robotics and Autonomous Systems 60: 1123–1134 4. N. Nirmal Singh, Avishek Chatterjee, Amitava Chatterjee, Anjan Rakshit, 2011, A two- layered subgoal based mobile robot navigation algorithm with vision system and IR sensors. Measurement 44: 620–641

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 75

5. Md. Arafat Hossain, Israt Ferdous, 2015, Autonomous robot path planning in dynamic environment using a new optimization technique inspired by bacterial foraging technique. Robotics and Autonomous Systems 64: 137–141 6. Preetha Bhattacharjee, Pratyusha Rakshit, Indrani Goswami (Chakraborty), Amit Konar, Atulya K. Nagar, Multi-Robot Path-Planning Using Artificial Bee Colony Optimization Algorithm, IEEE 2011 Third World Congress on Nature and Biologically Inspired Computing, 219-224 7. Pu Shi, Yujie Cui. Dynamic Path Planning for Mobile Robot Based on Genetic Algorithm in Unknown Environment. IEEE 2010 Chinese Control and Decision Conference, 4325-4329 8. Shital S. Chiddarwar, N. Ramesh Babu, 2011, Conflict free coordinated path planning for multiple robots using a dynamic path modification sequence. Robotics and Autonomous Systems 59: 508–518 9. S.S. Ge, Y.J. Cui, 2002, Dynamic Motion Planning for Mobile Robots Using Potential Field Method. Autonomous Robots 13: 207–222, 10. Emam Fathy Mohamed, Khaled El-Metwally, A.R. Hanafy. An Improved Tangent Bug Method Integrated with Artificial Potential Field for Multi-robot Path Planning. 2011 International Symposium on Innovations in Intelligent Systems and Applications (INISTA) 11. C. G. Rusu1, I. T. Birou1, E. Szöke1, 2010, Fuzzy Based Obstacle Avoidance System for Autonomous Mobile Robot. IEEE International Conference on Automation, Quality and Testing, Robotics, 1-6

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 76

Effect of process parameters on surface roughness and optimization in turning of Titanium Grade 5 Alloy

Soumojit Dasgupta, Manish Kumar Sharma, Souparna Bhowmick, Gurkamal Deep Singh, Mahendra Tripathi Department of Mechanical Engineering, Narula Institute of Technology,

[email protected] Abstract: Titanium Grade 5 Alloy (Ti6Al4V) has a wide range of industrial applications like the aerospace, medical, marine and chemical processing industries. This work was an investigation to study the effect of process parameters on machining characteristic of the alloy and thereby optimizing the parameters using the Taguchi design of experiments. The cutting speed (N), depth of cut (D), and feed rate (F) are considered as process parameters and surface roughness is the performance characteristic. The experiments were conducted using L27 Taguchi orthogonal design with three levels for each of the parameters. The effect of each process parameter on surface roughness is carefully analyzed. Turningoperation was performed on CNClathemachinewithCNMG120408NF3WPP01insert. Analysis of variance (ANOVA) was used to determine the level of importance of the machining parameters on surface roughness. Analysis of variance reveals that cutting speed has a major influence on surface roughness for turning on Titanium Alloy Grade 5 specimen. The optimum machining parameter combination was obtained by the analysis of signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio.

Keywords:Cutting Speed; Depth of Cut; Feed Rate; Performance Characteristic

1 Introduction Titanium and titanium alloys have great demand in both Engineering and Medical fields. This is due to its high strength, low weight and outstanding corrosion resistance. The above properties possessed by titanium and titanium alloys have led to wide and diversified range of successful application which demand high level of reliable performance in surgery and medical as well as in engineering and other major industries. Both titanium and its alloys have very high strength toweight ratio whichmakesitaverylightweightmaterialwithhighstrength.Italso possesses strength at elevated temperatures, a property which help it to withstand aircraft engine environment. It also finds applicationin chemical industry, power plant, oil and gas industries because ofitsoutstandingcorrosionresistance.However, titaniumandtitaniumalloysareverydifficult to machine because of its low thermal conductivity. It increases the temperature at the interface of tool and work piece material which affect the tool immensely. They require very large cutting force and power which lead to difficulties during machining.

Turning is considered as one of the most primary machining processes as it not only removes unwanted part of the material but it also can generate almost all kinds of contoured surface smoothly and it is a factor that has a higher influence on the manufacturing cost. Surface finish also affects the life of any product and hence it is desirable to obtain higher grade of surface finish at minimum cost.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 77

To determine the optimum cutting conditions to minimize the surface roughness a reasonable degree of accuracy is required. An alternative approach to determine the optimal process parameters was proposed by B. Singaravel, T. Selvaraj [1] and Sachin C Borse [2]. Kalipada Maity et.al. [5] studied the machinability of titanium (Grade 5) alloy with mist cooling system. Olurotimi Akintunde Dahunsi et.al. [7] and Srivastava, A. Ket. al. [10] inferred newer inferences in turning of titanium and Adel Taha Abbas et. al. [8] for pure aluminium alloys. Whereas Balaji Srinivasan et. al. [9] proposed new technique in developing diamond coated tool in machining titanium alloy.

An improvement in process efficiency may be attained by optimizing process parameter that identifies and determines the areas of critical process control factors leading to desired outputs or responses within acceptable variations. This research work deals with the optimization of these process parameters in order to minimize surface roughness and thus improve tool life.

2 Material and Methods Machining Tool The CNC lathe used for performing the turning operation is of Ace Designers make with the selected parameters by manual partprogramming. The following are the specification of the machine: 1. Weight – 1750 kgs.

2. Dimensions (LxBxH) - 1700x1300x17500 mm

Capacity Table 1Job holding capacity of machine Length between centers 200 mm Maximum Machining Diameter 190 mm

Spindle Table 2Spindle and chuck specification Spindle Nose Flat(Dia 110h6) Bore through spindle 36 mm Bar Capacity(Maximum) 25 mm Front Bearing Bore 60 mm Standard Chuck Size 135 mm Speed Range 50-400 rpm Spindle Motor (A.C. motor) Siemens-1PH8101-3.7/5.6 KW

Sides Table 3Stroke length and feed rate X-Axis Stroke 110 mm Z-Axis Stroke 200 mm Feed rate 0-10000mm/min

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 78

Rapid Traverse Rate: X-Axis & Z-Axis 15m/min

Threading Pitch 32(maximum) mm Feed Motor: X axis & Z axis Siemens-1FK7042-3NM

Tailstock Table 4Tailstock specification Quill Diameter 50 mm Quill Stroke 120 mm Taper in quill MT-4 Thrust (Adjustable) 80 mm Base Travel 300(max) kgf

Turret Table 5Turret specification Number of stations 8 Max. Boring bar diameter 25 mm Tool cross-section 16 x16 mm

Test Specimen Material Table 6 Chemical composition of Titanium Grade 5 alloy (Ti6Al4V) Element Percentage (%) Aluminium 6.20 Vanadium 3.98 Iron 0.20 Tin 0.001 Molybdenum 0.010 Carbon 0.040 Slicon 0.018 Nickel 0.038 Copper 0.001 Chromium 0.086 Titanium 88.70

Table 7 Mechanical property of Titanium Grade 5 alloy (Ti6Al4V). Mechanical Property Values UTS (MPa) 1025.787 Elongation (%) 15.5 Modulus of Elasticity (GPa) 114 Yield Strength (MPa) 830 Hardness (HRC) 36

Cutting Tool Insert The type of insert used was PVD coated carbide insert .ISO designation of PVD coated insert is CNMG 120408 NF3 WP001.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 79

Table 8 Insert specification Item Turning Tool Rake Positive

Insert type CNMG No. of edges 2

Chip Breaker NF3 Mounting hole 0.203" diameter Grade WP001 Mounting style Clamp

Insert Application Finishing Steel Compatibility Yes

Relief Angle 0 Degree Non-ferrous No

Insert thickness 0.1880" Super alloys No

Nose Radius 0.0310‖ Hardened No

Inscribed Circle 1/2"

Coated PVD

Cutting direction Neutral

3 Design of Experiments using Taguchi Method Taguchi technique is an optimization tool that uses process control and control charts with the product and process design to achieve a robust parameter design. Design of experiment is an approach in the manufacturing process to optimize the parameters, in this case cutting speed (N), depth of cut (D) and feed rate (F). The selection of such points in design space is usually referred to as design of experiments (DOE). In this paper related to turning operation of Titanium alloy grade 5, the experiments were conducted considering the above three main process parameters under three different levels, low, medium and high. Thus, accordingly, a three-level full factorial design of experiment gives (33 = 27) number of combinations. Taguchi methodology obtains the optimal or best condition by perceptive the reduction in variation of the results. To take into account the variation of results, the Taguchi method uses the S/N ratio to identify the quality characteristics applied in engineering design problems. Here, the signal is denoted as mean and noise as standard deviation. Thus, optimality is reached by Taguchi method by the maximization of the S/N ratio so that the effect of noise is minimized. For the present case of minimization of surface roughness, LB characteristic needs to be used. Furthermore, to know which of the process parameters have a significant influence on the surface roughness; analysis of variance (ANOVA) as discussed by Montgomery [3] is also performed.

4 Experimental Procedures The turning operation was carried out at fixed cutting conditions based on Taguchi Design of experiment with fresh tool inserts mentioned above. The cutting test run was periodically interrupted due to change in cutting parameters.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 80

5 Surface Roughness Measurements The surface roughness of the machined surface was measured at different locations with Tally surf of Mitutoyo make. The average Ra value was recorded which was displaced on the screen.

Methodology Studying the tool insert manufacturer‘s guidelines and literature reviews, cutting ranges were accordingly set to the different values of the cutting speed, feed rate and depth of cut. The cutting parameter levels were selected based on tool material and work-piece material and by studying different research papers. The experiments were carried out in wet cutting conditions. Cutting conditions were selected using Taguchi based design of experiments. Three levels and three parameters are selected for experimentation.

Table 9 The design factors along with their three chosen levels Parameters Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Cutting Speed(RPM) 250 350 450 Feed rate 120 150 180 (mm/min) Depth of cut(mm) 0.2 0.3 0.4

5 Results and Discussion

Table 10 The surface roughness values measured for different combination of the parameters Sl. No. Cutting Depth of cut Feed Rate Surface Speed (RPM) (mm) (mm/min) Roughness (µm) 1 250 0.2 120 7.262 2 250 0.3 120 8.768 3 250 0.4 120 5.660 4 250 0.2 150 5.225 5 250 0.3 150 3.973 6 250 0.4 150 4.957 7 250 0.2 180 5.871 8 250 0.3 180 6.097 9 250 0.4 180 8.101 10 350 0.2 120 2.173 11 350 0.3 120 2.758 12 350 0.4 120 2.231 13 350 0.2 150 5.836 14 350 0.3 150 5.056 15 350 0.4 150 5.047 16 350 0.2 180 4.953 17 350 0.3 180 3.866

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 81

18 350 0.4 180 3.189 19 450 0.2 120 2.226 20 450 0.3 120 1.573 21 450 0.4 120 1.997 22 450 0.2 150 2.933 23 450 0.3 150 2.781 24 450 0.4 150 2.744 25 450 0.2 180 3.794 26 450 0.3 180 4.714 27 450 0.4 180 4.835

It is evident from the results that the best surface finish characteristics obtained were at 450 RPM, 0.3 mm depth of cut, and 120 mm/min feed rate.

6 Analysis of Signal to Noise Ratio In Taguchi designs, a measure of robustness used to identify control factors that cut back variability in a product or process by minimizing the consequences of uncontrollable factors (noise factors). Control factors are those design and process parameters which will be controlled. In a Taguchi designed experiment, you manipulate noise factors to force variability to occur and from the results, determine the best control factor settings that build the method or product robust, or proof against variation from the noise factors. Higher values of the signal-to-noise ratio (S/N) identify control factor settings that minimize the effects of the noise factors. The signal-to-noise ratio measures how the response varies relative to the nominal or target denominations underneath completely different status. We can choose between completely different signal-to-noise ratios, reckoning on the goal of one‘s experiment. In the present work, S/N ratio analysis is done with surface roughness as the performance index and all the calculations are conducted in Minitab software [4]. As surface roughness is to be minimized, S/N ratio is calculated using LB (Lower the Better) criterion and is given by: S/N = −10 *log {Σ(Y2)/n)} Where y is the observed data andn is the number of observations

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 82

Figure 1 Main Effects Plot for S/N Ratio for process parameters

From the Main Effects Plot the optimum values of factors and their levels are:

Table 11: Optimum values of process parameters Parameters Optimum Values Cutting Speed (RPM) 450 Depth of cut (mm) 0.3 Feed rate(mm/min) 120 Table 12 Response table for S/N Ratio Depthof Level Speed(RPM) Cut (mm) Feed(mm/min) 1 -15.626 -12.311 -10.061 2 -11.300 -11.940 -12.301 3 -9.181 -11.855 -13.745 Delta 6.445 0.455 3.683 Rank 1 3 2 The average of the S/N ratio for each level of the factors of N, D and F are given in Table 12. The delta value is the difference between the largest and the lowest from among the values in each column. A large difference in the S/N ratio means that the factor or process parameter is a significant contributor to the achievement of the performance characteristic. It is found from

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 83

Table12 that Cutting speed (V) possesses the highest delta value, and hence, have the greatest influence over the surface roughness.

6.1 Analysis of Variance (ANOVA) The observed values for cutting speed, depth of cut and feed rate were determined in the turning process. The parameters influencing surface roughness was found out by using the ANOVA technique. Table 13 ANOVA table Source DF Adj SS Adj MS F-Value P-Value

Speed(RPM) 2 2.57427 1.28714 13.16 0.000

Depth Of Cut(mm) 2 0.01399 0.00699 0.07 0.931

Feed(mm/min) 2 0.82178 0.41089 4.20 0.030

Error 20 1.95686 0.09784

Total 26 5.36690

6.2 Confirmation Test The last step for the verification of results is the experimental confirmation test based on Taguchi's design approach. The optimal conditions are set for the significant factors which are set at economic levels and a selected number of experiments are performed at specified welding conditions. Average of the results from the confirmation experiment is compared against the predicted average based on the parameters and levels tested. This confirmation experiment is highly recommended by Taguchi to verify the experimental results [6]. In this study, a confirmation experiment was conducted by utilizing the levels of the optimal process parameters (V3D2F1) for which the surface roughness was found to be 1.632 µm.

7 Conclusions Statistically designed experiments were performed based on Taguchi‘s L27 orthogonal array to analyze the surface roughness as the response variable. Data analysis through the S/N ratio and ANOVA approaches drew similar conclusions. Both showed that cutting speed and feed rate had a major impact on surface roughness, followed by depth of cut. The minimum surface roughness is calculated as 1.573 µm by Taguchi‘s optimization method. The analysis of the confirmation experiment for surface roughness has verified the optimum cutting parameters (V3 D2F1), which are cutting speed = 450 rpm (V3), Depth of cut = 0.2 mm (D2) and feed rate = 120mm/min (F1).

Acknowledgements The authors wish to thank MSME Tool Room, Kolkata (Central Tool Room & Training Centre) for theirexperimental support of the present research.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 84

References 1. B. Singaravel, T. Selvaraj, 2016, ―Application of Taguchi Method for Optimization of Parameters in Turning Operation,‖ Journal for Manufacturing Science and Production, Volume 16, Issue 3 2. Sachin C Borse. 2014 ―Optimization of Turning Process Parameter in Dry Turning of SAE52100 Steel.‖ International Journal of Mechanical Engineering and Technology5, no. 12: 01-08. 3. D.C. Montgomery, 2001 ―Design and Analysis of Experiments,‖ Wiley, New York. 4. Minitab User Manual (Release 13.2), 2001 ―Making data analysis easier,‖ MINITAB Inc., PA, USA. 5. Kalipada Maity and Swastik Pradhan, 2017, ―Study of process parameter on mist lubrication of Titanium (Grade 5) alloy,‖ National Conference on Processing and Characterization of Materials, IOP Conference Series: Materials Science and Engineering 178 (2017) 012030. 6. P.J. Ross, 1996 ―Taguchi techniques for quality engineering,‖ McGraw-Hill International Editions, Singapore. 7. Olurotimi Akintunde Dahunsi and O.O. Awopetu, 2008, ―The use of an indirect impact quick-stop mechanism during the turning of α-titaniumBT5 alloy,‖ Int. J. Machining and Machinability of Materials, Vol. 3, Nos 1/2. 8. Adel Taha Abbas, Adham Ezzat Ragab, Ehab Adel El-Danaf and Essam Ali Al Bahkali, 2016, ―Effect of equal-channel angular pressing on the surface roughness of commercial purity aluminum during turning operation, ‖ Journal of Engineering Manufacture, 232(6), 995–1006. 9. Balaji Srinivasan, M S Ramachandra Rao and Balkrishna C Rao, 2016, ―Development of a dual-layered diamond-coated tool for the effective machining of titanium Ti-6Al-4V alloy,‖Journal of Physics D: Applied Physics, Volume 50, Number 1. 10. Srivastava, A. K., & Iverson, J., 2010 ―An Experimental Investigation Into the High Speed Turning of Ti-6Al-4V Titanium Alloy,‖ASME 2010 International Manufacturing Science and Engineering Conference, Volume 1.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 85

Educational Development of Rural Girl in India

Susanta Pandey Barasat Subhas Chandra College of Education Duttapukur, North 24 Paraganas West Bengal 700 125 [email protected]

Abstract: Education is a basic human right, vital to personal and societal development and well- being. Education enhances lives. It ends generation cycle of poverty and disease and provides the means for sustainable development. A quality basic education will better equip girls and boys with knowledge and skills needed to adopt healthy lifestyles, to protect themselves from HIV/AIDS and other sexually transmitted diseases, and to take, economic and political decision- making as they transit to adherenceand adulthood. As educated adults,they are more likely to have few children, tobe informed about appropriate child-rearing practices, and to ensure their children start school on time and are ready to learn. Many countries still do not have equality of education.There are many reasons for this including limited economic opportunities for girls; religious societal and financial constraints; and parental concern for girl's safety arising from cultural traditions.Parents see the cost of their son's education as an investment because they will care for them in their old age. Nearly three-fourth of India's population lives in rural areas. Education for rural people is a subject that requires serious thought from the central and state government and civil society as key component of actions and initiatives aiming at achievement of the goals of development by 2020. Education and training are two of the most powerful weapons to fight against rural poverty and achieve sustainable. Unfortunately, these are also among neglected aspects of rural development initiatives taken by central and state governments.

Key Words: Adulthood, Sexually, Rural Education, Unfortunately, Sustainable, Poverty 1 Introduction Education is a basic human right, vital to personal and societal development and well-being. Education enhances lives. It ends generation cycle of poverty and disease and provides the means for sustainable development. A quality basic education will better equip girls and boys with knowledge and skills needed to adopt healthy lifestyles, to protect themselves from HIV/AIDS and other sexually transmitted diseases, and to take an active role in social, economic and political decision-making as they transit to adherence and adulthood.[1]. As educated adults, they are more likely to have few children, to be informed about appropriate child-rearing practices, and to ensure their children start school on time and are ready to learn. Many countries still do not have equality of education. There are many reasons for this including limited economic opportunities for girls; religious societal and financial constraints; and parental concern for girl's safety arising from cultural traditions. Parents see the cost of their son's education as an investment because they will care for them in their oldage.Nearlythree- fourthofIndia'spopulationlivesinruralareas.Educationforruralpeople is a subject that requires serious thought from the central and state government and civil society as key component to factions and initiatives aiming at achievement of the goals of development by 2020. Education and training are two of the most powerful weapons to fight against rural poverty and achieve sustainable [2].Unfortunately, these are also among neglected aspects of rural development initiatives taken by central and state governments.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 86

Despite the fact that education is basic right in itself and an essential prerequisite for reducing poverty, improvingthelivingconditionsofruralpeopleandbuildingaself-sufficientsociety and access to education in rural areas is still much lower as compared to urban areas and the quality of education is poor. Non- attendance in school, early dropout of students, adult literacy and gender inequality in education are found very high in rural areas. Educational activities and training needs have to be linked to the specific requirements of the rural community. Focusing on skills and capacities useful for rural people would generate economic opportunities, improve livelihood and enhance the standard of living. A multi-layered educational approach involving all ages, formal, non-formal and informal education and training needs is necessary.

Of the three pillars of rural development viz. the village school, the village panchayat and the village co-operative, the school is the most vital component human development, them during change. Education holds the key to the stability of the democracy are best tested in the field of education where our investments are next only to defense. Starting from being an educationally backward country as a result of 150 years of colonial rule India today is the largest educational system in terms of students, teachers and educational institutions.

In rural India of ancient times there was a proverb: If you are planning for a year, plant coconut, if you are planning for five years, cultivate rice but if you are planning for future, send your child to the school. Those countries that have lagged in promoting girls' education have also lagged develop mentally. It is expensive–both politically and financially to eliminate gender gaps in school enrolment. But if developing countries wish to improve their living standards and catch up with the industrialized world, not educating one's girls to the same extent as boys will surely prove even more expensive. The conventional view of illiteracy is that it is closely linked to poverty [3]. While that is certainly true, there are numerous other factors responsible for the low level of literacy especially among females.

Factors Responsible for Illiteracy among Rural Girls

1. Inadequate school facilities. 2. Lack of qualified female teachers. 3. Lack of transport facilities. 4. Lack of hostel facilities for girls. 5. Fear of sexual harassment. 6. Fixed schooling hours.

These factors combine to produce unattractive environments in which girls must run the gauntlet of difficulties to remaining schools, as a result of which their learning is severely compromised even if they do remain. Countries that provided education for girls as well as boys experienced higher economic growth rates than those did not. Gender inequality in education also produced a moderate negative effect on economic growth and provision for basic needs. 2 Educational Status of Rural Girl Child Presently, India has the second largest educational system in the world after China, with 6,26,737 primary, 1,90,166 upper primary, 79,648 high schools, 28,487 higher secondary schools. Table 1 presents the growth of primary, upper primary, secondary and higher

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 87

secondary schools in rural India [4]. During this period the number of primary schools increased by more than 3times, while the upper primary schools and secondary/higher secondary schools increased by about 19 and 31 times respectively.

Table l Growth of recognized Educational Institutions in Rural Areas

Years Primary Upper Primary Secondary/Hr. Sec/ Inter/Pre-Degree 1950-51 175999 10413 2827 1980-81 444752 94249 34668 1990-91 482628 117279 50415 2002-03 573085 193864 87380

3 Enrolments in Rural Areas

Enrolment by category of schools in rural areas is presented in Table 2. It is evident that in all stages boys are enrolled more than girls. However this difference is higher towards the higher stages. Table 2 Enrolment by Category of Schools in Rural Areas (In Million)

Boys Girls Total Boys Girls Total Boys Girls Total 1965-66 25.09 13.06 38.1 4.71 1.19 5.90 1.88 0.33 2.21 5 1973-74 -30.18 16.86 47.0 6.27 2.13 8.40 2.96 0.69 3.65 4 1978-79 33.14 18.79 51.9 7.91 3.05 10.96 3.26 0.90 4.16 3 1986-87 39.82 25.98 65.8 12.08 5.64 17.72 5.71 2.08 7.79 0 1993-94 42.06 30.14 72.4 14.19 7.28 21.47 7.17 3.33 10.50 7 2002-03 42.28 38.09 80.3 29.83 24.31 54.14 37.71 28.5 66.30 7 9 4 Girls Enrolment The participation of girls at all stages of education has been increasing steadily through the years as may be seen from Table3. Since1950-51girls' participation has increased manifold in Primary, Middle Sec./Hr. Sec. stages and Higher Education levels from 28.1 per cent to 46.8 per cent, from 16.1 per cent to 43.9 per cent from13.3 percent to 41.3 percent, and from10.0 percent to 40.1 percent respectively. However, the girl's participation is still below 50 per cent at all stages of education. 5 School Dropouts among Rural Girls It is evident from Table 18.4 that school dropout rates among girls are higher than boys. But if we look at the figure, we find that over the year it has gone down at different stages of school education (from 1960- 61 to 2001-02).

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 88

Table 3 Percentage of Girls Enrolment to Total Enrolment by Stages Year Primary Middle Sec./Hr. Hr. Sec/Intermediate Education (Degree & (IX-XII) above level) 1950-51 28.1 16.1 13.3 10.0 1960-61 32.6 23.9 20.5 16.0 1970-71 37.4 29.3 25.0 20.0 1980-81 38.6 32.9 29.6 26.7 1990-91 41.5 36.7 32.9 33.3 2000-01 43.7 40.9 38.6 39.4 2002-03 46.8 43.9 41.3 40.1

Table 4 Dropout Rates (%) at Different Stages of School Education from 1960-61 to2001-02 Year Primary (IV) Elementary Secondary (I-VIIIClasses) (I-X Classes) Boys Girls Total Boys Girls Total Boys Girls Total 1960-61 61.7 70.9 64.9 75.0 85.0 78.3 N.A N.A N.A 1970-71 64.5 70.9 67.0 74.6 83.4 77.9 N.A N.A N.A 1980-81 56.2 62.5 58.7 68.0 79.4 72.7 79.8 86.6 82.5 1990-91 40.1 46.0 42.6 59.1 65.1 60.9 67.5 76.9 71.3 1992-93 43.8 46.7 45.0 58.2 65.2 61.1 70.0 77.3 72.9 1999-2000 38.7 42.3 40.3 52.0 58.0 54.5 66.6 70.6 68.3 2001-2002 38.4 39.9 39.0 52.9 56.9 54.6 64.2 68.8 6.0

6 Reasons for School Dropouts among Rural Girls There are various reasons of school dropouts amongst girls in rural areas. One of the major reasons for children being kept out-of-school was the lack of education of parents. The public report on basic education sought to find reasons for both dropouts and never- enrolment of children in five states (Rajasthan, Himachal Pradesh, Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh and Bihar). It was found that parents' attitude towards education have a major effect on education. It seems that when either of the parents is literate or especially when women are literate, they are more willing to send their children, especially girls, to the school. "The huge dropout rates, However, indicate that children, girls more often than boys, are needed for other activities such as looking after other siblings, domestic work and help with farm work [5].Parents play a crucial role in keeping young people in school. The degree and nature of family support are determined by such factors as a stressful/ unstable home life, socio-economic status, minority membership, siblings, completion of high school, single parent household, poor education of parents and primary language other than English. Another major reason was problem of financial constraints. The parent's educational status was poor and they did not give much importance to the education

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 89

of girls as they did to their sons. They perceived that sons support them in their old age. Main reasons for school dropout are presented inTable5.It can be inferred from the table that majority of the girls left the school because they required for household work, sibling care etc. Table 5 Main Reasons for Dropout: 1998-99 Rural Urban Total Male Female Male Female Male Female School too far away 1.0 5.9 0.2 1.0 0.8 4.8 Transport not available 0.4 1.6 0.1 0.2 0.3 1.3 Further education not considered 2.3 4.3 2.4 5.4 2.4 4.5

Required for household work 8/7 17.3 5.7 14.7 8-0 16.7 Required for work on farm/ 9.2 2.9 4.7 1.6 8.0 2 6 family business Required for outside work for 9.9 3.7 11.3 3.0 10.3 3.5 payment in cash or kind Cost too much 13.3 11.4 15.2 17.0 13.8 12.6 No proper school facilities 0.0 3.5 0.0 1.2 0.0 3.0 for girls Required for care of siblings 0.6 2.3 0.2 1.5 0.5 2.2 Not interested in studies 40.0 24.8 42.5 30.2 46.6 26.0 Repeated failures 5.3 3.7 6.0 6.1 5.5 4.2 Got married 0.2 8.5 0.1 4.9 0.2 7.7 Other 5.3 6.2 5.8 8.2 5.5 6.6 Don't know 3.8 4.0 5.7 5.1 4.2 4.2 Total per cent 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.00 100.0 100.0 Number of children 5475 51221 1852 1747 7327 7868 7 Hurdles to Girls Education Girls and boys both have hurdles to overcome. For girls the hurdles are, for the most part, higher and more frequent-simply because they are girls. Family poverty is also a barrier to education. Sending children to school may result in the loss of their income or help at home. The school may charge fees that the family knows it cannot meet or require a uniform that a family cannot afford. Many of the parents directly questioned the objective of educating their girl child. They stated that "Kudi Ne Padhiye Ke Kama. "Often, when a choice is to be made between sending a girl or a boy to school, the family will put its scarce resources into the education of the boys, believing that it is a better long-term investment. Compulsory and for "free" education laws may not exist, or may not be enforced. Early marriage and pregnancy are widespread in many countries, yet most have laws and policies that prohibit pregnant girls from attending school or returning to school after the birth of their child. Worldwide, an estimated 50 million children are not registered at birth, and the majority is female. In many countries, the lack of a birth certificate can prevent admission to school or block eligibility to take examinations. The international goals connected to girls education are the ensuring that by 2015 all children- particularly girls, children in difficult circumstances and those belonging to ethnic minorities have access to and complete free and compulsory primary education of good quality. Eliminating gender disparities in primary and secondary education by 2015, with a focus on ensuring girls, full and equal access to and achievement in basic education of good quality [6].

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 90

8 Conclusions It can be concluded that despite government and NGO initiatives the progress is not up to the mark. Although there is a considerable increase in the spread of educational institutions in rural areas but school dropout among girls has still witnessed substantially. However, participation of girls at all stages of education has been steadily increasing over the years, but in all stages (Primary, Middle, Upper Primary, Secondary/Hr. Secondary) boys are enrolled more than girls and this difference is higher towards the higher stages. Although both girls and boys have hurdles to overcome but it is in case of girls especially in rural areas. To overcome gender inequality in education by 2015, we have to eliminate gender disparities in primary and secondary education. It is now recognized that the girls' education is a cornerstone of development. Educated mothers invest more in their children's schooling, thus improving both families and societies' development prospects. They are also likely to have fewer children. Having fewer children allows families to invest more in the health and education of each child, thereby raising the productivity of future generations. Promoting girls' education, therefore, involves changing attitudes across society as well as spending money on increasing the number of school places available to girls. References 1. Das, Debendra Kumar (1991), Social Sector and Development, Experiences and Challenges, Deep and Deep Publications, NewDelhi. 2. Kaushal,M.P.andKaushal,M.P.(1973),DynamicsofPlannedSocialChange,BeeKayPublicati ons,Ludhiana (India). 3. Kotwal, Nidhi and Gupta, Neelima, "Reasons for School Dropouts among Rural Girls", Kurukshetra, The Monthly Journal, Ministry of Rural Development, Vol. 55, No. 1, November,2006. 4. Kumar, Krishna, "Recasting Education", The Times of India, New Delhi, 16 October,2004. 5. Ruhela, S.P. (2006), Education in Emerging Indian Society, International Publishing House,Meerut. 6. Sharma,Sheetal,"Education:FoundationforRuralDevelopment",Kurukshetra,TheMonthlyJ ournal,Ministry of Rural Development, Vol. 55, No. 1, November,2006.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 91

Assessment of Training Need of High School Dropouts: A study in Joypur Gram Panchayat of Murshidabad District of West Bengal

Tapati Bhadra(Banerjee) Department of Rural Development Studies, University of Kalyani, Kalyani, Nadia [email protected] Moumita Mondal Field Coordinator, iKOnet Research & Consultants Pvt. Ltd., Kolkata-70064. [email protected]

Abstract: In India the problem of school dropout is still very much relevant and is prominently evident in case of high school students in rural as well as urban areas. Several studies show that though it has considerably dropped at primary level, still a bulk of students discontinue the high school without completing the secondary level of education due to several reasons and the perspectives also vary according to socio-economic and cultural situation and gender of the concerned student. In rural areas, the dropouts have lesser scope to explore the further scope to earn which often acts as one of the major factor for discontinuation particularly for boys. Proper identification of training needs of the school dropouts may become helpful for both administration and the students in finding out effective measures to counter the problem of school dropouts and addressing the issues of earning livelihoods for them. The present study is completely based on primary data and an attempt has been made to identify the training needs of the high school drop outs of Joypur Gram Panchayat of Murshidabad District of West Bengal to address the causes of dropouts and effective involvement of the dropouts in the main stream of rural livelihood.

Key Words: High school dropouts, Rural livelihood, Training need

1 Introduction In India the problem of school dropout is still very much relevant and is prominently evident in case of high school students in rural as well as urban areas. Several studies show that the rate of dropout has considerably reduced at primary level (Source: National Productivity Council) during last five years but still a bulk of students discontinue high school without completing the secondary level of education due to several reasons. The reason for discontinuation largely varies according to socio-economic and cultural situations and gender of the concerned student but the trend is alarmingly prominent and also effects on the studies of the fellow students of the same class. In rural areas, the drop outs from high school have lesser scope to explore the further possibilities to earn which often acts as one of the major reason for discontinuation, particularly for boys.

2 Scenario and Problems of dropouts In India and West Bengal As per the available data on drop-out rate (Source: National Productivity Council), drop-out rate at upper primary education level has been decreased by 11.4% during the period from 2000-01 to 2008-09 in West Bengal. Although, the drop-out rate is declining year by year, but this factor remains a major challenge before the Government, planners and policy makers as to how to stop the drop-out and ensure the guarantee of education to all as provisioned in the mandate.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 92

The drop-out rates vary from state to state, district to district and school to school. In West Bengal State, the lowest drop-out rate has been observed in Murshidabad district which has high concentration of minority population (Source: National Productivity Council). The same study shows that, in this district, there were no drop-out at primary, secondary and 148 senior- secondary level schools among Muslim boys and girls. However, at upper primary level, some drop-out among Muslim boys and girls ranging from 0.21 to 1.36% were reported. It is generally assumed that poverty and need to support the concerned families, Illiteracy of family members, early marriage among Muslim girls are the main reasons for drop-out of Muslim minority students in Murshidabad district. A large section of drop out students has no clear idea regarding the further scope of earning opportunities for which they really urge for. Training need assessment has its importance for following reasons- i. TNA is the only way to verify and validate the need, focus, scope and target groups for a training programme. ii. TNA can be proactive or reactive. In both cases, the goal of TNA is to identify performance issues that can be remedied through the introduction, practice of specific and measureable knowledge and skill sets. Choice of Career plays an important part in one‘s life. Career is not a chance but a choice. Students must be able to explore them and find out wide varieties of career opportunities in the ever changing current world scenario. Entrepreneur Development Programme is a programme which helps in developing the entrepreneurial abilities.

3 Relation of dropouts and training needs Proper identification of training needs may help the drop out students to search for the proper courses and activities which may lead them towards a steady livelihood. TNA of dropout student is important because it generally focus on how dropout students will be self motivated, self-confident and self-reliant to involve themselves in economic activities to lend in better life in the society.

4 Objectives of the study The objectives of the study are as follows- i. To identify the factors influencing dropout student and its reasons. ii. To study the present activity of dropout student. iii. To determine the training needs of dropout students.

5 Methodologies Selection of the study area The Present study has been carried out with the dropout students under the jurisdiction of Joypur Gram Panchayat of Khargram Panchayat Samity of Murshidabad district in West Bengal purposively as no study has been conducted to address such issue in the area previously. This area is a mixed population area consisting of minorities and other communities of Murshidabad district. All the High schools of the said Panchayat have been selected for collection of data of the drop out students of the schools. The selected schools are Joypur High School (H.S.), Bhalkundi High School and Saundi High School. With the help of the student register a list has been prepared for the drop out students who left school after class eight during last three years. Till the date of the survey, 130 dropout students‘ names are enlisted but 50 percent (65 students) dropout students have been randomly selected for

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 93

interview with a structured questionnaire. Qualitative discussion is done for analysis of the identified training needs.

6 Result & Discussion Present status of the dropout student Demographic Profile of dropout students are as follows: The demographic issues explored in this study were age, social status, Residential status and Family status. Table 1 shows the demographic profile of the participants with some specific indicators. The age range for the participants was from 14 to 18 years. Among the studied students, 24 respondents are below 16 years and remaining 41 respondents are 16 years & above. In terms of category, majority of respondents (40%) are from General and a few of them from SC (60%) categories. About more than 60% respondents belong to Hindu religion and 40% respondents belong to Muslim religion.

Table 1Profile of Drop out students under the study: Demographic indicators Particulars No. of students *

Age Below 16 26(40) 16-18 39(60) Social classification SC 39(60) Others 26(40) Marital Status Married 6(9.2) Unmarried 59(90.8) Religion Hindu 38(58.5) Muslim 27(41.5) *Figures in parenthesis show the percentage

Source: Primary data

Table 2 Educational profile Particulars No. of students * Level of education Class-VIII 35(53.8) Class-IX 30 (46.2) *Figures in parenthesis show the percentage

The table shows that the educational profile of the studied drop outs. Out of the total surveyed person about 54 percent students had attained class-VIII and 46 percent students have attained class-IX. Majority of them expressed that they left school because of their family, health and/or institutional problems, early marriage, losing interest to go to school etc. Most of the students belong from needy families and they are also the first learner of their family. So no one is present in their families who can guide them in reading. The study finds that most of the boys have the pressure to earn for their households as majority of them are from lower income group. Hence they have started earning by engaging themselves in different income generating activities. In case of the girls, early marriage has forced them to leave school as parents are more interested in marrying their girls off instead of sending them for completion of school. Out of 65 students, 32 have left the school 1 year ago and 33 left school 2 years ago. Now they are engaged with different activities within village and also outside the village area.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 94

In the course of study it has been found that , a large section of the boys are engaged in various income generating activities and majority of the girls were got married after dropping out from the schools. Most of them are engaged as agricultural labor, driver, assistant of shop keeper, assistant of masonry work, assisting in welding work. Even a very of them have started small business like food shop, stationary shop etc. The diagram shows the present activities of the dropout students.

Source: Primary data

 Identified Training Needs

Table 3 shows 25 students have opted for motivational of training and 30 student required EDP training. Some of them who lost their interest, motivational training is required to them that they start any activity and economic stability of them.

Table 3 Career Guidance Training & EDP training: Types of Training No of participants

Requirement of Career guidance training 25 Requirement of EDP training 30 j

Source: Primary data Skill development training Skill development training includes participants will begin considering their career choice and get ideas from their peers and participants will learn about career choices that they have not heard of before. As per the survey data, the skill development training includes Tailoring, Beauty parlor, computer, Masonry, Mobile repairing, Welding, Driving and Food processing.

Following diagram shows the training needs on skill development of dropout students-

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 95

Source: Primary data

7 Conclusions The socio economic condition often plays critical roles for drop out of the high schools students. The study finds despite of several initiatives taken to check the incidents of drop out by the concerned departments and local administration but it yet to yield the expected result. The proper identification of training need of drop out student is crucial in the process of planning for education and livelihood particularly in case of the rural areas. It may help the local panchayat to organize the awareness and motivational camps to coordinate with local youth and help them to build as a prospective human resource of the area.

Acknowledgements We sincerely acknowledge to the following personalities: Prasanto Moulik, Head Teacher of Bhalkundi High School. Subhankar Roychowdhury, Head Teacher of Joypur High School (H.S.). Tapan Ghosh, Head Teacher of Saundi High School. Tapas Saha, Gram Panchayat Pradhan of Joypur Gram Panchayat. All the students, who have spent their time to answer the questions during interview

References 1. Questionnaire survey 2. School record 3. Educational Statistics at a Glance- 2014-15, Ministry of Human Resource Development Department of School Education & Literacy, GOI, New Delhi, Retrieved on Oct, 13, 2019 from https://mhrd.gov.in/sites/upload_files/mhrd/files/statistics-new/ESG2016.pdf.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 96

4. Study to find out the reasons for high drop-out rates among all Minority Communities, National Productivity Council, New Delhi, Retrieved on Oct, 14, 2019 from http://www.minorityaffairs.gov.in/sites/default/files/NPC%20Report.pdf.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 97

HIV/AIDS Epidemic: Knowledge towards HIV/AIDS among adolescent students of North 24 Parganas District in West Bengal

Kalyani Mitra Education Department, JIS University, Kolkata-700 109

Abstract: Human Immune Deficiency Virus (HIV) is that type of virus which causes AIDS (Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome). This virus only survives and multiples in human body fluid such as semen, vaginal fluids, breast milk, blood and saliva. HIV attacks the body immune system and reduces the body resistance to all kind of illness. In India first case of AIDS reported in1986. 2.14 million people (approximate) of India have been suffering from HIV in2017, out of which 0.22% in the age of 15-49 years of age group(HIV prevalence estimates by the NACO--- National AIDS Control Organization). This study is to find out the knowledge towards HIV/ AIDS among adolescent students in West Bengal. Immune Deficiency Syndrome due to the HIV is a chronic multisystem disease. It is also a disease that causes Physical, social and psychological morbidity. Education has become one of the most important weapons in the battle against the spread of AIDS among adolescent s who have consistently been identified in surveillance data and knowledge, attitude and behavior studies as a high-risk group. Therefore, educating adolescent students regarding various issues related to HIV/AIDS can help in minimizing the spread of HIV infection by developing appropriate attitudes, values and modification of behavior. The sample was drawn from a population of six Higher Secondary School (H.S) pupils from North 24 Pgs. in West Bengal. In this study purposive random sampling method was used for the collection of data. The questionnaire was select ed and choice for collection of data. Data were collected using ―5-point Likert scale‖. The findings of the study indicate that location /dwelling place of the institution influences knowledge and attitude of students about HIV/AIDS.

Keywords: HIV/AIDS, Adolescent, knowledge and attitude

1 Introduction Human Immune deficiency virus (HIV) causes Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome (AIDS).Today, it has emerged as a serious issue for public health entire the World and especially for the developing countries. HIV/AIDS causes Physical, Social, and Psychological morbidity in human being. HIV /AIDS is a major global public health issue, 36.9 million people were living with HIV (1.8 million –Children), globally HIV prevalence of 0.8% among adults. Approximately 25% of these people have no idea about this virus.77.3 million People have become infected with the HIV/AIDS epidemic, when started and at the same time 35.4 million people have died due to AIDS-related illnesses. In 2017, 940,000 people have died of AIDS-related illnesses. The majority of people living with HIV are found in low- and middle- income group of different countries, within this 66% living in Sub-Saharan Africa. All over the world, health care services have the goal of attaining a highest level of health. For ensuring a continued state of a high level of health for every human being it is necessary not only to provide adequate and suitable facilities for prompt detection of illness, treatment, re-habitation etc. but also to arrange for suitable preventive care and provide facilities [1, 2].

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 98

Table 1Global Distribution of new infections of HIV/AIDS among population group in 2017 HIV/ AIDS Infected persons Statistics Sex Workers 3% People injected drugs 8% Gay men , men sex with men 18% Transgender women 1% Clients of sex workers and other sexual 18% partners of key populations Rest of Population 52% Source: UNAIDS special analysis 2018.

According to National AIDS control organization in India there were 2.12 million persons infected by the HIV/AIDS (NACO 2012). NACP (National AIDS control Program) implemented by the NACO under the Ministry of Health and Family Welfare launched in 1992. This is financially supported by the Government of India, the Global Fund and The World Bank. Every year, on first December is observed as a Worlds AIDS Day. This is an awareness program against HIV/AIDS. In India NACO is a nodal organization which acts as prevention and control of HIV/AIDS in India. NACO formulate some policy and implementation of program.

In India, the HIV / AIDS occurred by sexual transmission of people. Amongst the World countries, India is the third largest country of HIV Epidemic. The prevalence of HIV/AIDS among adults of age 15-49 Years was an estimated 0.2% In India in the year 2017. It was estimated that 1.6% of female workers were infected by HIV. This figure varies from State to state. In Maharashtra‘s 7.4% female sex workers infected by HIV/AIDS and in Andhra Pradesh 6.3% of female workers infected by HIV/AIDS. The highest National HIV infection levels in Asia continental to be found in South East Asia , where combination of unprotected paid sex ( HIV prevention 2.2%), sex between men (4.3%), along with unsafe injecting drug use(9.9%) , transgender people (7.2%) fuelling the Epidemics in most countries [3, 4, 5, 6].

2 Different Categories of people affected by HIV/AIDS 2.1 Men who have sex with men (MSM): A Study conducted in 2015 across 12 Indian cities found 7% tested positive for HIV. In September 2018 India‘ Supreme Court decriminalized homosexuality between consenting adults. 2.2 People who inject drugs (PWID): In 2016 it was found that 1.7 million people in India were estimated to inject drugs. In 2018 study estimated that unsafe injecting and sexual risk behaviors among around 20,000 Indian men who inject drugs. 2.3 Hijras /Transgender People: In 2017 in India it was estimated that 3.1% of transgender people affected by HIV /AIDS 2.4 Migrant Workers: In 2014 UNAIDS reported that 75% of women testing positive in INDIA have husband who is emigrant laborer. 2.5 Truck Drivers: NACO estimated that 0.2% of truck drivers were living with HIV IN 2017- 2018

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 99

Background Media Education Characteristics Televisi Formal Age on Informal Religion Radio Residence Print Employment

Knowledge and Awareness on HIV/AIDS and other sexual behavior

Figure 1 Conceptual Framework of Interplay between Explanatory and outcome variables studied by Wouhabe Maria

3 Objectives of the study 1. To raise consciousness adolescent student in West Bengal regarding HIV/AIDS. 2. To make aware adolescent students in west Bengal regarding problem about HIV/AIDS 3. To raise conscious adolescent students in west Bengal regarding superstition about HIV/AIDS 4. To find out the attitude towards HIV/AIDS Among adolescent students in West Bengal. 4 Hypotheses H1: There is a significant difference between class XI Rural pupils and urban pupil‘s knowledge towards HIV/AIDS. H2: There is a significant difference between class XI Urban pupils and Industrial pupil‘s knowledge towards HIV/AIDS. H3: There is a significant difference between class XI Rural pupils and Industrial pupil‘s knowledge towards HIV/AIDS. H4: There is a significant difference between class XI Male and Female students‘ knowledge towards AIDS.

5 Assumption of the study:  It is assumed that the selected areas represent the other areas of West Bengal.  It is assumed that the randomly selected samples taken from each area for the study represented the whole population of that area.  It is assumed that the selected samples expose their knowledge regarding HIV/AIDS represent the whole population.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 100

6 Method of study:

6.1 Tools construction: There are different types and techniques for construction of tool i.e. questionnaire, rating scale, check list, interviews etc. In this study questionnaire was selected and choice for collection of data. The present study was carried out in three locations, namely Urban, rural and industrial areas of North 24 Parganas districts of West Bengal. A suitable questionnaire used for measurement of knowledge about HIV/AIDS among adolescent age group. Data were collected using 5-point Likert Scale from 300 samples

6.2 Dimensions of knowledge test:  Education  Socio-economic status  Superstition  Transmission  Prevention  Identification  Safe Motherhood & child care  Tendency  Prognosis 6.3 Selection of Sample: The sample was drawn from a population of six Higher Secondary School ( H.S) pupils from North 24 Pgs in West Bengal .Purposive random sampling was used in this study . Defining purposive sampling Fraenkel and Wallen [7] say that it is choosing a sample which is representative with respect to certain known characteristics of the population. In knowledge test, a sample of 300 adolescent students was selected from Different schools. All the samples were divided according to their habitat and sex. The following chart in Figure 2 helps to understand the scheme. 300

Rural (100) Urban (100) Industrial (100)

Male(50) Female(50) Male(50) Female(50) Male(50) Female(50)

Figure 2 Sample chart 7 Statistical Analyses For specifying the Mean Differences in the knowledge about AIDS of the students of three strata and two sexes, the investigator used ―t-test‖. The t- test helps us to determine whether two groups differ significantly in Mean performance and enables us to say that there is a difference between the Means of the population from which the samples were drawn.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 101

Table 2 The t- value for knowledge test scores about AIDS of the Urban Pupil and Rural pupil. Difference Sample No. Mean S.D Df ―t‖ value between Urban 100 134.00 14.42 198 4.33* Rural 100 125.99 11.67 Significant at the 0.05 and 0.01 levels

Table 2 The t- value for knowledge test scores about AIDS of the Industrial pupil and Rural Pupil. Difference Sample No. Mean S.D Df ―t‖ value between Industrial 100 138.49 14.44 198 6.72* Rural 100 125.99 11.67

 Significant at the 0.05 and 0.01 levels

Table 3. The t -value for knowledge test scores about AIDS of the Industrial Pupil and Urban pupil.

Difference Sample No. Mean S.D Df ―t‖ value between Industrial 100 138.49 14.44 198 2.20* Urban 100 134.00 14.42

 Significant at the 0.05 and 0.01 levels

Table 4. The t value for knowledge test scores about AIDS of the Male and Female pupil.

Difference Sample No. Mean S.D Df ―t‖ value between Male 150 133.10 14.81 298 1.15 Female 150 131.08 15.64

 Not Significant at the 0.05 level.

8 Interpretation of Result FINDING 1: The Mean score of urban pupil is 134.00 with SD 14.42, whereas the Rural pupil Mean score is 125.99 with SD 11.67. The computed t- value is 4.33. From this statistical analysis it is state that the knowledge of Urban pupil towards HIV/ AIDS is differ significantly than that of Rural pupil Knowledge Test. So Hypothesis 1 is accepted. FINDING 2: The Mean score of Industrial pupil is 138.49 with SD 14.44, whereas the Rural pupil Mean score is 125.99 with SD 11.67. The computed t - value is 6.72. From this statistical

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 102

analysis it is state that the knowledge of Industrial pupil towards HIV/ AIDS is differ significantly than that of Rural pupil Knowledge Test. So Hypothesis 2 is accepted.

FINDING 3: The Mean score of Industrial pupil is 138.49 with SD 14.44 whereas the Urban pupil Mean score is 134.00 with SD 14.42. The computed t -value is 2.20.From this statistical analysis it is state that the knowledge of Industrial pupil towards HIV/ AIDS is differ significantly than that of urban pupil Knowledge Test. So Hypothesis 3 is accepted.

FINDING 4: The mean score of male pupil is 133.10 with SD 14.81, whereas the female pupil mean score is 131.08 with SD 15.64. The computed t -value is 1.15 .From this statistical analysis it is state that the knowledge of Male pupil towards HIV/ AIDS does not differ significantly than that of Female pupil Knowledge Test. So Hypothesis 4 is rejected.

9 Conclusions It is widely recognized by social development practitioners that a nation political will is the first and most important step towards the introduction and or sustaining of policies in nation that on the social, economic and Health development of its people. In drawing to global health HIV/AIDS has also brought great attention to the impact that disease have had in developing countries. In the world India has the third largest developing country which is suffering from HIV /AIDS. In 2017 it was found that HIV prevalence among adults (15-49 years aged) was 0.2%. This is small to compare the other middle-income countries but In India for its huge population (1.3 billion people) this equates to 2.1 million people living with HIV/AIDS. In India NACO (National AIDS control Organization) is continuously trying to prevent the HIV prevalence by take care , continuous treatment for those who are already infected and more effective awareness campaigns in the fight against HIV/AIDS. But unfortunately this is not possible for this organization to achieve the ultimate success to reduce the prevalence of HIV/AIDS. Adolescent comprise 20% of the World‘s total population. Out of 1.2 billion adolescent worldwide, about 85% live in the developing countries. In India there are 190 million adolescent comprising 21% of India‘s total populations (2011 Census Report).

The present study demonstrates about knowledge regarding HIV/AIDS on the basis of gender and the locality and other determining factors. The study reveals that knowledge towards AIDS have a distinct variation among urban, rural and industrial inhabitants, But it is interesting that there is no difference on gender towards the knowledge regarding AIDS. It may be predicted that the present study will be helpful to have a preventive measures in different corners of our country where education is a big hand to control the overall situation. It also help health care professionals and policy- makers develop a culturally sensitive and needs specific educational programs for students.

References 1. Committee on HIV prevention strategies in the United States, Institute of Medicine (2000) . No Time to lose: Getting more from HIV PREVENTION, Washington, DC: National Academy Press. 2. Khoza , L.B, (2004) . Adolescent ‗knowledge , beliefs and experiences regarding sexual practices ‗, Health SA Gesondheid, 9(3): 34-41.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 103

3. Leili, S. , Elham , S .and Farkhondeh, S. (2008). Apopulation based survey of HIV/AIDS knowledge and attiyude in general public, Bandar-Abbas, IRAN. Pak.j.Med Sci.6:838-44. 4. Alary M, Banandur P, Rajaram SP et al (2014). Increased HIV prevention program coverage and decline in HIV prevalence among female sex workers in south India. Sex Transm Dis 41: 380– 387. 5. Website: www.avert.org https://doi.org/odi.12457 6. https://www.livemint.com/politics/66RTqDzQBvPBe6PtXLd9UN/214-MN-people-with- HIV-IN-India-NACO.html. 7. Wallen, N. E., & Fraenkel, J. R. (2013). Educational research: A guide to the process. Routledge.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 104

Postmortem analysis of severe cyclonic storm

Abhijit Banerjee1, Sushreeta Pal1, Arkadip Nandan1, Pranay Kr. Saha1, DhrubaJyoti Das1and Rina Bhattacharya1

1Department of Physics JIS University, 81 Nilgunge Road, Kolkata-700109 [email protected]

Abstract: Tropical cyclones are one of the most devastating natural calamities our environment through the loss of property, life, communications etc. Therefore analysis of meteorological data from the origin to landfall of a cyclone has required minimizing the disaster impact on ground. The main emphasis of present study is to assess severity of low-pressure system for safety measures and rehabilitation works In this paper an attempt is made to reanalysis 21 extremely severe cyclonic storm during the periods 1970 to 2019 emphasizing the tropical cyclone having landfall on 2nd May, 2019 on the North East coast of India.

Keywords: depression, deep depression, cyclone, eye, eye-wall

1 Introduction The tropical cyclone is a quickly rotating storm system having diameter 320 km. It is characterized by a low-pressure core of about 960 millibars with a low-level atmospheric closed circulation, strong winds about a central region of low atmospheric pressure area of the storm, where the wind rotates around [1]. Based on their location and strength, the cyclone is defined by several names such as hurricane, tropical storm, typhoon, tropical depression and cyclone [2]. On 26 th April, 2019 a depression was formed at the West of Sumatra which was classified by Indian Meteorological Department (IMD) as ―Disturbance in Bay of Bengal 02‖ (BOB 02) [3]. On 27th April the storm moved northward and slowly turned into deep depression. On 30th April 00:00 UTC storm recorded as very severe cyclonic storm by the IMD. After 12.00 UTC IMD named Fani as an extremely severe cyclonic storm [4, 5]. On 2nd May the eye made its first appearance having diameter 28km. Landfall occurred at about 02:30 UTC on 3rd May on east coast of Odisha with wind speed more than 200 km per hour and the storm's surge was about ten feet [6]. After land fall the storm passed through Bangladesh and Bhutan. In this paper we have given emphasis on the physics behind the formation of Fani from the postmortem analysis of low-pressure systems.

2 Physics behind cyclone The tropical cyclone is formed by the water vapour and heat transfer from the warm sea surface to the overlying air. This is initially induced by evaporation process from the sea surface. As the hot and wet air rises, expansion and cooling occurs, it becomes saturated and latent heat released through the water vapour condensation. The core of the air column of the developing disturbance is warmed and also moistened in this process. The three-dimensional structure of the wind field of the cyclone has been divided into two parts viz primary and secondary circulation. The rotational part of the wind flow is the primary circulation whereas the radial and vertical flow constitutes the secondary circulation. The physically idealized concept of this heat flow is Carnot

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 105

heat engine form in the atmosphere [7]. If the humid external air is present then the circulation will continue to increase. Intensification of tropical cyclones is more if there is slight change in the wind speeds with the height above the surface. The movement of the wind is driven by the two factor first is the low-pressure core and the Coriolis force developed due to the Earth‘s rotation [8]. Uniform increase of the speed of the wind towards the centre is observed. Deep convective cells known as rain band surrounding the eye are developed around the centre. Eye wall is the most destructive region of the tropical cyclone. The schematic diagram is shown in Figure 1.

Figure1 Schematic diagram for tropical cyclone development

The need of conservation of angular momentum creates the secondary circulation along with the primary rotating flow in a tropical cyclone [9]. For a rotating planet absolute angular momentum (M) is given by the following equation

(1) where, = Coriolis parameter, = Azimuthal wind speed, and = radius to the axis of rotation. The theoretical limit on the strongest wind speed that a cyclone can attain is determined by the above facts. As there is linear increase of the speed, a positive feedback known as Wind-Induced Surface Heat Exchange feedback is developed on the system [10]. This upper bound i.e the "maximum potential intensity" is expressed as

(2) where, = Temperature of the sea surface in K, = Temperature of the outflow in K, = The surface and the overlying air enthalpy difference in J/kg, and = The surface exchange dimensionless quantity of enthalpy and momentum coefficients respectively. : The surface-air enthalpy difference, where, = the saturation enthalpy of air at sea surface temperature and pressure at sea level and = the boundary layer enthalpy of the air present over the surface.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 106

A tropical cyclone can be thought as a Carnot heat engine. The conversion of input heat energy from the surface into the energy to do mechanical work against surface friction is done by this engine. At equilibrium the net energy production rate in the system should equal to the energy loss rate due to surface frictional dissipation [11]. The total net energy production rate per unit surface area is hence given by,

3 Classifications of tropical cyclone The India Meteorological Department monitors the tropical cyclone develops between 100°E and 45°E in the North Indian Ocean. The cyclone so developed is named as non frontal synoptic scale cyclone. They have originated in the tropical and subtropical water and are having convection in organized form with a definite cyclonic surface wind circulation. Four categories of low-pressure systems had been developed between 1924 and 1988. During 1988 new category "severe cyclonic storm had been introduced for tropical cyclones where wind speed is greater than 64 kt (119 km/h) [12]. In 1999 two new categories (i) Very Severe Cyclonic Storm and (ii) Super Cyclonic Storm, were added [13, 14]. The IMD had modified the intensity scale as shown in Table 1. The deviation of wind speed from the average value of different category of low- pressure system is depicted in Fig 2.

Table 1 Low pressure system

Category Name Sustention of wind speed at 3 minute on average in kt 1 Depression 17–27 2 Deep Depression 28–33 3 Cyclonic Storm 34–47 4 Severe Cyclonic 48–63 Storm 5 Very Severe Cyclonic Storm 64–89 6 Extremely Severe Cyclonic 90–119 Storm 7 Super Cyclonic Storm Greater than 120

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 107

Figure 2 Deviation of wind speed with the category of low-pressure system

4 Comparison of the speed and pressure of various severe cyclones Characteristic parameter variations of some of the deadliest cyclones happened during last 20 year in North Indian Ocean is presented here. These cyclones are ―Bhola‖ Andhra Pradesh cyclone, Machilipatnam Cyclone, Nisha, Bijli, Laila, Viyaru, Gujarat Cyclone, Maarutha, Strongest Odisha Cyclone (BOB 06) ,Phyan, Nilam, Helen, Phailin, Hudhud, Vardah, Ockhi, Titli, Gaja, Phethai and Fani,[15 – 35]. Wind speed anomalies of these 21 cyclones having wind speed with 3 minute and 1-minute sustention and the variation of core pressure of the cyclones are depicted in Figure 3. The abscissa of all the graphs is the numbers 1 to 21 which signifies the 21 deadliest cyclones happened in the North Indian Ocean.

Figure 3Characteristic variation of wind speed with (a) 3 minute sustention (b) 1 minute sustention (c) wind pressure at the core region of the storm with the number of cyclones during 1970 to 2019

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 108

Figure 4Variation of different events for 21 cyclones for the period 1977 to 2019.

A cyclonic storm may or may not have passed through all the seven events such as depression, deep depression, cyclonic storms, severe cyclonic storm, very severe cyclonic storm, extremely severe cyclonic storm and super cyclonic storm. The interesting feature comes from this variation is that the near peak values of five events comes only for the last cyclonic storm, Fani though in case of other cyclonic storm one or more event present in higher values but not more than four events which pointed towards the severity and rapidity of last cyclonic storm.

5 Data Analysis The above figures show the movement of the severe cyclonic storm: Fani in the sector of Bay of Bengal in North Indian Ocean. The data were captured by the satellite Insat-3D of Indian Space Research Organization (ISRO) and sited by Indian Meteorological Department in different day and different time. This actually gives us an idea of how a rare happening cyclonic storm can form progresses with gaining energy and dies out. In figure 5 (a) the development of the depression near the west of Sumatra on 26th April 2019 and the gradual progression of the depression into a cyclone were happened through the time 28th April to 30 April as indicated from (b) to (d). The 30th April the storm had become into a very severe cyclone. On 1st May the cyclone approached towards the east coast of India as observed in (e) and (f). The figure (g) shows the formation of eye distinctly. The 3rd May condition of the storm is very destructive as it encountered the eastern region of India in coastal areas and passed to the Bangladesh where a great depression, heavy rainfall with thunderstorm had occurred. After that the remnant low storm passed to Bhutan. During the movement of storm the state of West Bengal of India

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 109

narrowly escaped from the devastation due to remnant low condition of the storm on 4th May 2019. The condition of storm movement through satellite imaging is shown in the figure (i) for the 4th May 2019.

Figure 5Life of cyclone over the Bay of Bengal as captured by the satellite Insat-3D [36]

6 Conclusions The Bay of Bengal is the region of interest for the development of cyclonic storm due to its geographical orientation in the globe. The cyclone form in this region is very strong and destructive in nature. The tracing of the storm may help the government to resettle the people in suitable location at the time of cyclone passing. That reduces the death toll and also helps to make low property loss. The satellite information of storm tracking was present for long time; thermal, infrared and other satellite imaging of the storm is usually done to know the location and severity of the storm [36]. In this paper we have shown an analysis of rare happening storm i.e. how they forms and how they interact with the atmosphere. With salient matching with the data of this severe cyclone Fani obtained from several sources may justifies the physics behind its existence. Postmortem analysis of the severe cyclonic storm like Fani may help the scientific community to modify mathematical tools to save mother Earth from disaster.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 110

Acknowledgement We give our sincere thanks to JIS University for their all kinds of supports. We also acknowledge Indian Meteorological Department (New Delhi, India for using some of their relevant data.

References

1. Mohanty, S., Nadimpalli,R., Krishna K O, Pattanayak,S.Mohanty, U.C. and., Sil, S, 2019, Role of Sea Surface Temperature in Modulating Life Cycle of Tropical Cyclones over Bay of Bengal, Tropical Cyclone Research and Review, 8(2): 68 – 83. 2. Bhattacharya,R.,Guha, R and Bhattacharya, A., 2014, Striking events of tropical cyclone researches: An overview, Int. J. Innov. Res. Sci. Eng. Tech., 3 (2): 207-210. 3. Bhattacharya,R., Guha,R., 2014, Cloud Morphology of Cyclonic Storms over the Bay of Bengal using MODIS and TRMM data, Int. J. Innov. Res. Sci. Eng. Tech., 3(2): 304-309. 4. Tropical Cyclone 01B (Fani) Warning 012, Joint Typhoon Warning Center (Report), Naval Meteorology and Oceanography Command, 29 April 2019. 5. Abhilash, P. C., 2019, Flood to Fani: Climate-Related Disasters Taking a Toll on Sustainable Development, Climate Change and Environmental Sustainability, Indian Journals.com, 7(1):1-2. 6. Tropical Cyclone 01B (Fani) Warning 022, Joint Typhoon Warning Center, 2 May 2019. 6. Mishral,S.P., Panigrahi, R. 2014,Storm Impact on South Odisha Coast, India, International Journal of Advance Research In Science And Engineering, 3(11):209- 213. 7. Bluestein, M., 2006, Nature's Carnot Engine: The Hurricane, Conference: ASME 2006 International Mechanical Engineering Congress and Exposition,Paper No: IMECE2006-13359: 399-402. 8. Ozawa, H., Shimokawa, S., 2015, Thermodynamics of a tropical cyclone: generation and dissipation of mechanical energy in a self-driven convection system, Tellus A: Dynamic Meteorology and Oceanography (Taylor & Francis), 67(1), 24216. 9. Holton, J. R., Hakim, G., J., 2012, An introduction to dynamic meteorology, AcademicPress, 5 Waltham Massachusetts, 88(5): 342–343. 10. Holland, G. J., 1997, The maximum potential intensity of tropical cyclones, J. Atmos.Sci.,54:2519–2540. 11. Li,X., Sui, C. H. and Lau, K. M. 2002, Interactions between tropical convection and its environment: An energetics analysis of a 2D cloud-resolving simulation, J. Atmos. Sci., 59: 1712–1722. 12. Sikka, D.K. 2006, Major advances in understanding and prediction of tropical cyclones over north Indian Ocean : A Perspective, MAUSAM, 57(1): 165-196.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 111

13. Chenoweth, M., 2007, Objective classification of historical tropical cyclone intensity,Journal of Geophysical Researches,112(D5), https://doi.org/10.1029/2006JD007211 14. .Best track data of tropical cyclonic disturbances over the north Indian Ocean (Report), India Meteorological Department. July 14, 2009. 15. Frank, N., Husain, S. A, 1971, The deadliest tropical cyclone in history?, Bulletin of the American Meteorological Society, American Meteorological Society, 52 (6): 438. 16. Johns, B., Dube, S. K.,Mohanty, U. C.andSinha, P. C., 1981, Numerical simulation of the surge generated by the 1977 Andhra cyclone, Quarterly Journal of the Royal Meteorological Society, 107 (454): 919–934. 17. Carr, L. E., 1991, Tropical Cyclone 02B, 1990, Annual Tropical Cyclone Report, Joint Typhoon Warning Center (Report), United States Navy, United States Airforce, 18. JTWC Nisha Best Track, Joint Typhoon Warning Center, Retrieved 28 November 2008. 19. Cyclonic storm, 'BIJLI' weakened into a deep depression over northwest & adjoining northeast Bay of Bengal, India Meteorological Department, 2009-04-17.Archived from the original on April 17, 2009. 20. Saikumar P.J., Ramashri, T., 2017, Impact of Physics Parameterization Schemes in the Simulation of Laila Cyclone Using the Advanced Mesoscale Weather Research and Forecasting Model, International Journal of Applied Engineering Research,12(22): 12645-12651. 21. Cyclonic Storm, Mahasen weakened into Deep depression over Mizoram, India Meteorological Department. May 16, 2013. 22. Special Tropical Weather Outlook - 22/0600z, USNO, Archived from the original on 22 June 2015. 23. Tropical Weather Outlook for North Indian Ocean issued at 0300 UTC of April 15 2017, India Meteorological Department, Archived from the original on April 15, 2017. 24. Best Tracks Data (1990–2015). New Delhi, Delhi, India: India Meteorological Department. 2015.. 25. IMD C-Wind Advisory 2009-11-12 00z, India Meteorological Department, 2009-11- 12, Archived from the original on November 12, 2009. 26. Regional Specialised Meteorological Center New Delhi, India (October 28, 2012), Special Tropical Weather Outlook for the North Indian Ocean October 28, 2012 11z, India Meteorological Department. Archived from the original on October 31, 2012. 27. Joint Typhoon Warning Center (JTWC),Tropical Cyclone 04B (Helen) Warning 12, Final Warning Issued at 0900 UTC, 22 November 2013, Joint Typhoon Warning Center (JTWC), Archived from the original on 22 November 2013.. 28. Bhattacharya, R., Guha, R., Pandit, J. and Bhattacharya, A. B. 2014, Characteristics of Tropical Cyclonic Storm Phailin as derived from Satellite and Atmospherics Observations, Int. J. Electro. Comm. Tech., 5 (2): 56-59.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 112

29. Ramuje, K., Rao, B.N.M. 2014, hudhud cyclone–a severe disaster in Visakhapatnam, International Journal of Research in Engineering and Technology (IJRET),3(6):156- 163. 30. Saikumar,P.J., Ramashri,T. 2018, Real-Time Track Prediction of Vardah and Roanu Tropical Cyclones over the Bay of Bengal region using the ARW Model, International Journal of Computational Engineering Research (IJCER), 8(6):16-25, ISSN (e):2250 –3005. 31. Gopal, N.,K. 2017, bulletin no. 01: (BOB 07/2017), India Meteorological Department, 32. .Kulkarni, J., R. 2019, Important weather features in the month of December 2018, India Meteorological Society, imdpune.gov.in 33. Sandeep, N.2019, Tracking Cyclone Fani& Tackling the Aftermath, NISCAIR-CSIR, India, NISCAIR Online Periodicals Repository, 56(10):43-44. 34. Callaghan, J.2019, the interaction of hurricane Michael with an upper trough leading to intensification right up to landfall, Tropical Cyclone Research and Review, 8(2), 95 – 102. 35. http://www.rsmcnewdelhi.imd.gov.in/images/pdf/archive/bulletins/2019/rfani.pdf 36. Bhattacharya, A.,B., Pandit, J. and Bhattacharya, R.2014, Rare Super Cyclone Phailin in the Indian Ocean: Analysis of VIIRS high-resolution IR images and 40 kHz Sferics Data, Earth, Moon and Planet, DOI 10.1007/s11038-014-9444-8 ISSN 0167-9295 IF 0.438 (Spinger)

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 113

A critical Studies on Rural Sustainable Livelihood and Rural Transformation

Nazrana Khatoon1 1Department of Remote Sensing & GIS JIS University, Kolkata 700109

Abstract: The purpose of the report is to consider whether we need to give priority to the rurality or urbanity in the present-day scenario. For this we have first classified the transformation forms with their causes and effects. Transformation from census village to census town is analyzed. Rural livelihood and socio economy have focused with reference to impact on land-use and land cover practice and impact on occupational behavior or agro-economy. Finally we have argued why despite of being transformed into a census town majority of the population still prefers to live in rural surroundings.

Keywords: Rural transformation, Census Village to Census Town, Socio Economy, Agro- Economy

1 Introduction The rural transformation is a process of conversion of socio-economic condition of a rural area. It includes the change in size of the population, agricultural pattern, lifestyle of people, infrastructure and so on. The main occupation of rural areas is agriculture but with the transformation the change in occupational pattern can be seen. Despite of being an urban area, people would prefer agricultural economic activities. Although the houses would not be so far mud house, but their food habits are still remaining the same as because they are used to have those kinds of nutrients [1, 2].

2 Transformation Forms, Causes and Effects Rural transformation has been classified into two categories as follows:A habitat area with few 100s population is considered as a small village whereas the census village is bigger in size than small village. Besides, the socio-economic condition, occupational pattern, agricultural pattern would also be upgraded.There are lots of causes of transformation of small village to census village among them the increase in the size of population is a major factor. As the population of village would increase the need for food would also increase which leads the agricultural pattern towards an upgraded level. Due to the transformation lots of impacts have been taken upon the various segments of village area. Such as the infrastructure of the region might be changed towards a little extent, structure of population might be improved, water supply and other livelihood elements of life might be provided a bit [3].

3 Transformation of Census Village to Census Town Area with more than 5000 population is considered as the census town which obviously bigger than census village. The main reason behind the transformation of census village to census town is the establishment of municipal corporations to improve the livelihood and the increase in the population of the region. The major effect can be seen in the occupational pattern of the region

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 114

[4, 5]. People start to migrate in search of better job opportunities towards urban areas as well as the small cottage industries are started to grow in the region and the subsistence agriculture would transform into commercial agriculture. Houses are converted into concrete and roads are also started to transform into metallic. As similar to census villages, census towns have also some kind of impact on the people living in the transformed area. Quality of life has been improved, more and more modern facilities are being a part of people‘s life but the quality of environment get degraded which ultimately leave people with a desire to live in a clean and healthy environment.

4 Rural Livelihoods and Socio Economy Impact on land-use and land cover practice: The rural transformation has a major impact on the land-use and land cover practice. Before the transformation the whole land were used as an agricultural land. But, with the rural transformation people start using land for various motives. The agricultural lands would be extended, cottage industries would be established, dams are constructed to provide water for irrigation and to protect the region from flood during rainy season and from drought during dry season. Roads, houses, and local market areas would be constructed to improve the lifestyle of people.

Impact on occupational behavior or agro-economy: The rural transformation would also has an impressive impact on the agro-economy or occupational behavior of the people. People would start to transform their occupation and engaged themselves into cottage industries and in other occupation. Their way of cultivation would have changed. Before the transformation people use to do subsistence agriculture but after being transformed their agricultural patterns are replaced by commercial agriculture [4, 6].

5 Improvements of Poor Rural Households through PIP In order to understand how constraints affect poor rural people‘s livelihoods we need to go through certain assess on livelihoods strategies. In fact, understanding of roles and dynamics of rural institutions properly can make an enabling environment for improving sustainable rural livelihoods and economic growth. We have to contribute to the design of more realistic people- centered rural development investments for increasing impact of interventions on rural people‘s livelihoods. It is required to realize that benefits to the poor are not contingent on amount but on appropriateness of investment. Ability to escape poverty largely depends on access to assets. Livelihoods are mainly affected by diversity and amount of assets, precisely on the balance between assets which help to determine livelihood options. In fact, assets are transformed into livelihood outcomes (Figure 1).

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 115

Figure 1 Livelihood assets surrounded by the poor rural households

An extremely reduced ―livelihood pentagon‖ as shown in Figure 1 may be improved by making properly an enabling environment. In order to do those improvements Policies, Institutions and Processes (PIP) are to be predetermined and implemented in a very organized way as illustrated in Figure 2.

Figure 2 Improved ―livelihood pentagon‖ making enabling environment through Policies, Institutions and Processes (PIP)

Rural institutions are assumed important as they define the way in which rural people interrelate and act. Moreover, they influence how, where, when and by whom assets are accessed, used, controlled and decided upon. All these influence livelihood strategies in real field.

6 Results and Discussion By analyzing the problem of rural transformation many results that can be further studied those includes; The environment is being polluted due to the new emergence of small scale and other

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 116

industries, food crisis is also being faced by the all country due to the shifting of occupation of rural people which leads to the drastic environmental degradation and consequently, we start to live a very fast and fully machine oriented life just make our lifestyle better and better which results into the loss of our mental peace. Hence, people would like be in natural surroundings just to restoring their mental peace. Whatever result we find is pointing the importance of rural areas in our lives. The transformation of rural areas neither has negative impact only nor positive. Like a coin it also has two sides studies, one may have positive impact and the other may have adverse impact. But, it completely depends on us what impacts we are willing to passes through. It should be a part of discussion in our research paper, whether we need to give priority to urbanity or rurality.

7 Conclusions Today, we have to think seriously whether we need to give priority to the rurality or urbanity. The term rurality refers to the rural way of living of people in a region where everyone is depending on agriculture for their livelihood. The food habits, the dressing sense, the culture, thoughts, and their choice of commodities, all are associated with the village level lifestyle. Whereas the term urbanity refers to the upgrade lifestyle, more indulgence in non-agricultural activities, improved choice of commodities, and other urbanized factors such as the dress code, the food items in daily nutrients and so on. Hence, the rural transformation is taking place, but the rurality of people would not seem to be removed. The reason behind this rurality is their attachments with nature. The villagers are used to live in a natural environment; they are habituated of breath in a fresh air: They are habituated of self-grown food crops which pure and non-hybrid; that is why, despite of being transformed into a census town the population is still would like to live in rural surroundings.

Acknowledgements I like to express my sincere thanks to all the authors whose contributions have been partly utilized in the analysis. I am thankful to Prof. A. B. Bhattacharya who supported a lot at the time of preparing the manuscript.

References 1. Aggarwal, S. 2018, Do rural roads create pathways out of poverty? Evidence from India, Journal of Development Economics, 133, 375–395 2. Asher, S. E., Novosad, P. M., 2018, Rural roads and local economic development, Policy Research Working Paper 8466, World Bank Group, Washington, DC. 3. Breman, J., 2016, At work in the informal economy of India: A perspective from the bottom up (OIP),OUP Catalogue. 4. Chand, R., Saxena, R., &Rana, S., 2015, Estimates and analysis of farm income in India, 1983–84 to 2011–12,Economic and Political Weekly, 50(22), 139–145. 5. Chakravorty, S., Chandrasekhar, S., &Naraparaju, K. 2016,Income generation and inequality in India‘s agricultural sector: The consequences of land fragmentation, Indira Gandhi Institute of Development Research, Mumbai Working Papers. Indira Gandhi Institute of Development Research, Mumbai, India. 6. Chand, R., Srivastava, S. K., & Singh, J. 2017. Changing structure of rural economy of India implications for employment and growth, New Delhi: NITI Aayog.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 117

Psychological and Psychosocial Analysis of Oral Precancer And Cancer Patients- A Comparative – Qualitative CumQuantitative Evaluation

Rudra Prasad Chatterjee, M Pal, G Bandyopadhyay, R R Paul Department of Oral & Dental Sciences, JIS University, Kolkata

Abstract: Oral cancer or Head or Neck Cancer (HNC) is one of the 6th most common cancers in the world. In South-central Asia, it is third most common type of cancer. This study is undertaken to establish qualitative as well as quantitative parameters of psychosocial distress for treatment of oral pre-cancer and cancer.

Keywords: Oral cancer, Neck Cancer, Head Cancer, Psychosocial distress

1 Introduction Oral cancer or Head and Neck Cancer (HNC) is one of widely prevalent cancer types emerging as a growing problem in various regions of the world, is the 6th most common cancer in the world. In South-central Asia, it is a common entity and the third most common type of cancer [1]. This neoplasm is an important cause of mortality and morbidity in India [2]. Most of the time oral cancer develops from pre-existing precancerous lesions. Oral leukoplakia, oral submucous fibrosis, and oral erythroplakia are the most common oral mucosal precancer diseases that have a very high malignant transformation rate [3]. Oral cancer is treated by different modalities that depend on the stage of presentation. The treatment options include combination of surgery, radiotherapy and chemotherapy. Palliative therapy is often required in advanced disease. The treatments of oral precancer are both medicinal and surgical depending on the degree of epithelial dysplasia and/or cellular atypia.

The side effects of these treatments many a times increase the suffering of the patients. Among the different physical complaints of the patients, the most common are burning sensation, pain, dryness of mouth, sticky saliva, feeding problems, and problem in speaking.Moreover, disfigurement resulting from the massive surgeries undertaken to control the disease results in a psychological stress to the patients apart from the physical agony. The other problems are professional limitations, economic crisis and disruption of family [4]. Many a times, Indian socio-economic conditions become a hindrance in the treatment procedure also.But in India, today most of the time the psychological problems are not taken into consideration of a part and parcel of the treatment procedure. Keeping this in mind, the present research study is undertaken to establish qualitative as well as quantitative parameters of psychosocial distress for treatment of oral precancer and cancer. Moreover, these victims irrespective of their age and sex are affected emotionally; hence, psychological counseling of these patients and family members should be a part of the comprehensive treatment plan. Meeting the psychological needs of these patients will help them undergo the treatment with confidence and follow the protocols meticulously, which will definitely increase the treatment outcomes and prognosis.

2 Aims & Objectives The aim of this research study is to develop the psychological and psychosocial aspects of the

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 118

patients as one of the ―TREATMENT PARAMETERS‖ of oral precancer and cancer. The objective is 1. To record the psychological qualitative parameters of the oral pre-cancer and cancer patients 2. To record the psychosocial qualitative parameters of these patients 3. To analyze the above observations quantitatively and also to compare and corroborate them with a view to achieve the aim of the study 3 Review of Literature The patient with head and neck (H&N) cancer is prone to psychological distress immediately following diagnosis and during the treatment phase. Thus, more systematic and targeted service provision such as psychological interventions are considered as achievable aims for improving head and neck cancer services[1].Oral cancer is prevalent worldwide with high incidence of mortality and morbidity. It is associated with poor prognosis and low survival rate. Moreover, patients affected are more likely to develop psychological issues and thus, addressing psychological needs of such patients is crucial [2]. By providing psychological support while considering anxiety might be particularly useful preoperatively whereas providing psychological support while considering depression might be particularly useful post- operatively [1]. Psychological resilience may independently contribute to low emotional distress in cancer patients. Psychosocial interventions to enhance resilience might provide useful approaches to overcome cancer-related emotional distress [2].Psychological distress is prevalent among elderly patients with cancer and, therefore, should be considered by the health professionals treating these patients [3].HNC is a debilitating disease with many, often unique, physical and psychological sequelae. The process of treatment and recovery requires a multidisciplinary approach with surgeons, radiation and medical oncologists, dentists, plastic surgeons, and rehabilitation specialists all involved. The evidence reviewed here supports the need for clinical health psychologists and behavioral medicine specialists at all phases of the disease trajectory, from HNC diagnosis through treatment and recovery, a role previously advocated by others [4].

4 Materials and Methods The present research study will be conducted in the Dept. of Oral and Dental Sciences, JIS University, in the Dept. of Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology, GNIDSR and Dept. of Psychiatric Medicine, College of Medicine and Sagore Dutta Hospital, Kolkata. Ethical clearance will be obtained from the participating institutes. Specially prepared clinical record sheet-questionnaire as per the guideline laid down by WHO will be utilized for this study. The study subjects will be selected from amongst the patients visiting the OPD of GNIDSR after establishing the clinic-pathological diagnosis of oral precancer and cancer as per the guideline laid down by Neville et al.The following questionnaire will be utilized to record the psychological and psychosocial aspects of oral precancer and cancer patients to evaluate a. QOL Questionnaire to evaluate QOL b. General Health Questionnaires (GHQ-28) c. Neo 5 d. Hamilton Depression Scale for evaluation of Depression. e. STATE - TRAIT ANXIETY INVENTORY

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 119

f. FACT-H&N, version 4:aspects of QOL specific to patients of Head and Neck cancer such as eating, swallowing, speech and aesthetics. The observations and findings thereafter will be statistically analyzed.

References 1. Gupta N, Gupta R, Acharya A K, Patthi B, Goud V, Reddy S, Garg A, Singla A; Changing Trends in oral cancer – a global scenario;Nepal Journal of Epidemiology; 2016;6(4); 613-619. 2. Poddar A, Aranha RR, K Muthukaliannan G, et al.Head and neck cancer riskfactors in India: protocol for systematic review and meta-analysis. BMJ Open 2018;8:e020014. doi:10.1136/bmjopen-2017-020014 3. Yardimci G, Kutlubay Z, Engin B, Tuzun Y. Precancerous lesions of oral mucosa. World J Clin Cases 2014; 2(12): 866872; Availablefrom:URL:http://www.wjgnet.com/2307-8960/full/v2/ i12/866.htm DOI: http://dx.doi.org/10.12998/wjcc.v2.i12.866 4. Goswami S, Gupta SS. How patients of oral cancer cope up with impact of the disease? A qualitative study in central India.Indian J Palliat Care 2019;25:103-9.2019 Indian Journal of Palliative Care | Published by Wolters Kluwer –Medknow 5. Koizumi A, Matsushima E, Mochizuki Y, Omura K, Amagasa T; Changes in the Psychological Characteristics of Oral Cancer Patients in the Perioperative Period: A Quantitative Evaluation; J Med Dent Sci 2013； 60： 41－53 6. Humphris G.M., Ozakinci G.; Psychological responses and support needs of patients following head and neck cancer; 1743-9191/$; 2006 Surgical Associates Ltd. Published by Elsevier Ltd. All rights reserved.doi:10.1016/j.ijsu.2005.12.004 7. KAMATCHINATHAN P, KAZA N, MUTHURAMAN V, ANTHARAJU Y, KUMAR M, VARADHARAJAN U; Psychological Analysis of Oral Cancer Patients during Pre-operative Period in South Indian Population: A Prospective, Quantitative, Multicentre Study; Journal of Clinical and Diagnostic Research. 2016 Oct, Vol- 10(10): ZC72-ZC74; DOI: 10.7860/JCDR/2016/21491.8654 8. Min J A, Yoon S, Lee C U, Chae J H, Lee C, Song K Y, Kim T S; Psychological resilience contributes to low emotional distress in cancer patients; Supportive Care in Cancer · April 2013 DOI: 10.1007/s00520-013-1807-6 · Source: PubMed 9. Hong J F, Zhang W, Song Y X, Xie L F, Wang W L; Psychological distress in elderly cancer patients; I n t e r n a t i o n a l journal of nursing s c i e n c e s 2 ( 2 0 1 5) 2 3- 27;http://www.elsevier.com/journals/internationaljournal-of-nursing-sciences/2352- 0132

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 120

Interdisciplinary Assessment of Coral Reef Processes, Climate Change and the World’s Coral Reefs Bleaching by Satellite Remote Sensing

Kousiki Das, Jenyca Challam, Puja Pal, Sagar Saha, Evanriakor Kurbah, Animesh Mondal, Purbita Bhaduri, Sayan Chowdhury and A. B. Bhattacharya Department of Remote Sensing and GIS, JIS University, Agarpara, Kolkata 700109

Abstract: Coral reefs are the most diverse in the marine ecosystems for providing protection of shorelines, food, jobs based on tourism and even medicines. The changing ocean chemistry, overfishing and destructive fishing, pollution, warming and invasive species are all approaching towards a complete destruction. An increasing awareness for understanding the magnitude of threats facing coral reef ecosystems is demanded. A proper planning and suitable monitoring have become very important for assessing the impact of day-to-day disturbances on reefs as well as tracking subsequent recovery or decline. In this paper, we have attempted to make a pilot observation of coral reef monitoring programs by use of suitable technologies for assessing the oceanic climate change and status of coral reefs worldwide.

Keywords: Coral reefs, Marine ecosystems, Ecosystems, Oceanic climate change

1 Introduction Present day harmful human activity and natural climate trends constitute a considerable threat to coral reefs throughout the globe. Some of the models highlighted a countable reduction in reef spatial extension in addition to decline in biodiversity in coming days. From this point of view, careful monitoring programs for identifying and detecting the day-to-day changes in reef ecosystems are important [1-4]. During the last two decade, coral reef mapping utilizing remote sensing data has provided better resolution with the support of the computational advances in storage and processing capabilities. It is important to understand that the coral reefs are the most diverse among all the marine ecosystems and that is why they are popularly called as the rainforests of the sea. The reefs cover a small fraction of less than one percent of the earth‘s surface and also less than two percent of the ocean bottom. Coral reefs have been providing protection of shorelines, food, jobs based on tourism and even medicines. Even then changing ocean chemistry, overfishing and destructive fishing, pollution, warmingand invasive species are all taking a huge toll [5, 6]. Unfortunately at some locations reefs have been totally destroyed while at some other locations reefs are getting a pale shadow color and thus approaching towards a complete destruction. Under the situation an increasing awareness for understanding the magnitude of threats facing coral reef ecosystems are very much needed. A proper planning and suitable monitoring have become very urgent and important for assessing the impact of day-to-day disturbances on reefs as well as tracking subsequent recovery or decline [7]. In this paper, we have attempted to make a pilot observation of coral reef monitoring programs to assess the status of coral reefs worldwide.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 121

2 Coral Diversity True stony corals compose most tropical reefs where each polyp sits in a cup of calcium carbonate. Some corals use more flexible materials or tiny stiff rods for building their skeletons, e.g., the sea fans and sea rods, the rubbery soft corals and the black corals. Strong sting fire corals are subdivided into two groups depending on their characteristics, named as hexacorals and octocorals [8,9]. The first category belongs to true stony corals and black corals, as well as the sea anemones while the second category is made as soft corals, seafans, organpipe corals and blue corals. In general, all type of corals is similar to jellyfish (phylum cnidarian). Figure 1 reveals flower-like cluster of pink polyps making something like a coral colony.

Figure 1 Flower-like cluster of pink polyps making something like a coral colony(Photo Collection of Dr. James P. McVey, NOAA Sea Grant Program) 2.1 Reproduction Corals are either male or female or both and they can reproduce either asexually or sexually. Asexual reproduction is considered very important to increase the size of the colony while sexual reproduction increases genetic diversity and produces new colonies [10-13]. Asexual reproduction is the result in polyps or colonies which are clones of each while in the case of sexual reproduction eggs are fertilized by sperm from another colony; depending on the species and type of fertilization, the larvae settle on a substrate and become polyps subsequently [14, 15]. Figure 2 shows how a purple hard coral can release bundles of pink eggs glued together with sperm.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 122

Figure 2 Purple hard coral releases bundles of pink eggs glued together with sperm (Chuck Savall)

2.2 From Corals to Reefs

Corals can be seen in both deep and shallow water across the ocean though reef-building corals are observed in shallow tropical and subtropical waters only owing to the algae found in their tissues demand light for photosynthesis and as a consequence they require water temperatures between 22-29°C. In addition, there are deep-sea corals which thrive in dark and cold water at a depth up to 6,000 m. Stony corals and soft corals both can be found in deep sea [16-21]. They have no need of warm water or sunlight to survive but their growth is very slow. It has been reported by various scientific observations that the populations of crown-of- thorns sea stars have mushroomed during the last few decades [22-27].

Figure 3 Populations of crown-of-thorns sea stars have mushroomed in recent decades (Acanthaster Planci)

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 123

Reefs are the big cities of the sea. They exist because the growth of corals matches or exceeds the death of corals – think of it as a race between the construction cranes (new coral skeleton) and the wrecking balls (the organisms that kill coral and chew their skeletons into sand).

3 Threats to Reefs A considerable threat to reefs is caused by rising water temperatures and ocean acidification associated with the rising CO2 levels [28-32]. Due to the enhance water temperature corals lose the microscopic algae which has the major role to produce the food required for corals; an essential condition of coral bleaching. Prolonged bleaching causes to kill the coral colonies and also causes other threats. Ocean acidification, i.e., more acidic seawater makes it too difficult for corals for developing their skeletons of calcium carbonate. When that acidification becomes very severe it could break the existing skeletons that provide the structure for reefs [33-37]. It has been predicted by a group of scientists that by 2085 ocean conditions will be so acidic for corals around the globe so that it will start for dissolving. Figure 4 demonstrates the bleached corals in the Gulf of Mexico which is caused by the enhanced water temperature. Figure 5 can be used for a comparison of healthy coral (shown on the left side) with the bleached coral (shown right).

Figure 4 Bleached corals in the Gulf of Mexico, a result of enhanced water temperature (Emma Hickerson/NOAA)

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 124

Figure 5 Comparison of the healthy coral (left) with the bleached coral (right)(Wolcott Henry)

4Technologies Implemented Use of remote sensing imagery in visible wavelengths can be used for mapping on coral reefs. For the purpose, multispectral data with smaller than 10 broad wavelength bands or hyper spectral band of more than 10 narrow bands acquired by airborne or satellite based sensors are used [38-43]. By ―hyperspectral‖ we mean instrument with more than 100 bands wherefrom only a subset will be useable. Besides the wavelength characteristics, imagery can be further categorized by spatial resolution into very high pixels with less than 1 m, high pixels (1–10 m), moderate pixels (10–100 m) and low pixels (100–1000 m). Both spatial and spectral resolutions have important role for contributing to what can be discriminated in a mapping objective so that dependent on the instrument used at different levels of ―descriptive resolution‖ can be derived, from geomorphic zones like fore reef, reef crest to benthic community cover like coral on reef matrix, algae and coral on rubble [44-52].

5 Climatological changes on Coral Reefs The ideal conditions of corals are clear, warm, shallow water. As different species of corals live in ocean basins at different places, investigations show that the reefs in tropical western Atlantic Ocean look different than reefs in Indo-Pacific Ocean. Based on the way they grow, it has been identified that the fringing reefs are directly attached to the shore; barrier reefs are separated from shore by a lagoon while patch reefs are very small reefs which occur throughout a lagoon but never form as a part of the barrier reef [53-59]. It is interesting to point out that the coral reefs have a very important role in ecosystems for coastal peoples. In fact, they are frequently the first line of defense against strong tropical storms and over 400 million people rely on coral reef fisheries for income and food [60-67]. Destructive fishing practices resulting severe pollution and invasive species are the cause of great threat to local coral reefs in populated areas [68-77]. In recent years, climate change and ocean acidification are the severe threats on all coral reefs around the world [78-83]. For the Caribbean in 2014,

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 125

from the NOAA Acidification, Climate and Coral Reef Ecosystems Team (ACCRETE), we have shown an example of the monthly progression calcite saturation state in Figure 6.

Figure 6 Example of the monthly progression calcite saturation state for the Caribbean in 2014 as reported by the NOAA Acidification, Climate, and Coral Reef Ecosystems Team (ACCRETE) product suite 5 Conclusions Satellite remote sensing data can be used successfully on a regular basis to assess the environment of the reefs as well as to map the location of reef habitats and communities [84- 87]. However, it cannot be very ideal to measure the health of the system directly. Airborne hyperspectral sensors can be used for distinguishing the levels of coral mortality in isolated studies to some extent. Satellite monitoring of sea surface temperature is definitely effective to predict where and how coral bleaching events will take place. Again this type of prediction can be significantly improved from a consideration of some other factors like light levels. From remotely sensed data, bleaching predictions are routinely made by a large number of coral reef management agencies but it is not yet confirmed how far their predictions support the extent to which the corals recover or die [88-92]. At present, this is a more serious management problem and for an urgent solving of the same it demands further research.

Acknowledgements We are thankful to all the contributors whose reports have been partly utilized in this pilot observation. We express our acknowledgements to Dr. James P. McVey, NOAA Sea Grant Program for the photo collection of flower-like cluster of pink polyps, to Chuck Savall for the photo collection of purple hard coral, Acanthaster plancifor the photo collection of populations of crown-of-thorns sea stars, to Emma Hickerson/NOAA for the photo collection of Bleached corals in the Gulf of Mexico, to Wolcott Henry for the photo collection of healthy

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 126

coral with the bleached coral and also to NOAA Acidification, Climate, and Coral Reef Ecosystems Team whose contributions we have used in this pilot survey and critical review References

1. Bellwood, D.R., Hughes, T.P., Folke, C. Nystrom, M. 2004, Confronting the coral reef crisis, Nature 429, 827–833. 2. Gardner, T.A., Cote, I.M., Gill, J.A., Grant, A., Watkinson,2003 A.R. Long-term region- wide declines in Caribbean corals. Science, 301, 958–960. 3. Pandolfi, J.M.; Bradbury, R.H., Sala, E., Hughes, T.P., Bjorndal, K.A., Cooke, R.G., McArdle, D., McClenachan, L., Newman, M.J.H., Paredes, G., et al.2003 Global trajectories of the long-term decline of coral reef ecosystems. Science, 301, 955–958. 4. Pennisi,E. 2002 Survey confirms coral reefs are in peril. Science, 297, 1622b–1623b. 5. Wilkinson, C. 2008 Status of Coral Reefs of the World, Global Coral Reef Monitoring Network and Reef and Rainforest Research Centre: Townsville, QLD, Australia, p. 296. 6. Burke, L., Reytar, K., Spalding, M., Perry, A. 2011 Reefs at Risk Revisited, World Resources Institute: Washington, DC, USA, p. 114. 7. Baker, A.C., Glynn, P.W., Riegl, B.2008 Climate change and coral reef bleaching: An ecological assessment of long-term impacts, recovery trends and future outlook. Estuar. Coast. Shelf Sci., 80, 435–471. 8. Hoegh-Guldberg, O., Mumby, P.J., Hooten, A.J., Steneck, R.S., Greenfield, P., Gomez, E., Harvell, C.D., Sale, P.F., Edwards, A.J., Caldeira, K., et al.2007 Coral reefs under rapid climate change and ocean acidification. Science, 318, 1737–1742. 9. Hodgson, G.2001 Reef Check: The first step in community-based management. Bull. Mar. Sci., 69, 861–868. 10. Obura, D.O., Tamelander, J., Linden, O. 2008 Ten Years After Bleaching—Facing the Consequences of Climate Change in the Indian Ocean, CORDIO Status Report, CORDIO (Coastal Oceans Research and Development, Indian Ocean)/Sida-SAREC: Mombasa, Kenya, 2008, p. 493. 11. Wilkinson, C. 1998 Status of Coral Reefs of the World, Australian Institute of Marine Science: Townsville, QLD, Australia, p. 184. 12. Wilkinson, C. 2000 Status of Coral Reefs of the World, Australian Institute of Marine Science: Townsville, QLD, Australia, p. 363. 13. Wilkinson, C. 2002 Status of Coral Reefs of the World, Australian Institute of Marine Science: Townsville, QLD, Australia, p. 378. 14. Wilkinson, C. 2004 Status of Coral Reefs of the World, Australian Institute of Marine Science: Townsville, QLD, Australia, p. 301. 15. Bruno, J.F. Selig, E.R.2007 Regional decline of coral cover in the Indo-Pacific: Timing, extent, and subregional comparisons. PLoS ONE, 2, e711. 16. Jackson, J.B.C. Donovan, M.K. Cramer, K.L. Lam, V.V. 1970–2012Status and Trends of Caribbean Coral Reefs: Global Coral Reef Monitoring Network, IUCN: Gland, Switzerland, 2014. 17. Edmunds, P.J., Bruno, J. F.1996The importance of sampling scale in ecology: Kilometer- wide variation in coral reef communities. Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser., 143, 165–171. 18. Hughes, T.P., Baird, A.H., Dinsdale, E.A., Moltschaniwskij, N.A., Pratchett, M.S., Tanner, J.E., Willis, B.L.1999 Patterns of recruitment and abundance of corals along the Great Barrier Reef. Nature, 397, 59–63.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 127

19. Downs, C.A., Woodley, C.M., Richmond, R.H., Lanning, L.L., Owen, R.2005Shifting the paradigm of coral-reef ―health‖ assessment. Mar. Pollut. Bull., 51, 486–494. 20. Anon. Workshop of GCRMN for the Wider Caribbean: Review, Improve and Revitalize the Network and the Nodes for More Effective Coral Reef Monitoring and Data Management Curaçao, 6th–8th of August 2014. Available online: (accessed on 18 September 2015). 21. González-Rivero, M., Bongaerts, P., Beijbom, O., Pizarro, O., Friedman, A., Rodriguez- Ramirez, A., Upcroft, B., Laffoley, D., Kline, D., Vevers, R., et al.2014 The Catlin Seaview Survey—Kilometre-scale seascape assessment, and monitoring of coral reef ecosystems. Aquat. Conserv. Mar. Freshw. Ecosyst.24, 184–198. 22. Beijbom, O., Edmunds, P.J., Kline, D.I., Mitchell, B.G., Kriegman, D. 16–21 June 2012 Automated Annotation of Coral Reef Survey Images. In Proceedings of the IEEE Conference on Computer Vision (CVPR), Providence, RI, USA. 23. Jupiter, S., Roelfsema, C.M., Phinn, S.R. 2013 Science and management. In Coral Reef Remote Sensing, Goodman, J.A., Phinn, S.R., Purkis, S., Eds., Springer: Berlin, Germany, pp. 403–427. 24. Mumby, P.J., Green, E.P., Edwards, A.J., Clark, C.D.1999The cost-effectiveness of remote sensing for tropical coastal resources assessment and management. J. Environ. Manag.,55, 157–166. 25. Mumby, P.J., Hedley, J.D., Chisholm, J.R.M., Clark, C.D., Ripley, H., Jaubert, J.2004The cover of living and dead corals from airborne remote sensing. Coral Reefs, 23, 171–183. Green, E.P.; Mumby, P.J., Edwards, A.J., Clark, C.D. 1996A review of remote sensing for the assessment and management of tropical coastal resources. Coast. Manag.,24, 1–40. 26. Hu, C.M., Hackett, K.E., Callahan, M.K., Andrefouet, S., Wheaton, J.L.J., Porter, J.W., Muller-Karger, F.E.2003The 2002 ocean color anomaly in the Florida Bight: A cause of local coral reef decline? Geophys. Res. Lett.. 27. Malthus, T.J., Mumby, P.J.2003 Remote sensing of the coastal zone: An overview and priorities for future research. Int. J. Remote Sens., 24, 2805–2815. 28. Eakin, C.M., Nim, C.J., Brainard, R.E., Aubrecht, C., Elvidge, C., Gledhill, D.K., Muller- Karger, F., Mumby, P.J., Skirving, W.J., Strong, A.E., et al.2010 Monitoring coral reefs from space. Oceanography, 23, 118–133. 29. Mumby, P.J., Skirving, W., Strong, A.E., Hardy, J.T., LeDrew, E.F., Hochberg, E.J., Stumpf, R.P.,David, L.T.2004 Remote sensing of coral reefs and their physical environment. Mar. Pollut. Bull., 48, 219–228. 30. Phinn, S.R., Hochberg, E., Roelfsema, C.M. 2013 Airborne photography, multispectral and hyperspectral remote sensing on coral reefs. In Coral Reef Remote Sensing; Goodman, J.A., Phinn, S.R., Purkis, S., Eds., Springer: Berlin, Germany, , pp. 3–25. 31. Phinn, S.R., Roelfsema, C.M., Stumpf, R. Remote sensing: Discerning the promise from the reality. In Integrating and Applying Science: A Handbook for Effective Coastal Ecosystem Assessment; Longstaff, B.J., Carruthers, T.J.B., Dennison, W.C., Lookingbill, T.R., Hawkey, J.M., Thomas, J.E., Wicks, E.C., Woerner, J., Eds., 2010 IAN Press: Cambridge, MD, USA,. 32. Green, P.E., Mumby, P.J., Edwards, A.J., Clark, C.D. 2000 Remote Sensing Handbook for Tropical Coastal Management, UNESCO: Paris, France, p. 316.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 128

33. Andréfouët, S., Hochberg, E.J., Chevillon, C., Muller-Karger, F.E., Brock, J.C., Hu, C.2005 Multi-scale remote sensing of coral reefs. In Remote Sensing of Coastal Aquatic Environments, Har, R.L., Miller, X., Del Castillo, C.E., Mckee, B.A., Eds.; Springer: Dordrecht, the Netherlands, pp. 297–315. 34. Benfield, S.L., Guzman, H.M., Mair, J.M., Young, J.A.T.2007 Mapping the distribution of coral reefs and associated sublittoral habitats in Pacific Panama: A comparison of optical satellite sensors and classification methodologies. Int. J. Remote Sens.23, 5047– 5070. 35. Capolsini, P., Andréfouët, S., Rion, C., Payri, C.2007 A comparison of Landsat ETM+, SPOT HRV, Ikonos, ASTER, and airborne MASTER data for coral reef habitat mapping in South Pacific islands. Can. J. Remote Sens.23, 87–200. 36. Harborne, A.R., Mumby, P.J., Zychaluk, K., Hedley, J.D., 2006 Blackwell, P.G. Modeling the beta diversity of coral reefs. Ecology 87, 2871–2881. 37. Goodman, J.A., Ustin, S.L. 2007 Classification of benthic composition in a coral reef environment using spectral unmixing. J. Appl. Remote Sens.1, 011501. 38. Hamylton, S.2011 Estimating the coverage of coral reef benthic communities from airborne hy-perspectral remote sensing data: Multiple discriminant function analysis and linear spectral unmixing. Int. J. Remote Sens.32, 9673–9690. 39. Andréfouët, S., Muller-Karger, F.E., Robinson, J.A., Kranenburg., C.J., Torres-Pulliza, D., Spraggins, S., Murch, B. 2004 Global assessment of modern coral reef extent and diversity for regional science and management applications: A view from space. In Proceedings of the 10th International Coral Reef Symposium, Okinawa, Japan, 28 June–2 July . 40. Hedley, J.D., Roelfsema, C., Koetz, B., Phinn, S. 2012 Capability of the Sentinel 2 mission for tropical coral reef mapping and coral bleaching detection. Remote Sens. Environ.120, 145–155. 41. Andréfouët, S., Riegl, B. 2004 Remote sensing: A key tool for interdisciplinary assessment of coral reef processes. Coral Reefs, 23, 1–4. 42. Diaz, R.J., Solan, M., Valente, 2004 R.M. A review of approaches for classifying benthic habitats and evaluating habitat quality. J. Environ. Manag.73, 165–181. 43. Mumby, P.J., Edwards, A.J. 2002 Mapping marine environments with IKONOS imagery: Enhanced spatial resolution can deliver greater thematic accuracy. Remote Sens. Environ.82, 248–257. 44. Johansen, K., Roelfsema, C., Phinn, S.2008 High spatial resolution remote sensing for environmental monitoring and management. J. Spat. Sci.53, 43–47. 45. Purkis, S.J., Pasterkamp, R.2004 Integrating in-situ reef-top reflectance spectra with Landsat TM imagery to aid shallow-tropical benthic habitat mapping. Coral Reefs 23, 5– 20. 46. Hedley, J.D., Harborne, A.R., Mumby, P.J. 2005 Simple and robust removal of sun glint for mapping shallow-water benthos. Int. J. Remote Sens.26, 2107–2112. 47. Kay, S., Hedley, J.D., Lavender, S. 2009 Sun glint correction of high and low spatial resolution images of aquatic scenes: A review of methods for visible and near-infrared wavelengths. Remote Sens., 1, 697–730. 48. Mumby, P.J., Clark, C.D., Green, E.P., Edwards, A.J. 1998 Benefits of water column correction and contextual editing for mapping coral reefs. Int. J. Remote Sens., 19, 203– 210.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 129

49. Zoffoli, M.L., Frouin, R., Kampel, M. 2014 Water column correction for coral reef studies by remote sensing. Sensors 14, 16881–16931. 50. Purkis, S.J.2005 A ―reef-up‖ approach to classifying coral habitats from IKONOS imagery. IEEE Trans. Geosci. Remote Sens.43, 1375–1390. 51. Lim, A., Hedley, J.D., LeDrew, E., Mumby, P.J., Roelfsema, C.2009 The effects of ecologically determined spatial complexity on the classification accuracy of simulated coral reef images. Remote Sens. Environ.113, 965–978. 52. Mumby, P.J., Green, E.P., Edwards, A.J. and Clark, C.D.1997 Coral reef habitat- mapping: How much detail can remote sensing provide? Mar. Biol.130, 193–202. 53. Tulloch, V.J., Possingham, H.P., Jupiter, S.D., Roelfsema, C., Tulloch, A.I.T., Klein, C.J.2013 Incorporating uncertainty associated with habitat data in marine reserve design. Biol. Conserv.162, 41–51. 54. Roelfsema, C.M., Phinn, S.R.2013 Validation. In Coral Reef Remote Sensing: A Guide for Multi-level Sensing Mapping and Assessment, Goodman, J., Purkis, S., Phinn, S.R., Eds., Springer: Berlin, German, pp. 375–365. 55. Stehman, S.V., Czaplewski, R.L. 1998 Design and analysis for thematic map accuracy assessment: Fundamental principles. Remote Sens. Environ.64, 331–344. 56. Congalton, R.G., Green, K. 1999 Assessing the Accuracy of Remotely Sensed Data: Principles and Practices, Lewis Publishers: Boca Rotan, FL, USA, p. 137. 57. Roelfsema, C.M., Phinn, S.R.2010 Calibration and validation of coral reef benthic community maps: integration of field data with high spatial resolution multi spectral satellite imagery. J. Appl. Remote Sens.4, 043527. 58. Lauer, M., Aswani, S.2008 Integrating indigenous ecological knowledge and multispectral image classification for marine habitat mapping in Oceania. Ocean Coast. Manag.51, 495–504. 59. Bouvet, G., Ferraris, J., Andréfouët, S. 2003 Evaluation of large-scale unsupervised classification of New Caledonia reef ecosystems using Landsat 7 ETM+ imagery. Oceanol. Acta ,26, 281–290. 60. Mishra, D.R., Narumalani, S., Rundquist, D., Lawson, M.2005 High-resolution ocean color remote sensing of Benthic habitats: A case study at the Roatan Island, Honduras. IEEE Trans. Geosci. Remote Sens., 43, 1592–1604. 61. Mellin, C., Andréfouët, S., Ponton, D.2007 Spatial predictability of juvenile fish species richness and abundance in a coral reef environment. Coral Reefs26, 895–907. 62. Bainbridge, S.J., Reichelt, R.E.1998 An assessment of ground truth methods for coral reef remote sensing data. In Proceedings of the 6th International Coral Reef Symposium, Townsville, Australia, 8–12 August pp. 439–444. 63. Purkis, S.J., Kenter, A.M., Oikonomou, E.K., Robinson, I.S.2002 High-resolution ground verification, cluster analysis and optical model of reef substrate coverage on Landsat TM imagery (Red Sea, Egypt). Int. J. Remote Sens.23, 1677–1698. 64. Bello-Pineda, J., Liceaga-Correa, M.A., Hernandez, H., Ponce-Hernandez, R.2005 Using aerial video to train the supervised classification of Landsat TM imagery for coral reef habitats mapping. Environ. Monit. Assess.105, 145–164. 65. Joyce, K.E., Phinn, S.R., Roelfsema, C.M., Neil, D.T., Dennison, W.C.2004 Combining Landsat ETM plus and Reef Check classifications for mapping coral reefs: A critical assessment from the southern Great Barrier Reef, Australia. Coral Reefs 23, 21–25.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 130

66. Mumby, P.J., Harborne, A.R.1999 Development of a systematic classification scheme of marine habitats to facilitate regional management and mapping of Caribbean coral reefs. Biol. Conserv.88, 155–163. 67. Aswani, S, Lauer, M.2006 Benthic mapping using local aerial photo interpretation and resident taxa inventories for designing marine protected areas. Environ. Conserv.33, 263– 273. 68. Cuevas-Jimenez, A., Ardisson, P.L.2002 Mapping shallow coral reefs by colour aerial photography. Int. J. Remote Sens.23, 3697–3712. 69. Mishra, D., Narumalani, S., Rundquist, D., Lawson, M.2006 Benthic habitat mapping in tropical marine environments using QuickBird multispectral data. Photogramm. Eng. Remote Sens.72, 1037–1048. 70. Hedley, J.D., Mumby, P.J.2002 Biological and remote sensing perspectives of pigmentation in coral reef organisms. Adv. Mar. Biol.43, 277–317. 71. Hochberg, E.J, Atkinson, M.J., Andréfouët, S.2003 Spectral reflectance of coral reef bottom-types worldwide and implications for coral reef remote sensing. Remote Sens. Environ., 85, 159–173. 72. Blaschke, T, Lang, S., Hay, G.J.2008 Object Based Image Analysis, Springer: Berlin, German, p. 836. 73. Blaschke, T.2010 Object based image analysis for remote sensing. ISPRS J. Photogramm. Remote Sens.65, 2–16. 74. Lathrop, R.G. Montesano, P. Haag, S. A 2006 multi-scale segmentation approach to mapping seagrass habitats using airborne digital camera imagery. Photogram. Eng. Remote Sens.72, 665–675. 75. Phinn, S.R., Roelfsema, C.M., Mumby, P.J.2012 Multi-scale image segmentation for mapping geomorphic and ecological zones on coral reefs. Int. J. Remote Sens.33, 3768– 3797. 76. Roelfsema, C.M., Lyons, M., Kovacs, E.M., Maxwell, P., Saunders, M.I., Samper- Villarreal, J. Phinn, S.R.2014 Multi-temporal mapping of seagrass cover, species and biomass: A semi-automated object based image analysis approach. Remote Sens. Environ.150, 172–187. 77. Zhang, C., Selch, D., Xie, Z., Roberts, C., Cooper, H., Chen, G.2013 Object-based benthic habitat mapping in the Florida Keys from hyperspectral imagery. Estuar. Coast. Shelf Sci.134, 88–97. 78. Zhang, C.2015 Applying data fusion techniques for benthic habitat mapping and monitoring in a coral reef ecosystem. ISPRS J. Photogram. Remote Sens.104, 213–223. 79. Hedley, J.D., Roelfsema, C., Phinn, S.R.2009 Efficient radiative transfer model inversion for remote sensing applications. Remote Sens. Environ.113, 2527–2532. 80. Joyce, K.E., Phinn, S.R., Roelfsema, C.M 2013. Live coral cover index testing and application with hyperspectral airborne image data. Remote Sens.5, 6116–6137. 81. Mumby, P.J., Green, E.P., Edwards, A.J., Clark, C.D.1997 Measurement of seagrass standing crop using satellite and digital airborne remote sensing. Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser.159, 51–60. 82. Phinn, S., Roelfsema, C., Dekker, A., Brando, V., Anstee, J. 2008 Mapping seagrass species, cover and biomass in shallow waters: An assessment of satellite multi-spectral and airborne hyper-spectral imaging systems in Moreton Bay (Australia). Remote Sens. Environ.112, 3413–3425.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 131

83. Lyons, M., Roelfsema, C.M., Kovacs, E., Samper-Villarreal, J., Saunders, M.I., Maxwell, P., Phinn, S.R.2015 Rapid monitoring of seagrass biomass using a simple linear modelling approach, in the field and from space. Mar. Ecol. Prog. Ser.530, 1–14. 84. Enríquez, S., Mendez, E.R., Iglesias-Prieto, R.2005 Multiple scattering on coral skeletons enhances light absorption by symbiotic algae. Limnol. Oceanogr.50, 1025–1032. 85. Andréfouët, S., Berkelmans, R., Odriozola, L., Done, T., Oliver, J., Muller-Karger, F.2002 Choosing the appropriate spatial resolution for monitoring coral bleaching events using remote sensing. Coral Reefs21, 147–154. 86. Berkelmans, R., Oliver, J.K.1999 Large-scale bleaching of corals on the Great Barrier Reef. Coral Reefs18, 55–60. 87. Klemas, V.V. 2015 Coastal and environmental remote sensing from unmanned aerial vehicles: An overview. J. Coast. Res.31, 1260–1267. 88. Kobryn, H.T., Wouters, K. Beckley, L.E. Heege, T. 2013 Ningaloo reef: Shallow marine habitats mapped using a hyperspectral sensor. PLOS ONE 8, e70105. 89. Roelfsema, C.M., Phinn, S.R., Jupiter, S. Comley, J. Albert, S. 2013 Mapping coral reefs at reef to reef-system scales (10–600 km2) using OBIA driven ecological and geomorphic principles. Int. J. Remote Sens.34, 6367–6388. 90. Elvidge, C.D., Dietz, J.B., Berkelmans, R. Andréfouët, S. Skirving, W. Strong, A.E. Tuttle, B.T. 2004 Satellite observation of Keppel Islands (Great Barrier Reef) 2002 coral bleaching using IKONOS data. Coral Reefs, 23, 123–132. 91. Riegl, B.M., Purkis, S.J. 2005 Detection of shallow subtidal corals from IKONOS satellite and QTC View (50, 200 kHz) single-beam sonar data (Arabian Gulf; Dubai, UAE). Remote Sens. Environ.95, 96–114. 92. Hedley, J.D., Roelfsema, C.M., Phinn, S.R., Mumby, and P.J.2012 Environmental and sensor limitations in optical remote sensing of coral reefs: Implications for monitoring and sensor design. Remote Sens.4, 271–302.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 132

Luminosity of the Setting Sun and Rayleigh scattering of Light by Small Particles

Banashree Hazra, Anushree Bairagi, NilufaYeasmin, Bitayan Mandal, Sneha Dey, Konia Basu and A. B. Bhattacharya Department of Remote Sensing and GIS, JIS University, Agarpara, Kolkata 700109

Abstract: Some early results of the luminosity of the setting Sun over Brahmaputra River at Guwahati, Assam has been taken as reference and extended the similar study at Panchmari hill station of Madya Pradesh for investigating the scattering property of light by small particles with a view to identify the exact behaviour of Rayleigh scattering in between the non- selective scattering and the Mie scattering. The analysis may able to highlight some of the important properties of the particle sizes in terms of wavelength and the magnitude of the intensity. Moreover, it will give emphasis of the altitude variation of the particles with other astronomical contributions like cosmic rays.

Keywords: Luminosity, Setting Sun, Rayleigh scattering, Mie scattering, Cosmic rays

1 Introduction Rayleigh scattering is found to occur from individual molecules where the phenomenon of scattering happens owing to the molecular polarizability that describes the amount of the electrical charges on the molecule moving in an electric field. Rayleigh scattering from a single particle can be generally expressed as cross section. The major constituent of the atmosphere (nitrogen) has a Rayleigh cross section of 5.1×10−31 m2 at a wavelength of 532 nm (green light). It means that at atmospheric pressure, nearly a fraction 10−5 of light will be scattered for every meter of travel. Interestingly, the Rayleigh scattering provides the atmosphere with its blue color [1]. Previously reported photograph of the luminosity of the setting Sun standing on Brahmaputra River at Guwahati, Assam has been taken as reference of this work [2, 3] and extended the similar study at other location Panchmari of Madya Pradesh with a view to get further information of the scattering property of light by small particles. The results achieved from the photographic documentations are analyzed and compared in this paper.

2 Theoretical Approach of the Scattering Rayleigh scattering is caused by diffuse sky radiation and that is responsible for the blue colour of the sky and the yellow tone of the Sun. On the other hand, scattering by particles similar or greater than the wavelength of light is considered by Mie scattering. The size of a scattering particle can be parameterized by taking the ratio of its characteristic dimension r and wavelength λfrom the equation [4, 5],

(1)

Rayleigh scattering is defined as scattering in the small size parameter where x ≪ 1. Scattering from larger spherical particles may be explained by taking help of the Mie theory for an arbitrary size parameter x. For low value of x the Mie theory comes down to the

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 133

Rayleigh approximation. Amount of Rayleigh scattering occurs for a beam of light and depends on the size of the particles and the wavelength. Intensity of the scattered light varies as the sixth power of the particle size and also varies inversely with the fourth power of the wavelength [6]. Intensity I of light scattered by a single small particle originating from a beam of unpolarized light of wavelength λ and intensity I0 can be expressed as,

462 1 cos22 2 nd 1   (2) II 0 22    2Rn  2  2 

In Eqn. (2), R is the distance to the particle, θ the scattering angle, n the refractive index of the particle, and d the diameter of the particle. Rayleigh scattering cross-section can be obtained from:

2 21 5dn 6 2  (3)  s  42 32 n  On the other hand, in photometric principle if two sources create identical illumination on a surface, then the ratio of the luminous intensity becomes equal to the ratio of the square of the respective distances of the two sources from the surface. In the observation cameras are so adjusted that successive images are to be photographed during sunset in a manner to get equal illumination for all the snaps taken. If we consider, I1 and I2 as the luminous intensities of the sources with respect to the illumination intensities E1 and E2 respectively and r1,r2 represent the corresponding distances from the sources then under the condition of equal illumination intensities

(4)

3 Camera used for recording the Data Both in our early and present observations, we used three very good quality digital cameras of same type with so many facilities of recording. The details of the cameras used are given in Table 1. We used three cameras simultaneously to take photograph with a view to verify all the fine points of each individual record. This further helps to avoid the risk of missing any important observation owing to unavoidable instrumental problem that may appear during recording. Table 1 Details of the cameras used for taking photograph Camera maker Nikon Corporation Camera model Nikon D90 F-stop f/9 to f/5.6 Exposure time 1/320 sec to 1/125 sec Focal length 105 mm Max aperture 5 ISO speed ISO-200

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 134

The principle of the observation is presented in Figure 1. In course of the observations of taking the snaps of the setting Sun the illuminating surfaces are to be so accommodated by adjusting the camera that the two surfaces produce identical illumination.

Figure 1 Illustrated the principle of observation

4 Photograph of Sunset as Observed from Brahmaputra River and Panchmari Hill Figure 2, exhibits the photograph of Sunset as observed from Brahmaputra River of Guwahati, Assam (Lat. 26.190N, Long. 91.730E). It is seen from the figure that there is a significant change of hour-angle with reference to the horizon. Also the change of hour- angle with reference to the horizon is also a matter of concern.

Figure 2 Photograph of sunset as viewed from Brahmaputra River on January 26, 2014

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 135

If we consider the positions of the Sun at three different altitudes with three different colours, yellow, orange and red respectively as indicated in the photographic record then utilizing the principle of photometry one can calculate the intensity ratios of object and image corresponding to those three colours. The intensity values we have presented in Table 2. If we consider the intensities of images of the Sun formed in the camera for three different altitudes and colours are same then the ratios of intensity of the Sun (as object) for different altitudes and colours can be obtained.This is presented in Table 2.

Table 2 Calculation of intensity ratios using photometric principle Intensity ratios corresponding to photographs of the Sun Y:O = 1.08 O:R = 1.09 Y:R = 1.18

In Table 3, we have shown three distinctly visible colour of the Sun, viz. yellow, orange and red with their corresponding wavelength ranges and frequencies in addition to the calculation of intensity ratios using Rayleigh scattering theory.

Table 3 Visible color of the Sun and the measurement of intensity ratios using Rayleigh scattering theory Colour Time Altitude Wavelength Average According of the last (IST) angle range (nm) wavelength to three (nm) Rayleigh photographs theory

Yellow 16:38 19.13 570 – 590 580 1.18 Orange 16:40 18.75 590 – 620 605 1.64 Red 16:42 18.38 620 – 750 685 1.94

With a view to make a comparison of intensity ratios using photometric principle as well as Rayleigh scattering theory, we choose the mean colour yellow as a reference one for finding the intensity ratios of other two colours, viz., orange and red. This comparison has been done for both Rayleigh scattering theories as well as for principle of photometry. The result of this comparison is presented in Figure 3 showing a remarkable deviation in the calculated intensity ratios. The major deviation shown in the data when the theory of Rayleigh scattering is taking into account conclusively suggests that a careful study of the intensity-wavelength relation as proposed by Rayleigh should be examined more thoroughly with further data of and sunset hours for different latitudes. This should be also repeated for sunrise data at multi-locations with different altitudes.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 136

2.5 According to Rayleigh scattering According to Photometry

1.5

1 Intensity ratiosw.r.t.yellow 0.5

0 16:35 16:35 16:36 16:37 16:37 16:38 16:39 16:40 16:40 16:41 16:42 16:42 Time (IST)

Figure 3: Plot of intensity ratios with reference to yellow colour according to Rayleigh scattering theory and principle of photometry

With a view to re-examine the scattering phenomena in a greater detail we took observations at Pachmarhi (22.47° N, 78.43° E), a hill station in the central Indian state of Madhya Pradesh, whose elevation is 1,067 m. Photograph of sunset as viewed from Pachmarhi is shown in Figure 4. The particulars of the six photographs have clarified in Table 4.

Figure 4Photograph of sunset as viewed from Pachmarhi, a hill station in the central Indian state of Madhya Pradesh

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 137

Table 4 Typical recorded data as shown in Figure 4 Date of Time Position of the Observation ( IST) Photograph

05.02.2019 17:31 Top Left 05.02.2019 17:35 Top Middle 05.02.2019 17:37 Top Right 05.02.2019 17:40 Bottom Left 05.02.2019 17:42 Bottom Middle 05.02.2019 17:52 Bottom Right

A detailed analysis is in progress with reference to the early observations but the present analysis will be extended further to identify the exact behavior of Rayleigh scattering in between the non-selective scattering and the Mie scattering. The analysis is assumed to resolve some of the important properties of the particle sizes in terms of wavelength and the magnitude of the intensity. Moreover, it will take care of the altitude variation of the particles with other astronomical contributions like cosmic rays.

5 Discussions Wavelength dependence of the scattering (~λ−4) indicates that shorter (blue) wavelengths are more scattered than the longer (red) one. The present findings show some interesting variations with reference to horizon and thus may provide further information of the scattering properties [7, 8]. Rayleigh scattering is a very good approximation within different media of varying refractive indices for which scattering particles have a small size parameter. For the purpose of calculating the visibility of azimuth and altitudes for northern hemispheres, particularly the hour-angle, we may conveniently use the schematic diagram proposed in Figure 5.

Figure 5 Schematic diagram for a visibility of azimuths and altitudes for northern hemisphere

All the stars have its own spectrum and to be considered separately when the Rayleigh scattering is to be implemented. For example, additionally the oxygen in the Earth's atmosphere absorbs wavelengths at the edge of the ultra-violet region of the spectrum. The

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 138

resulting colour, which appears like a pale blue, is essentially a mixture of all the scattered colours, mainly blue and green. On the contrary the longer wavelengths such as red and yellow light are directly visible making the sun itself a slightly yellowish hue though when observed from space, the sky is black and the sun is white.

Acknowledgements: We express our sincere thanks to all the authors who took early photographic observations of Rayleigh scattering and to Dr. J. Pandit, in particular, for supporting an extension of the present study as required.

References 1. Bhattacharya, R. and Bhattacharya, A. B. 2015, From Rainbow to Rayleigh scattering: Nature‘s amazing beauties and their scientific impacts, LAP Lambert, Germany.

2. Bhattacharya, A. B., Pandit. J., Raha, B., Halder, D., Bhattacharya, R., Biswas, G., Roy, R. and Nag, A.2014,A Relook on the Rayleigh Scattering of Light from the Sunset observations Viewing from Brahmaputra River. International Journal of Innovative Research in Science, Engineering and Technology, 3 (Spl Issue-2): 450-455. 3. Bhattacharya, A. B., Pandit, J., Bhattacharya, R. and Roy, R. 2015, Rayleigh scattering and Mie scattering of Sunlight at Varying Altitudes by Atmospheric Gas Particles and Water Droplets. International Journal of Advanced and Innovative Research, 4: 67-71. 4. Chakraborti, S. 2007, Verification of the Rayleigh scattering cross section. American Journal of Physics, 57: 824−826. 5. Lerosey, G. and Fink, M.2013, Acousto-optic imaging: Merging the better of two worlds, Nature Photonics, 7: 265–267. 6. Bohren, C. F. and Huffman, D. 1983, Absorption and scattering of light by small particles. John Wiley, New York. 7. Mercier, Bertrand and Castelain, Thomas 2019, Dynamic analysis of a Rayleigh scattering setup using synthetic light signals from a modulated LED. Review of Scientific Instruments 90, 063109; https://doi.org/10.1063/1.5112802. 8. Yao Can, Sophie Brès Camille and Thévenaz Luc 2018, Effect of enhanced Rayleigh scattering on the random fiber laser efficiency. Technical Digest, Optical Society of America, https://doi.org/10.1364/SSL.2018.ST4D.

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 139

Study of some irreversible inhibitors as drugs of Human Cathepsin B by Quantitative Structure Activity Relationship Method

Indrani Sarkar1, Farooq Ahmed2 1 Department of Basic Science and Humanities, Narula Institute of Technology Agarpara, Kolkata 2MTech Student, Department of Computer Science and Engineering Narula Institute of Technology, Agarpara, Kolkata [email protected]

Abstract: Human Cathepsin B, a lysosomal cysteine protease is a potential target for the development of drugs to treat several important diseases. A number of irreversible inhibitors targeting cathepsin B have been developed in the past several years. The first inhibitor of this type was isolated from Aspergillus japonicus, identified as N-(L-3.trans- carboxyoxirane-2-carbonyl)-L-leucine-4- guanidinobutylamide popularly known as E-64. It inhibits cysteine proteases like cathepsins B and L, papain and calpains. So, E-64 and its derivatives are not, however, selective inhibitors of cathepsins B. As specific inhibitors of the various cysteine proteinases are required for treating specific diseases, the main aim of this study is to build a QSAR models to find out the important features for a specific inhibitor of human cathepsin B. The biological activity IC 50 is taken as the dependent variable and the nine molecular descriptors as independent variables to build the model. QSAR model along with molecular modeling studies is used to identify and to distinguish active compounds from inactive compounds based on the calculated molecular and physicochemical properties.

Keywords: QSAR, Cathepsin B, inhibitors, Descriptors

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 140

Studies on Vegetation Indices based on Landsat OLI 8 and TIRS Data Simran Parvin and A. B. Bhattacharya Department of Remote Sensing and GIS,JIS University, Agarpara, Kolkata 700109

Abstract: Some studies on vegetation indices based on Landsat 8 Operational Land Imager (OLI) and Thermal Infrared Sensor (TIRS) data are reported in this paper. The analyzing technique of three different types of vegetation indices, viz., normalized different vegetation index, soil adjusted vegetation index and enhanced vegetation index are discussed considering the combination of surface reflectance at two or more wavelengths designed to highlight a particular property of vegetation. Overview of the Operational Land Imager (OLI) and the Thermal Infrared Sensor (TIRS) are elaborately discussed including the spacecraft bus involved therein. Some dominant features of the two sensors and the flow chart followed for implementing the method are highlighted. Landsat OLI 8 and TIRS satellite image is presented in addition to the normalized vegetation index as well as the enhanced vegetation index and the results are examined with further possibilities of remote sensing applications. Keywords: Landsat, Operational Land Imager, Thermal Infrared Sensor, Vegetation Indices, Surface Reflectance

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 141

Frequency and Amplitude Spectra Analysis of the Sound of Indian Folk Musical Instruments

Sudipta Pal1, Rinku Sarkar2 and Sushmita Saha3 Department of Physics, University of Kalyani, Kalyani-741235, West Bengal 1Corresponding author Email: [email protected] 2Email: [email protected] 3Presenting author email: [email protected]

Abstract: The frequency and amplitude spectrum of the sound of traditional Indian folk musical instruments like Khamak and Ektara has been analyzed by using very common instruments like smartphone (for recording the sound) and AUDACITY software(for analyzing the sound frequency). By using Fourier transformation of recorded sound of the folk instrument the frequency distribution have been analyzed. The fundamental frequency and overtones for Ektara has been estimated. It is interesting to note that quite similar type of frequency and amplitude pattern has been observed for both of the instruments. But the fundamental frequencies and harmonics are very prominent and last longer in case of Ektara. The sound spectra of the musical instruments of different size have also been studied. The detail information about frequency, amplitude of different boles of these folk instruments may be helpful in digital signal processing. This work has been done under MSc project.

Keywords: Khamak, Ektara, Indian Folk Musical Instruments, Fourier analysis of Sound Wave

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 142

Fuzzy Inventory Model for Deteriorating Items in a Supply Chain System with Time Dependent Demand Rate Srabani Shee1 and Tripti Chakrabarti2 1Department of Applied Mathematics, University of Calcutta, 92 A.P.C. Road, Kolkata- 700009, India E-mail: [email protected] 2Dean of Basic Science, Techno India University, Kolkata, India (FormerlyProfessorofAppliedMathematics,UniversityofCalcutta,Kolkata,India) E-mail: [email protected]

Abstract: In this paper, a fuzzy inventory model has been developed for deteriorating items assuming the demand rate to be constant for some time and then as a linear function of time. In reality, it is seen that, the cycle time of almost every supply chain system is uncertain, so we describe it as symmetric triangular fuzzy number. Signed distance method is used to defuzzify the cost function. The model is illustrated with the help of numerical example. Sensitivity analysis has also been conducted to study the effect of the parameter on optimum policies.

Keywords: Supply Chain Management, Constant and Time Dependent Demand rate, Deterioration, Triangular Fuzzy number (symmetric), Signed Distance Method

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 143

An overview of health risk associated with air pollution at Kolkata, West Bengal Debanjali Roy1, Subhangi Chakraborty1, Koustav Bhowmik1, Sourav Mandal1, P. Ghosh2, Amitlal Bhattacharya3, Soumini Chaudhury1 and Rina Bhattacharya1 1Department of Physics, JIS University, Agarpara, West Bengal, 700109 2Department of Physics, S.R.F. College, Beldanga, West Bengal, 742133 3Department of Physics, D.N. College, Aurangabad, West Bengal, 742201

[email protected] Mob. No. 8017495229

Abstract: Over the globe people are in danger due to poor air quality induced diseases. Moreover air pollutants viz. SOx, NOxand particulate matters (PM) are damaging our climate continuously. Improvement of air quality is highly needed to save our life and to resist the pace of climate change. In this paper, we have attempted to compare air quality with special reference to Particulate Matter less than 2.5 micron-m (PM2.5) between Kolkata and New Delhi and assess the level of health concern using air quality index (AQI). It is observed that the air quality of Kolkata (22°57Ń, 88°36É) is slightly better than Delhi (28°36Ń, 77°13É),and but high even in comparison with the industrial area like Haldia(22.0627° N, 88.0833° E).A positive trend of + 0.306 of AQI is observed in winter at Kolkata. However, the air quality of Kolkata is marginally better than Delhi for both the seasons but higher in comparison with the industry belt Haldia in West Bengal. The air quality of Kolkata is marginally better than Delhi for both the seasons. So, a more detailed study and awareness is needed to improve our air quality for the benefit of human existence.

Key Words: Air quality; Health hazard; Particulate matter; Pollutants

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 144

Design and Development of Perforated Tray Aerator

Subha Manash Roy1and B. C. Mal2 1Agricultural and Food Engineering Department, IIT Kharagpur 721302 2Vice Chancellor, JIS University, Agarpara, Kolkata 700129

Abstract: In the present study, perforated tray aerator (PTA) aerator has been design and developed in suitability for intensive aquaculture pond. Keeping the perforated hole diameter d: (2 mm) and flow rate: Q (10 L/s) as constants, experiments were lead with different numbers of trays (n): 1, 2, 3 and 4.The optimum numbers of trays were establish to be three. After that keeping the numbers of trays in PTA as constant (3), the response surface methodology (RSM) and central composite rotatable design (CCRD) were used to further optimize the d and Q respectively. The optimum values of the d and Q are found to be 1 mm and 19 L/s respectively at which the maximum SOTR and SAE are found to be 0.463 kgO2/h and 1.382 kgO2/kWh respectively.

Keywords: Perforated tray aerator, Aquaculture, Standard oxygen transfer rate, Standard aeration efficiency

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 145

Arsenic Contamination of Groundwater in West Bengal: A Human Health Threat M. Roy Centre for Environmental Studies, Vidyasagar University, Midnapur, West Bengal 721102 [email protected] Abstract:Arsenic contamination in groundwater in the Ganga-Brahmaputra fluvial plains in India and its consequences to human health have been reported as one of the world‘s biggest natural calamities. In India, seven states namely- West Bengal, Jharkhand, Bihar, Uttar Pradesh in the flood plain of the Ganga River; Assam and Manipur in the flood plain of the Brahmaputra and Imphal rivers and Rajnandga on village in Chhattisgarh state have so far been reported affected by arsenic contamination in groundwater above the permissible limit of 10 μg/L. People in these affected states have chronically been exposed to drinking Arsenic contaminated hand tube-wells water. Arsenic toxicity is a great threat in human civilization especially in West Bengal, India. Bio-accumulation of arsenic is occurring from the food grains as irrigated with arsenic-contaminated water. Arsenic contamination of groundwater in West Bengal leads to adverse effects on human health. Chronic exposure to arsenic can cause skin cancer and other health effects. To combat the arsenic crisis in West Bengal it desperately needs to increase awareness and educate the people about the problem.

Key Words: Arsenicosis, Toxicity, Cancer, Ground Water, Drinking Water Contamination

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 146

A novel angular distribution function for characterization of breast cancer using k-Nearest Neighbor algorithm

Mainak Biswas1, Saikat Maity1, Shubhro Chakrabartty2 1Deparmentof Computer Science and Engineering JIS University, Kolkata-700109, India 2Department of Nanoscience and Engineering Inje university, Gimhae, 50834, Republic of Korea [email protected]

Abstract: Breast cancer is second most common cause of death after lung cancer. Breast cancer kills approximately 42,260 people (41,760 women and 500 men) every year. Earlier detection of breast cancer can ensure earlier treatment and saving of thousands of lives. In this regard, we present an automated way of characterizing breast cancer from 699 instances of data. We present a novel Angular Distribution Function for Classification (ADFC) based on K-Nearest Neighbors algorithm for classification of breast cancer patients. The ADFC is based on computing the length of an arc connecting two points in a circle. It compares the length of arcs each test instance makes with central points of each class cluster. It associates the test instance with the class having smallest arc length; K10 cross-validation i.e., 10 part for training and 1 part for testing. The performance of ADFC is compared with standard algorithms such as general KNN algorithm, PLDL algorithm. The algorithm was also validated using standard Iris dataset. The results clearly showed that ADFC was better by 22% to its nearest rival for breast cancer dataset and 70% better for Iris dataset.

Keywords: Classification, supervised learning, breast cancer

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 147

Electromagnetic Radiation from mobile tower and avians: A pilot survey at Arambagh subdivision of Hooghly District, West Bengal

Sauvik Bose1, Rajeshwari Roy2, Urbi Chakraborti1, Risha Samanta1, Sipra Jana1, Tanusree Mondal1, Soumini Chaudhury1and Rina Bhattacharya1

1Department of Physics JIS University, Kolkata, West Bengal, 700109 2Department of Environmental Studies Rabindra Bharati University, Kolkata,West Bengal, 700007 [email protected]

Abstract: Rapid growth of urbanisation, industrialisation and telecommunication systems over the globe has become a concern due to its impact on the living beings. Electromagnetic radiation (EMR) is a new pollution and most of the studies are concentrated about the adverse effects on human. However, some scattered studies are done on the possible impact of EMR on wildlife and birds. A controversy exists between positive and negative feedback about the EMR exposure. A pilot survey is conducted during the month of September in four locations of Arambagh subdivision (22.88°N, 87.78°E), West Bengal with the intent to record the occurrence of birds in the vicinity of mobile tower and tower free zone.

Key Words: Electromagnetic Radiation, Habitat, Mobile tower, Bird, Radio frequency

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 148

A statistical approach to analyze the thermal stress during summer months

Ahana Mitra1, Gourab Biswas2, Joyeesha Manna1, Arkadip Nandan1, Soumi Bose1, 1 1 Soumini Chaudhury and Rina Bhattacharya 1Department of Physics, JIS University, and Kolkata, West Bengal, 700109 2Department of Physiology, Krisnath College, Behrampore, West Bengal, 742101 [email protected]

Abstract: Occupational heat stress is always associated with major health burden. Thermal discomfortability rises day by day for the workers engaged in outdoor as well as indoor activities due to increase in mean global temperature. This thermal discomfortability often worsens during summer months (March, April and May) particularly in tropics. The present study highlights thermal stresses over four metro cities viz, Delhi (28°36Ń, 77°13É), Mumbai (18°58Ń, 72°49É), Kolkata (22°57Ń, 88°36É) and Chennai (13°5Ń, 80°16É) of varying geographical and climatic locations of India, with the help of two significant indices THI and WBGT. It is observed that during most of the days (>75%) of summer months of all four major cities belong to hot category. Hence proper measurement should be taken following the ACGIH guide line to prevent effects of excessive heat exposure on commoners.

Keywords: Heat stress, Thermal comfortability, Thermohygrometric Index, Wet Bulb Globe Temperature

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 149

Bioelectricity Generation from Waste Water using Microbial Fuel Cell: A Literature Survey

Dipankar Ghosh1, Shrestha Debnath1 and Pritha Mondal1 1Microbial Engineering & Algal Biotechnology Laboratory, Department of Biotechnology JIS University, 81 Nilgunj Road, Agarpara Kolkata 700 109 [email protected]

Abstract: Bioelectricity generation using waste water treatment is a big industrial dream project. Microbial fuel cell technology is one of the most promising sustainable approaches to attain this goal. Major objective of waste water treatment are water purification or desalination, value added energy generations, environmental protection and human health. In this context, microbial fuel cells can efficiently degrade organic and inorganic constituents of waste water towards value added process development likely bioelectricity generation. However, existing microbial fuel cell platform for waste water recycling and electricity generation are in infancy. It requires lots of research work to make this technology industrially viable. To this end, current article briefly discusses general discussion about microbial fuel cell configurations, waste water utilization as potential feedstock and major limitation of exiting microbial fuel cell technology for waste water purification.

Keywords: Bioelectricity, Current density, Exoelectrogens, Power density, Waste water recycling

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 150

Observations of the Cyclone ‘MORA’ from Remote Sensing Perspective using Radar and Satellite Studies

Hazer R. D. Warjri1, Hasina Paslein1, Mebashongdor Kharkongor1, Dipankar Dam1, Zahidul Islam, D. K. Tripathi2 and A. B. Bhattacharya1

1Department of Remote Sensing and GIS, JIS University, Agarpara, Kolkata 700109 2Department of Physics, Narula Institute of Technology, Agarpara, Kolkata 700109

Abstract: The coastal districts of West Bengal and Bangladesh experience tropical cyclones having disastrous consequences on the lives of human beings, animal population, properties and socio economy of the affected region. This study provides an understanding of localization, tracking, threat identification and characterization of cyclone and lightning associated with the cyclonic storm Mora 2017 over the Bay of Bengal. Two types of observations, viz.., satellite data of INSAT-3D enhanced imageries and the cyclone detection Doppler radar data have been considered for investigating the characteristic feature of the said cyclone. Analysing the multi technique observed data we have reported some interesting features noted during the cyclone Mora.

Keywords: Radio Signal, Satellite, Radar, Cyclonic Storm, INSAT-3D

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 151

A Two-element Array with Tulip-flower shaped Antennas for X- band Application

Kalyan Sundar Kola and Anirban Chatterjee Department of Electronics and Communication Engineering, National Institute of Technology Goa, Farmagudi, Ponda, Goa-403401, India [email protected]

Abstract: A two-element linear array with Tulip-flower shaped fractal antennas has been reported in this paper. The proposed single element is designed to operate in X-band with the center frequency frof 8.50GHz for the application of satellite communication. The single element is consists of three no. of scaled circles generated from center circle and the entire geometry looks like Tulip-flower. The slots are helps to resonate the structure at desired frequency with reasonable gain and bandwidth. To obtain improved parametric results, a two-element linear array with Wilkinson equal power divider has been designed.The single element and the array maintain a gain of 7.05 and 9.51 dBi respectively. The obtained absolute bandwidth and the efficiency of the proposed antenna and the array are able to fulfill the requirement for the satellite application.

Keywords: Two-element linear array, X-band, Bandwidth, Antenna, Satellite

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 152

Effect of Pre-Monsoon Lightning Activity on Surface Nox& O3 over GWB Arpita Das, Sujay Pal, Subrata Kumar Midya Department of Atmospheric Sciences, Calcutta University, 51/2 Hazra Road,Kolkata-700019 [email protected]

Abstract: Lightning is an important source of tropospheric reactive nitrogen oxide species (NOx) which affect regional air chemistryand directly influence the abundance of tropospheric ozone. The major oxidant O3 and NO2 produced at the upper troposphere due to lightning activity influence the surface concentration of NO2 and O3. Excess surface concentration of O3 can damage forests, crops and can irritate human lungs. For last few years, West Bengal is getting highly affected due to lightning activities. In the present work we have tried to find quantitatively the effects of lightning activity on surface NO2 and O3 at different places of GWB during the pre-monsoon Nor‘wester days (April to early June) for the first-time using ground based lightning network data considering CG, IC and total lightning events. Lightning flash rates for IC, CG and total lightning are analyzed at different radial distances (5 km, 10 km, 15 km, and 25 km) around the stations to check the correlations of surface NO2 and O3 with IC, CG and total lightning counts.

Keywords: Lightning flashes,Nor’wester, Surface ozone, Thunderstorm activity

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 153

A Study on Emission potentiality of Methane and Nitrous Oxide from Rice Seedbed

Susmita Karmakar1 and Biswajit Kar2 1Department of Environmental Sciences, Central University of Jharkhand, Ranchi, Jharkhand 2Department of Environmental Science, Kanchrapara College, West Bengal [email protected] Abstract: Agricultural system especially rice cultivation is considered as the major contributor of greenhouse gases to the atmosphere. Current agricultural management techniques are focusing to achieve sustainability in agricultural system. Water as well as nutrient management in rice paddy is responsible for production and emission of greenhouse gases to the atmosphere. The present study aimed to find out the nitrous oxide (N2O) and methane (CH4) emission density from rice seedbed where maintaining of soil moisture content is an essential need. A continuous three years field experiments have been performed using different moisture levels. The experimental set up was consisted with two types of seedbed i.e. moist bed (non-flooded condition) and flooded bed (flooded condition). A short duration rice variety namely Satabdi was sown on four different dates starting from 2nd June with an interval of seven days during the kharif seasons. This comprehensive study was conducted at agricultural farm, Bidhan Chandra Krishi Viswavidyalaya, West Bengal. The gaseous emissions had been estimated using static chamber based Gas Chromatograph method. Emissions of selected GHGs were measured during germination, 1st leaf and 3rd leaf stage of rice seedlings in the seedbeds. Simultaneously soil temperature (at 5, 10 and 15cm depth) was recorded daily. Ambient weather parameters i.e., mean temperature, rainfall and sunshine hours were also monitored. The statistical analysis implies that seeding dates and moisture regimes significantly affect the methane and nitrous oxide fluxes. A year wise variation in st methane and nitrous oxide emissions was also observed. CH4 fluxes were higher during 1 leaf th stage under 4 seeding date at flooding conditions. However, major N2O flux density was rd rd noted at 3 leaf stage under 3 seeding date at moist bed. CH4 andN2O fluxes from rice seedbeds were strongly correlated with soil temperature especially at 5 cm soil depth. Moreover, a trade off association in between these two greenhouse gases was observed. Ambient weather conditions were significantly associated with CH4 and N2O emissions. Results indicated that the seedling stage have the capability to emit considerable amount of greenhouse gases to the atmosphere. Hence, special attention should be considered in future to check GHGs emissions from rice seedbeds. Keywords: Ambient weather, greenhouse gas, moisture condition, rice, seedbed, soil temperature

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 154

Group-Assisted Purification (GAP) Chemistry for the Synthesis of Pyran Derivatives: A Critical Survey

Partha Pratim Ghosh Department of Chemistry, JIS University, Agarpara, Kolkata, India

Abstract: 2H-pyran and 4H-pyrans backbone have a wide range of application in the pharmaceutical field. Pyrans and their analogues take up most important arrangement in biological organic chemistry due to their diverse applications. Many methodologies have been developed for the synthesis of this important class of compounds. However, some methods always result in poor yield, less purity, and by-products along with the desired product. To overcome this situation, a new concept for purification has recently been developed by simply washing with the common solvents to save materials (silica gels, solvents, energy and manpower) substantially to avoid traditional chromatography and recrystallization purification methods. The Group-Assisted Purification (GAP) chemistry involves immense control not only on the physical solubility but also on chemical reactivity and stereo selectivity of both reagents and products. In this review, we have summarized various methods involved for the synthesis of pyran derivativates followed by GAP chemistry.

Keywords: GAP Chemistry, Pyran derivatives, Purification, Chemical reaction

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 155

Epithelial to Mesenchymal Transition in Oral Cancer Sanjeet Kumar Das and R. R. Paul Department of Oral and Dental Science, JIS University Kolkata

Abstract: The phenomenon of Epithelial Mesenchymal Transition (EMT) presently has emerged as an important regulator in metastatic progression of oral cancer by facilitating neoplastic cell invasion and dissemination to the distant organs. The dynamic process of EMT is linked to the normal developmental phenomenon, wound healing, tissue regeneration and organ fibrosis. Its biological role in carcinogenesis and progression has been explored in the recent past. EMT encompasses a group of ―cell biological programs‖ that are modulated by tissue site, degree of malignancy, contextual signals experienced by individual cancer cells. Heterotypic signals from neoplastic stroma have also been linked to triggering EMT program in malignant cells; in the form of TGFs, Wnts and certain interleukins. Moreover, recent evidences suggest tumor metabolism to be a modulating factor for the EMT program. The markers signifying EMT in clinical oncology practice have gone a long way in prognostifying the course of malignancy; as also being helpful in clinical trials in light of therapeutic approach; so that innovative tools for targeting the Epithelial/Mesenchymal status in metastatic cancer gains a foothold in Translational Oncology Research. The following presentation encompasses a review of the emerging concept of EMT in metastasis of oral cancer and paving the path for future research.

Keywords: Epithelial Mesenchymal Transition, Metastatic Progression, Malignancy, Tumor Metabolism

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 156

Two Warehouse Inventory Model for deteriorating items withLead Time and Selling price Dependent Demand rate underShortages Raja Mollah1, Srabani Shee2 and Tripti Chakrabarti3 1Department of Mathematics, Techno India University, Kolkata, India, [email protected] 2Department of Applied Mathematics, University of Calcutta, 92 A.P.C. Road, Kolkata-700009, India [email protected] 3Dean of Basic Science, Techno India University, Kolkata, India (Formerly Professor of Applied Mathematics, University of Calcutta, Kolkata, India) [email protected]

Abstract: In the past few decade researchers have developed their economic order quantity (EOQ) model under constant deterioration and constant demand. However it is not true in practical practice. This paper investigated two warehouse inventory model for a single deteriorating items in which demand rate is a function of selling price when the order quantity becomes higher than the storage capacity in own warehouse then the system involver two warehouse model. In this model excess inventory are stored in the rented warehouse which is assumed to change higher unit holding cost than owned warehouse. At first owned warehouse is filled out by its storage capacity and the rest kept in the rented warehouse. So at first the items in rented warehouse decreases due to demand and deterioration until it reaches to the level zero, while on the other hand a portion of the inventory on owned warehouse is depleted due to deterioration only. Then the inventory on owned warehouse decreases due to demand and deterioration until it reaches to the level zero. In this model shortages are allowed during lead time and it is completely backlogged. To illustrate the proposed model, a numerical example and sensitivity analysis with respect to different associated parameters has been presented.

Keywords: EOQ, Lead time, two warehouse system, deterioration, price dependent demand and shortages

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 157

Comparative study of Extended Kalman filter,Adaptive Extended Kalman Filter and UnscentedKalman Filter

Gaurav Kumar1,Koushik Shit2, Kavita Nanshikar2, Soumitra Das2 1Majestic Technical Services, Regent Park, Kolkata- 700040 2National Institute of Technology Goa, Ponda, Goa-403401

Abstract: Kalman filter is one of the best state estimators for Gaussian as well as non- Gaussian noise. For nonlinear system Kalman filter fails to work and to overcome this various modification of Kalman filter is used in order to estimate the state. These modifications include Extended Kalman filter (EKF), Adaptive Extended Kalman Filter (AEKF), Unscented Kalman Filter (UKF) etc. An analytical study of different type of Kalman filters for nonlinear system is presented in this article.

Keywords: Gaussian Noise, Kalman Filter, Non-linear systems, Unscented Kalman Filter

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in Proceedings of JIS University National Conference on Multidisciplinary Research, 2019 158

The Impact of Information and Communication on the Socio- Economic Development in the Rural Areas of Eastern India Samiran Chowdhury and Moumita Poddar JIS University, 81Nilgunj Road, Agarpara, Kolkata-700109

Abstract: The Telecommunication Sector is a major contributor of socio-economic development in emerging and developing nations especially in countries like India. A large investment in telecom infrastructure, followed by government policy to allow private telecom companies to operate successfully has led to widespread reach and use of telecom throughout the country. This study tries to bring out the impact of this Information and Telecom Technologies on the socio- economic development in the rural parts of eastern India. The increasing returns from mobile adoption are also emerging when assessing the impact on economic and productivity growth. To promote mobile telecommunications penetration, liberalization policies along with appropriate regulatory frameworks are recommended. With the affordability and network reach increasing in all parts of Eastern India over the years. We will try to assess the impact of this telecommunication sector on the socio-economic development in the rural areas. Moreover, this study will also try to bring out the social impact of ICT in this informative age on the rural people.

Keywords: Liberalization, Socio- Economic Development, Telecommunication Sector, Telecom Infrastructure

Ideal International E- Publication www.isca.co.in